This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
 21
H.Ü. 30 Sept. 24 , 1960

vk
CHANGE NO. 7 TO H.O. PUB . NO . 35 uri
Just SAILING DIRECTIONS FOR
wo.55 THE EAST COAST OF ENGLAND LIBRARY
Change 7 FIFTH EDITION , 1951
( Formerly No. 150 )

To correct this publication , the following changes must be applied :

No. 1
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7

Published by the U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office under the authority of the Secretary of the Navy .
T
MEN
ART OFT
DEP HE
NA
V
Y
CE

HYDRO
FI

GRAPH
OF

ICS

United States
Government Printing Office
Washington : 1960

For Sale by authorized Sales Agents of the U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office.. Price 35 cents .
 SUGGESTED PROCEDURE FOR USING THIS CHANGE

1. Remove wire fastener.

2. Separate List of Effective Pages and Short Correction sheets from remaining Change Pages.
3. Check completeness of Change by comparing Change Pages with List of Effective Pages.
4. Using List of Effective Pages as a guide, insert each Change Page in its proper place in the book,
first removing the obsolete page being replaced. Set obsolete pages temporarily aside.
5. Apply Short Corrections, if any, which are included at the end of the List of Effective Pages. Short
Corrections sheets may be inserted intact immediately following the List of Effective Pages and referred
to as needed, or they may be cut apart and pasted to the pages affected . Short Corrections for any given
page should be kept together on a single strip. Remove the obsolete strip when the new one is applied.
6. From the obsolete pages previously set aside, transfer the Notice to Mariners dated later than the
date of this Change to the corresponding replacement pages. Also remove and discard all obsolete
Notices to Mariners dated prior to the date of this Change from other pages in the publication.
7. Record application of this Change to the Record Page in the front part of the book.
 1176 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Change No. 7
H. O. Pub. No. 35 – Fifth Edition, 1951
( Formerly No. 150 )

This list supersedes any previous list. It lists each page that belongs in the publication and guides in the application of Change
Pages and Short. Corrections. If more than one Change is applied at one time, only the list included with the latest Change needs to
be used.

Examples and Explanations of Listed Page Numbers

18 Page originally published in this edition.
19-2 Replacement page from Change 2. It replaces page 19 or replacement page from an earlier Change. Only
" odd " pages are so designated, although actual correction may have been made to the reverse or
" even " side of the sheet.
20— Short Page 20 is to be corrected by a Short Correction rather than a replacement page. Short Corrections, if any,
are shown at the end of the List of Effective Pages.
21-1 - Short Change 1 replacement to page 21 is to be corrected by a Short Correction .
220-1 Additional page from Change 1 to be inserted after page 22. Additional pages 22b, 22c, etc. would follow
22a in alphabetical order.
An asterisk indicates a Change Page or new Short Correction included in this Change. If pages and correc
tions from all previous Changes have already been applied, only pages marked by asterisks need
attention .
Changes Required to Correct This Publication

Changes are not cumulative. Unless otherwise noted , each change listed below must be applied to correct this publication
through the date of the latest change. The date of a change is the date of the latest Notice to Mariners used in the change.
Chg . Latest NM Used Chg. Latest NM Used
Remarks Remarks
No. No. Date No. No. Date

1 37 9/12/53

2 2 2 140755 Canceled by Change No. 6

33 12731/55 Canceled by Change No. 6
4
52 12/29/56
5 11 3/15/58

6 27 7/4/59

7 39 9/24/60

To be correct through this Change, this publication must contain the following pages:
Title Page -7 VI VIIIb - Blank X
II * VII -7 * VIIIC -7 * XI -7
III -7 VIII VIIId - Blank XII
IV - Blank • VIIIa - 7 IX -Short XIII - XXVI - Discard
V

VII
( Chg 7 )
H.O. 35
VIII

1 46 * 91-6 - Short 136

2 47-6 92 * 137-5 - Short
3-6 48 * 93-7 * 138 -Short
4 * 49-1 - Short 94 * 139-6 - Short
5-6 50 * 95-4 -Short 140
6 * 51-7 * 96 - Short * 141-7
7-6 52 * 97-4 -Short 142
8 * 53-7 98 * 143-7
* 9-7 54 * 99-7 144
10 * 55 - Short 100 *145-7
11 * 56 - Short 101 - Short 146
12 57-6 * 102 - Short * 147-1 - Short
13 * 58 - Short * 103-7 * 148 - Short
14 * 59-7 104 * 149-7
15 60 * 105-7 150
16 61-6 106 . * 151-5 - Short
17-6 62 * 107--5 - Short 152
18 * 63-7 108 * 153-6 - Short
19-1 64 * 109-7 * 154 - Short
20 - Short 65-6 110 * 155-7
21-6 66 * 111-7 156
22 * 67-7 112 * 157–6 - Short
23-4 68 * 113-7 * 158 - Short
24 * 68a - 7 114 * 159-7
* 25 -4 --Short 68b - Blank * 115-7 160
26 - Short * 69-4 -- Short 116 * 161-7
* 27-6 - Short 70 117-6 162
28 71-4 * 118 -Short * 163-7
* 29-5 - Short 72 119 164
* 30 - Short 73-6 * 120 - Short 165-6
31 -Short 74 *121-7 * 166 - Short
32 75 122 * 167-1 -Short
33-6 76 * 123--6 -- Short 168
34 77 - Short * 124 --Short 169 -Short
35-6 78 125-6 170
* 36 - Short 79 - Short * 126 - Short * 171-7
* 37-7 80 - Short # 127-4 - Short 172
38 81-6 128 * 173-7
39-4 82 * 129-6 - Short 174
40 83-6 * 130 --Short * 175 -6 -Short
* 41-6 -- Short 84 131-5 * 176 - Short
* 42 - Short * 85 -- 7 132 * 177-6 - Short
43-6 86 133-5 178
* 44 - Short 87-1 134 * 179-6 - Short
* 45-7 88 - Short 135-5 180
* 89-6 - Short
90

H. O. 35
 VIIIa
( Chg 7)
181 226 * 271-6 - Short 316
182 * 227-6 - Short * 272 - Short * 317-7
183-6- Short 228 - Short * 273 - Short 318
* 184 -Short * 229-7 * 274 --Short 319-6
* 185-7 230 275-1 * 320 -Short
186 * 231-7 * 276 --Short 321-5
* 187-7 232 * 277-7 322
188 233-6 278 * 323-7
189-6 * 234 -Short * 279-7 324
* 190 - Short * 235-7 280 325 - Short
191 236 * 281-7 326 - Blank
192 - Short * 237-7 282 - Blank 327
* 193-7 238 283 328 - Blank
194 * 239-7 284 * 329-7
* 195-7 240 285 330
196 * 241-7 286 Envelope containing
* 197-7 242 287 route and index chart .
198 243-5 288
* 1997 244 289
200 245-1 - Short 290
* 201-7 246 - Short 291
202 247-6 292
203-7 * 248 - Short 293
204 * 249-5 - Short 294 - Short
* 205-7 * 250 - Short * 295 - Short
206 251-6 296 -Short
* 207-7 * 252 -Short 297-6
208 * 253-6 - Short * 298 --Short
* 209-7 254 * 299-6 - Short
210 255-6 300
211-6 * 256 - Short 301-6
212 257-6 302
+ 213-6 - Short 258 * 303-7
214 259-6 304
* 215-5 - Short 260 305-6
216 * 261-7 306
* 217-6 - Short 262 307-1
218 * 263-7 308 -- Short
* 219-6 - Short 264 309-6
220 265-5 310
* 221-6 - Short 266 311-6
* 222 - Short * 267-6 - Short 312
* 223-6 - Short * 268 - Short * 313-7
* 224 --Short * 269-5 - Short 314
* 225-7 270 315-6

H. O. 35
1
 VIIIC
( Chg 7)

Short Corrections follow on

Short Correction Sheets 1 through 8

SHORT CORRECTIONS

This list shows all applicable Short Corrections and is cumulative with each new
Change . Asterisks indicate corrections new with this Change .
Short Corrections, those corrections which do not need a complete replacement Change
page to promulgate them , replace the entire designated line or lines of the book page
affected . Thus most Short Corrections begin with the first word and end with the last
word of the line or lines they replace. A single line deletion is indicated by the code
identifier and the word, Delete. Any other exceptions are self explanatory.
To apply Short Corrections, place the Short Corrections sheets intact in the front of the
Sailing Directions immediately after the List of Effective Pages. Make a notation on each
book page affected so that the Short Corrections will be referred to when those pages are
consulted. If desired , Short Corrections may be cut apart and attached to the applicable
pages. Short Corrections for any one page should be kept together on a single strip. Re
move obsolete Short Corrections when new ones are applied.
Code identifiers at the beginning of each Short Correction indicate page number, column
(L- left or R -right), line or lines, and in parenthesis the first word of the first book line
being corrected . Additional words or directives with the code are self explanatory. Line
count is from top to bottom of page .
PAGE NO . LEFT COLUMN LINE FIRST WORD

Check appropriate box for record.

STZ
429 - L - 10 (ISLAND)

O Short Corrections left intact in front of book .

Short Corrections cut apart and attached to applicable pages. (Leave this page in
place to show complete pagination if Short Corrections are cut up and applied).

H. 0. 35
 Short Correction Sheet 1
( Chg 7)

IX-4 ( (Hydrographic ): Delete . ( former pen & ink) (Chg . 2 )

20-L- 16 (of 17 feet): of 16 feet draft to Grangemouth . At high water ( former pen & ink) (Chg . 4 )

20-L-25 (of) : above the Forth Bridge, the (former pen & ink) (Chg. 4)
* 25 -L- 42 thru 43 (A wreck ):
A wreck with 644 fathoms over it lies about 24 miles west- southwestward of Elie Ness Light .
(Chg. 7)
26 - L - 4 thru 5 (2-26):
2-26 Leven Harbor (56 ° 12 ' N. , 3 ° 00' W. , H.O. Chart 4687) is formed at the outlet of the stream
(former pen & ink) (Chg. 5 )

26 -L - 44 thru 45 (2-28 ) :
2-28 Methil ( 56 ° 11 ' N. , 3° 00' W. , H.O. Chart 4687) , situated about 1 mile southwestward (for
mer pen & ink ) (Chg. 5 )

* 27-L -2 ( feet ) After line 2 add :

Vessels with a beam exceeding 47 feet are not admitted to Nos. 1 and 2 dock s . (Chg . 7)
* 29 -R- 12 (Chart ): Chart 4687. The light buoy marking the southeast corner of the above area is
equipped with a radar reflector. (Chg . 7)

* 29-R- 34 ( 4-ton): 4 - ton and three 2 - ton cranes , and other facilities for (Chg . 7)
* 30-L - 10 ( low) After line 10 add :
A caspicuous tower stands close to the coast about 2/3 mile northward of Seafield Tower.
(Chg. 7)

31-R- 39 thru 40 ( Storm ): Delete. ( former pen & ink) ( Chg. 4)

* 36-R -37 (dredged ): dredged to 13% feet in 1959 up to a position (Chg. 7)

* 41 - R - 24 ( 110 tons ): 110 tons per hour when using the 20 - ton cranes. On the outer end of the
center pier there is a coal conveyor plant capable of loading coal at the rate of 400 tons per
hour. (Chg . 7)

* 42-L- 19 thru 20 (Two): Delete . (Chg. 7)

* 44-R -35 (The eastern ): Delete . (Chg . 7)

* 49-L- 14 thru 15 (The entrance ):
The entrance channel was dredged to a depth of 16 %2 feet in 1957. (Chg . 7)
* 49 -R -2 thru 5 (A beacon ):
A beacon, painted red, stands on the head of the pier about 900 yards north -northeastward of
Battery Point . ( Chg. 7)

* 55-R- 13 (basin ) After line 13 add :

In 1959 the harbor was officially closed to shipping. East and West Pier Lights, the docking
signals, and the pilot station have been discontinued . (Chg. 7)

55 -R- 19 thru 21 (A buoy ): Delete . ( former pen & ink) (Chg . 1 )

H.O. 35
 Short Correction Sheet 2
( Chg 7 )

* 56-L-43 (side) thru 56-R-2 (from): side by three light buoys. Hen and Chickens North Light
ed Bell Buoy is moored about 1 2/5 miles northwestward of Borrowstounness West Pier. Grange
mouth Light Buoys “ E ” and “ N ” are moored about 1 mile and 1 1/3 miles , respectively, far
ther westward . (Chg . 7)

* 58 - L - 27 (Docks ): Docks . The depths range from 18 to 30 feet in the (Chg . 7)

* 69-R- 10 thru 13 ( Entering ):
Entering the harbor. — The sands at the mouth of the Tweed (Chg . 7)
77-R - 6 (The fog ) :
The fog signal consists of a siren ; it is sounded con- (former pen & ink) (Chg. 3)
79 -R-24 thru 33 (Craster ): Delete . ( former pen & ink) (Chg . 3)
80-R-31 (middle): middle of the village. A submarine cable , the landing places of which are
marked by beacons , crosses the river westward of the inner ferry. (former pen & ink ) (Chg . 3 )

88-L-36 (of) : of the entrance of the Tyne. On the summit of the ( former pen & ink) (Chg. 4)
* 89 -L-38 (steam ): motor pilot vessel which cruises within a (Chg . 7)
* 91 -R- 47 thru 48 (about) : about 400 feet wide. In 1957 a least depth of 28 feet could be carried
in the fairway of (Chg . 7)

* 95 - L - 27 ( heavy ) After line 27 add:

Lizard Point has been reported ( 1958 ) to be a good radar target at a distance of 11 miles .
(Chg . 7 )
* 95 -R- 12 ( Storm ): Delete . (Chg . 7)
* 96 -L- 17 (distan ce ) After line 17 add :
Sunderland New South Pier has been reported ( 1958) identifiable with charted features by ra
dar at a distance of 12 miles . (Chg. 7)
96 -L- 18 thru 19 (A can ):
A red can buoy marks the submerged portion of the new (former pen & ink) (Chg. 5 )
* 97-L - 13 thru 14 (Roker ): Roker Pier Lighthouse. A black can bell buoy is moored about (Chg. 7

* 97-L-20 thru 21 (black ): yellow above black , lies about 134 miles (Chg . 7)
* 97-L- 46 (mile) : mile we stward of Roker Pier Light but operates only during periods of low vi
sibility . (Chg . 7)

101 -R- 32 thru 36 (Docks):

Dock . – South Dock extends southward of the Old South Pier , ( former pen & ink) (Chg . 3)
102-R - 5 thru 11 (Harbor,): Harbor. ( former pen & ink) (Chg . 4 )
* 102 - R - 43 ( structure ) After line 43 add:
A light is shown on the head of Middleton Jetty , in a position about 200 yards west-northwest
ward of Old Pier Light. (Chg. 7)

* 107-R-2 (The pilot) After line 2 add : During adverse weather conditions the pilot vessel can
be contacted by radiotelephone. (Chg. 7)

H.O. 35
 Short Correction Sheet 3
( Chg 7 )

* 118-L- 2 (between ) After line 2 add :

Flamborough Head has been reported ( 1958) to be a good radar target at a distance of 18 miles ,
and identifiable with charted features by radar at a distance of 12 miles . (Chg. 7)
* 118-L -3 thru 4 (A submarine ):
A submarine exercise area, about 25 miles long in an east-west direction and 17 miles wide,
lies with its south western corner a- (Chg . 7)

* 120 - R - 32 thru 34 (Ulrome): Ulrome . (Chg. 7)

* 123-L-35 ( 144): a least depth of 7 feet over it. (Chg . 7)
* 123-L-37 (depth ): depth of 13 feet over it. (Chg . 7)
* 123-R- 40 thru 42 ( Target ): Delete . (Chg . 7)
* 124 -L - 17 (Smith's):
Smiths Knoll Light Vessel, painted red with (Chg . 7)
* 124-L- 41 thru 44 (black ): black and marked “ Smiths Knoll ” , is moored in about 25 fathoms a
bout 134 miles eastward of the southern end of the 3 - fathom shoal. ( Chg . 7)
* 126-L-23 ( about): about 1 mile northward of the 234-fathom ( Chg. 7)
* 126-L- 46 (ridges): ridges and patches with depths of 8 to 18 feet (Chg . 7 )
* 126-R- 26 (narrow ): narrow . The least depth on it is 2 fathoms (Chg. 7)
* 127-L- 5 (A radiobeacon ):
Caution . - Submarines frequently exercise in Outer Silver Pit . (Chg . 7)
* 127-R -42 ( and ): and Haisborough Sand, but they are only partly marked (Chg. 7)
* 129-R -22 ( 800): 800 yards west - southwestward of Spurn Point (Chg . 7)
* 130-L- 38 (a least ): a least depth of 22 feet, about 5 miles eastward of (Chg . 7)
* 130-R -21 (Lighted ):
Lighted Bell Float " Chequer No. 3 " is moored on the (Chg. 7 )
* 137-R- 13 ( highest ) After line 13 add:
The approaches to the Humber have been reported ( 1958) to be good radar targets at a distance
of 23 miles . (Chg. 7)

* 138-R- 16 (For) After line 16 add:

Grimsby Tower, which stands on the Royal Dock at Grimsby, has been reported ( 1958) to be
identifiable with charted features by radar at a distance of 16 miles. (Chg . 7)
* 138 -R- 53 thru 54 (At) :
At Alexandra Dock there are three 2-ton cranes . ( Chg . 7 )
* 138- R- 56 thru 57 ( Royal) : Royal Dock is a lofty square brick tower 310 feet above the ( Chg . 7)
* 139-L - 10 ( limited ): unlimited quantities. Large quantities of both fresh and dry (Chg . 7)
* 139-L - 14 (Fuel ):
An ample stock of fuel and diesel oils is maintained and is supplied by barges or tank trucks .
(Chg. 7)

H. O. 35
 Short Correction Sheet 4
( Chg 71

* 139-L - 15 thru 16 (Water ):

Water is laid onto the wharves . (Chg . 7)
* 147-R- 7 thru 8 ( Telegraph ):
Telegraph cables which cross the river close westward of Barrow Haven are marked by (Chg. 7)

* 147-R- 31 ( 78° ): 079 ° or 259º . (Chg. 7)

* 148-L -9 (is ) : well as several large hoists which lift trucks carrying 40 tons of (Chg. 7)

* 148-L - 11 ( export): export. A hydraulic crane at Stanhope Dock lifts 50 tons . ( Chg. 7)

* 151-R - 17 ( 5 - fathom ): 6 - fathom curves, the depths being from 7 to 12 (Chg. 7)

* 153-R- 5 ( 1.3 miles ): 142 miles 102° from Skegness Pier Light. (Chg. 7)
* 154 - L - 41 (of): of the disused lighthou se , but New Hunstanton is south- (Chg . 7)
* 154-R- 11 ( 1 mile) : 142 miles from it. (Chg . 7)

* 154-R-36 (mark ): mark Knock Sands, which dry from 1 to 17 feet, extend (Chg. 7)
* 157-R - 19 (of) : of “ F.E.” Light Buoy . (Chg . 7 )
* 158-L-25 ( and ): and various can als connect Boston with Lincoln (Chg. 7)
* 158- R- 38 (with ) After line 38 add :
There is about 2,385 feet of quayage in the wet dock . (Chg. 7)
* 166 -R -27 (we stward ): westward , and white buoys to the east- (Chg. 7)
* 167-L- 22 ( the westward ): the westward , and the white buoys to (Chg . 7)
* 167-R- 18 (usually ) After line 18 add :
Two beacons, each fitted with a green reflector, mark the extremities of a wreck which lies
on the eastern side of the entrance channel about 294 miles north westward of Blaken ey Church .
Both beacons have topmarks. (Chg. 7)

167-R- 19 thru 20 ( There ): Delete . (former pen & ink) (Chg . 5)

169-L-8 thru 11 (Signal ): Dele te . ( former pen & ink) (Chg . 4 )
* 175-R- 6 ( extends ): extends without a break from a position (Chg . 7)
* 175-R- 8 thru 14 (North ):
North Cross Sand, about 494 miles long and 1 mile wide with a least depth of 20 feet in its
southeastern part, is connected to Middle Cross Sand by a narrow ridge about 200 yards wide .
(Chg . 7)

* 176-L - 7 (about) : about 4 miles long and 142 miles wide, lying between Winterton (Chg . 7)
* 176-L- 27 ( 294): 242 miles east -northeastward of East Caister Church and ( Chg . 7)
* 176-R - 29 thru 31 (Scroby ):
Scroby Hook Buoy, a red can , is moored on the north side of Hewett Channel about 2% miles
southeastward of Nelson's Monument. ( Chg . 7)
* 177-L- 27 ( a least ): a least depth of 9 feet . Caister Shoal dries (Chg . 7)

H.O. 35
 Short Correction Sheet 5
( Chg 7 )

* 179-R- 38 ( the River ): the River Yare though the official northern (Chg . 7)
* 183-L- 31 thru 33 ( Two ): Delete. (Chg. 7)
* 183 -R -6 thru 9 (only ): only ; the partially ruined tower of (Chg . 7)
* 183-R - 35 (Pakefield ) After line 35 add:
Lowestoft breakwater has been reported ( 1958) to be a good radar target at a distance of 24
miles , and identifiable with charted features.by radar at a distance of 7 miles . (Chg . 7)

* 184 -R- 1 (A shoal ):

A shoal area with a least depth of 3 feet over (Chg . 7)

* 184-R - 17 thru 18 (yards ): yards. The least water over it is 4 feet, situated about 34 mile north
northeastward ci the Ness , but the depths (Chg . 7)

* 190-R - 1 (29 feet ): 29 feet situated about 542 miles northeastward (Chg . 7 )
* 190-R- 21 thru 23 (A green ): Delete . (Chg. 7)
• 190-R -24 ( 11-101 ) :
11–101 Aldeburgh Ridge is connected (Chg . 7)
* 190-R -30 thru 34 (with ): with 20 feet over it. That part of the ridge known as the Onion , with a
depth of 22 feet, lies about 1 mile northward of the ness and 400 yards offshore. (Chg . 7)

192-R-2 ( ent ): ent of Pilots, Pilot Office , ( former pen & ink) (Chg. 4)
* 213-L - 46 thru 48 (western ): western sands; the former being connected with S. W. Sunk by a flat
with depths of 10 to 17 feet . Knock John is 1 mile (Chg. 7)
* 213-R- 1 (ridge): ridge with depths of 9 to 16 feet connects (Chg . 7 )
* 215-L - 13 thru 17 (No. ):
No. 4 Barrow Light Buoy , moored of Little Sunk Sand, about 142 miles east -northeastward of
Barrow Deep Light Vessel . (Chg. 7)
* 217-L- 1 (depth ): depths of 39 feet in the deep , the northern entrance (Chg. 7)
* 217-L - 42 (ing) After line 42 add:
Two detached shoal patches with depths of 15 and 16 feet lie in the northern approach to
Southwest Reach in a position close northeastward of Maplin Sands. ( Chg. 7 )
• 217-L -48 ( feet) : feet ( 1958 ) . (Chg . 7)
* 219-R- 20 (the pierhead .): the pierhead . A fog signal is sounded from the head of the pier when
vessels are expected . (Chg . 7)
• 221 -L- 16 ( The eastern ):
The western side of the sand is marked by ( Chg . 7)

* 221 -R - 14 ( 400 ): 400 yards in extent and has 15 feet on it . (Chg. 7)

* 222-L- 35 thru 38 (Head ): Head No. 2 " is described in section 13-55 . ( Chg . 7)
* 223-R-6 ( there ): there is 5 feet 244 miles within the entrance. (Chg. 7)
* 223-R- 10 (A submarine ):
A submarine cable , marked by beacons, crosses the river from Wiven- ( Chg . 7)

H. O. 35
 Short Correction Sheet 6
( Chg 71

* 223-R-20 thru 22 ( can ): can buoys are 5 fishery buoys , the outer one white and conical, and
the others red and white che ckered conical. (Chg. 7)
* 224-R-48 ( southward ): southward of Osea Island . Construction of a barrier wall was in progress
in 1958 about 42 mile north -northeastward of Pewit Island . (Chg. 7)
* 227-R - 16 thru 17 ( forms): forms the northwestern side of Southwest Reach (sec . 13–24 ); it has
a least depth of 9 feet. (Chg. 7)
* 228-L- 15 (Peters) After line 15 add :
North Foreland has been reported ( 1958 ) to be a good radar target at a distance of 22 miles .
(Chg . 7)
* 228-L-21 thru 23 ( house ,): house . (Chg. 7)
* 228-R-25 (pier) After line 25 add :
Margate has been reported ( 1958) to be identifiable with charted features by radar at a dis
tance of 16 miles. (Chg . 7)
* 234-R- 4 (to ) After line 4 add:
A least depth of 36 feet lies in the western approach to the channel about Y2 mile west-north
westward of Light Buoy No. 6. (Chg. 7)

* 234-R-24 (nel) : nel is marked by light buoys in accordance with the uniform (Chg. 7)
* 234 - R - 30 thru 34 (Light) : Delete . (Chg . 7)

245-L-27 thru 28 (maintains): maintains a dredged channel from Sea Reach Light Buoy No. 1 to
London Bridge as follows: ( former pen & ink) (Chg. 5 )
245 - R - Tide and distance table : Change “ From Nore Light Vessel to- " to “ From Sea Reach
Light Buoy No. 1 to- " . (former pen & ink) (Chg . 5 )
246-L - 4 thru 8 ( 15–4 ) :
15—4 Pilotage . - See section 12–2 . ( former pen & ink) (Chg. 5)
* 248-L- 6 (low) After line 6 add :
Southend Pier has been reported ( 1958 ) to be identifiable with charted features by radar at a
distance of 10 miles. (Chg. 7 )

* 249-R- 32 (wide . ): wide and has a least depth of 9 feet. (Chg . 7)

* 250-L - 4 (West):
West Leigh Middle Light Buoy, a black con ical buoy , is (Chg. 7)
* 250-L-8 thru 10 (is) : is moored clos e off the southern edge of Chapman Sand about 142 miles
eastward of Scars Elbow . (Chg. 7)
* 250-R - 1 thru 4 ( the vicinity ): the vicinity. (Chg . 7)
* 252-R- 11 ( the chart) After line 11 add :
Only tankers are permitted to anchor northward of the channel between Scars Elbow and Muck
ing Lighted Bell Buoy No. 1 ( sec. 15--39 ). (Chg . 7)
* 253-L-8 (fololw ): follow the line of deep water. The direction (Chg. 7)
* 256-R - 13 (of): of a hill sloping down to the river. Rosherville gar- ( Chg. 7)
* 267-L- 19 (miles) After line 19 add : groynes, off which a drying flat of mud and stones (Chg . 7)

H.O. 35
 Short Correction Sheet 7
( Chg 7 )

* 268-L- 12 (28): 27 feet ( 1959) , its dredged width being about ( Chg . 7)
* 268-L -26 (West):
West Cant Light Buoy , moored about 2/3 mile (Chg . 7)
* 268-R - 13 (A light ):
A light with a radar reflector stands on the ( Chg . 7)
• 269 -L-4 thru 5 (Floating ):
A floating dock , maintained by H. M. Dockyard , is moored in the following position (Chg. 7)
* 269-L- 7 thru 9 ( Floating ): Dele te . (Chg . 7)
* 269-R- 19 thru 22 (A light) : Delete. (Chg . 7)
* 271-L- 13 (in ): in the same direction as the harbor. In 1957 (Chg. 7)

* 271-L- 15 (approach ): approach channel. A depth of 13 to 17 feet ( Chg . 7)

* 271-L- 31 thru 32 (A red) :
Horse Shoal, a mud flat drying 2 feet and marked at its western end by a mooring buoy , lies
on the northern side of the fairway in Loden (Chg. 7)
* 272-L- 5 (A prohibited ):
Degaussing range. — A degaussing anchorage and passage area , through which passage is pro
hibited , (Chg. 7)

* 272 - L - 41 (No. ) After line 41 add :

Lights are shown on the pierheads of both jetties at Elphinstone Point. (Chg. 7)
273 -L - 9 (H.O.): ). --This ( former pen & ink) ( Chg . 2 )
* 273-R - 7 thru 8 (A green ): Dele te . (Chg. 7 )
274-L-3 thru 4 ( 16-34 ) :
16–34 Long Reach (51 ° 24 ' N. , 0° 38 ' E . ) .—At (former pen & ink ( Chg. 2 )
* 274-R- 14 thru 15 (A red): Delete . (Chg . 7)
* 276 - L - 25 (westward ): westward of No. 3 Beacon . This tide pole beacon in range 253 ° with a
large gasometer located about 400 yards south -southeastward of Gillingham pontoon le ads from
Pinup Reach into Gillingham Reach . ( Chg. 7)
276-R-28 thru 29 ( 16-45):
16—45 Short Reach (51 ° 25'N . , 0° 32' W. ) .—This reach ( which has ( former pen & ink) (Chg. 2)
294-L- 16 (–– buoys ): - buoys 13-14 ( former pen & ink ) (Chg. 5 )
294-L- 17 (-- light vessel): light vessel 13-12 (former pen & ink)
(Chg . 5)

295 - L - 5 (Binks); — , — , buoy 9-6 ( former pen & ink) (Chg . 5)

* 295-L- 37 (Blackhall) After line 37 add :
Blackmans Head 12-37 (Chg. 7)

296 - R - 40 -
( - Light vessel): – Light Vessel 9-18 ( former pen & ink )
(Chg. 5)

H.O. 35
 Short Correction Sheet 8
( Chg 71

* 298–L- 15 (- - Light buoy ): — Light Float 9-7 (Chg. 7)

* 299 -R - 29 ( -- directions ): directions 13-69 (Chg. 7)

308-L -33 ( - Light and Bell Boat ): Range Lights 9-47 ( former pen &
ink ) (Chg . 5 )

308-L- 46 (King's ) After line 46 add :

buoys 13-11 ( farmer pen & ink) (Chg . 5 )

308—R-49 (- John): — John 13–6 ( former pen & ink) (Chg . 5 )

* 320-L- 34 (- Bank ): Delete . ( Chg. 7)
325-L-23 (Yanlet ): Yantlet Creek 15–26 ( former pen & ink) (Chg . 5)
Notes :
1. All “ O ” section references in the index pertain to the discarded chapter “ Hydrographic
Publications and Navigation al Aids” and are no longer applicable.
2. Change H.O. 150 to H.O. 35 on the bottom of each page . (Chg. 7)

H. 0. 36
 H. O. Pub . No. 35
( Formerly No. 150 )

SAILING DIRECTIONS
for the
EAST COAST OF ENGLAND
Fife Ness to North Foreland, Including the
Firth of Forth and the Thames

Fifth Edition
1951

Published by the U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office under the authority of the
Secretary of the Navy
S
ENT
P A RTM
DE
NAVE
TH
Y

HYDRO
GRAPH
OIFCFICE

Unitod States
Govornmont Printing Office
Washington : 1951

( Chg 7 )
For sale by authorised Sales Agents of the U. 8. Navy Hydrographic Omo.
Price , including ring binder .... . $ 4.50
Contents only ( without binder ). 20.00
 IMPORTANT NOTICE
PROCEDURES FOR CORRECTING THIS PUBLICATION
When first published, this loose-leaf edition
is correct as of the date in the preface. To keep
it corrected, consecutively numbered sets of
loose-leaf pages called “ Changes” are pub
lished at appropriate intervals. The publi
cation of each Change is announced in Notice
to Mariners, which is published weekly by the
U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office. Between the
original correction date and the date of the
first corrective Change, and also between later
Changes, Notice to Mariners must be consulted
for important announcements affecting this
volume. Applicable paragraphs, identified by
publication and page numbers, should be pasted
to the inner margins of affected pages.
Change pages must be inserted in accordance
with the “ List of Effective Pages” included in
each Change. New change pages supersede
obsolete pages they replace, including all para
graphs from Notice to Mariners dated before
the date of the Change. Paragraphs from
Notice to Mariners dated later than the Change
must be transferred to the corresponding new
change page.
Changes are not cumulative, i.e. Change No.
2 will not automatically supersede Change No.
1 etc. , and each Change must be applied in nu
II
H.O. 35
merical order as it is published . Individual
change pages from any Change remain in effect
until actually replaced by a corresponding
change page from a later Change, regardless of
the consecutive numbers of the Changes in
volved . The “ List of Effective Pages ” included
with each Change, however, is cumulative, and
the “ List ” in the latest Change supersedes all
previous “ Lists ” . This simplifies the applica
tion of change pages from several Changes at
once, as is the case when persons acquire this
volume after more than one Change has been
published . Only the “ List” from the latest
Change shows the pages that are still effective
in each of the Changes on hand . Only these
still effective pages need be applied ; the obso
lete change pages can be immediately discarded .
A Change becomes cancelled if all change
pages are eventually replaced by later Changes.
The cover of each Change lists previous
Changes remaining in effect, and which are
needed, either wholly or in part, to keep this
volume corrected .
Procedures for ordering Changes are de
scribed in the fore part of this book .
 III
PROCEDURES FOR ORDERING CHANGES ( Chg 7 )

FOR THE GENERAL PUBLIC

When a volume of Sailing Directions is sold,
all Changes in effect at the time of sale are
furnished without additional cost . Later
Changes published are sold at 35 cents each .
Changes should be purchased from authorized
sales agents of the U.S. Navy Hydrographic
Office whenever possible. Sales agents, located
in seaports in many parts of the world, are
listed in the general Hydrographic Office cata
logs. An up-to-date listing is published every
three months in Notice to Mariners.
Should there be no sales agent in your local
ity, orders for Sailing Directions Changes may be
placed with the nearer of the two Hydrographic
Distribution Offices listed below. Payment
should be made by check or money order made
payable to the “ Treasurer of the United States."
Cash should not be mailed, except at sender's
risk . Postage stamps cannot be accepted in
payment. Hydrographic Distribution Offices
will ship orders, postage paid, by regular mail.
Requests for air mail, special delivery, etc. can
not be honored unless the full extra cost for such
service is included in the payment.
FOR U. S. GOVERNMENT ACTIVITIES
U.S. naval vessels and other government ves
sels or activities on authorized allowance lists
will receive Changes automatically as soon as
they are published.
Government activities not on authorized
allowance lists must request Changes from the
applicable Hydrographic Distribution Office as
follows:
Activities west of the Mississippi River (ex
cept the Gulf of Mexico and Canal Zone areas ):
Hydrographic Distribution Office
U.S. Naval Supply Depot, Clearfield
Ogden, Utah
Activities in all other areas :
Hydrographic Distribution Office
U.S. Naval Supply Depot
5801 Tabor Ave., Phila. 20, Pa.

USE OF ORDER BLANK

For prompt and accurate shipment, mail order blank to the nearest Hydrographic Distribution
Office. The bottom part of the order blank will be used as a shipping label , therefore please
print or type name and address plainly.

Detach along this line

ORDER BLANK
for
Change No. 8_to H.O. Pub . No. 35_
Please send above Sailing Directions Change to address indicated below .
Payment of 35 cents ( check or money order) is enclosed.

Please Print Carefully

Chg . No. 8 Pub. No. 35

Name
• Address

City Zone

• State Country
H.O. 35
 PREFACE

This publication, Sailing Directions for the east coast of England, is the fifth
edition of H.O. Pub. No. 35 (formerly No. 150). It is not a new edition in the usual
sense, but a consolidation of the previous edition and selected supplementary cor
rective data available in the Hydrographic Office to June 9, 1951, including Notice
to Mariners No. 23 of 1951.
The principal sources examined in the preparation of the edition on which this
volume is based are :
British Admiralty North Sea Pilot, Part II, eighth edition, 1923, with sup
plement No. 8, 1933.
British Admiralty North Sea Pilot, Part III, tenth edition, 1933.
Reports from officers of the merchant marine.
Information furnished by United States consuls.
Charts, light lists, standard books of reference, and various documents in
possession of the Department.

In this publication the bearings and courses are true and are expressed in de
grees from 000 ° (north ) to 360°, measured clockwise.
The directives " steer" or "make good ” a course mean , without exception, to
proceed from a point of origin along a track having the identical meridional angle as
the designated course. Vessels following the directives must allow for every in
fluence tending to cause deviation from such track, and navigate so that the des
ignated course is continuously being made good.
Bearings limiting sectors of lights are toward the light.
The directions of winds refer to the points from which they blow ; of currents,
the points toward which they set. These directions are true.
The variation of the magnetic compass and the annual rate of change may be
obtained from the charts.
The geographical positions (coordinates), which are given at intervals through
out the book, are approximate only and are intended to facilitate reference to the
charts.
The charts quoted are the largest scale charts of the locality on issue by the
Hydrographic Office. For a graphic presentation of the charts covering the area de
scribed in this volume see H.O. Index - Catalog of Nautical Charts and Publications.
Distances are expressed in nautical miles, 1 mile equaling 1 minute of latitude,
or approximately 2,000 yards.
Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed in fractions of a mile or in yards.
Soundings are referred to the datum of the charts and are expressed in fath
oms or feet

H. 0. 35
( Chg 7 )
XII PREFACE

Heights are referred to the plane of reference used for that purpose on the
charts and are expressed in feet.
Light and fog signal characteristics are not described, and as a rule, light sectors
are not defined ; for these details the mariners should consult the Light Lists, which
are published at intervals of about a year. Similarly, radio navigational aids and
services are not described in detail, and the mariner is referred to H. O. Publications
Nos. 117 and 118 (formerly Nos. 205 and 206, respectively) for a more comprehen
sive account.
Masters of vessels should seek from pilots, harbor masters and other local au
thorities the latest information relative to any special regulations in force in the
particular locality visited .
Mariners are requested to notify the U. S. Navy Hydrographic Office, Wash
ington 25, D. C., or one of its branch offices of errors discovered in this publication or
of additional matter considered appropriate for insertion .

H.O. 35
 WINDS AND WEATHER
If a steam or sailing vessel is seen by day the
foremast down and mizzen set, that vessel is a
drifter riding to her nets.
The ends of the nets may or may not be specially
marked with a staff and flag or a white float.
If a fleet of drifters is passed through at night,
it is impossible to avoid the nets.
If a vessel has to pass close to a drifter, she
should pass to leeward of her; by night the higher
light shows the clear side and the lower light shows
the direction in which the nets extend .
1-36 Seine net fishing. – Fishing vessels using
the Danish seine net or " snurrevaad ” will be met
with anywhere well out in the North Sea between
the latitudes 53° N. and 58° N. The area covered
by the nets and warps may be as much as a square
mile in extent. British, Danish , Swedish , and
Dutch fishing vessels when actually fishing with
seine nets use the signals prescribed in the
revised (1954 ) International Regulations for
Prevention of Collisions at Sea .
1-37 REPAIRS — DRYDOCKS.Underwater
repairs can be undertaken in the following ports
located within the limits of this publication :
Dysart, Leith, Inverkeithing, Rosyth , Grange
mouth, Alloa, Blyth, Shields, Hebburn, Sun
derland, West Hartlepool, Middlesborough, Im
mingham , Hull, Goole, Kings Lynn, Yarmouth,
Lowestoft, Harwich, Ipswich, Brightlingsea, Whit
stable, Tilbury, Woolwich , Deptford, London,
Sheerness, Port Victoria and Chatham .
Details of the facilities are given in the descrip
tions of the various ports.
1-38 WINDS AND WEATHER . — The baro-
metric pressure is on the average lowest in the
neighborhood of Iceland and rises southward
toward the Azores, so that the prevailing winds
over the British Isles are from west or southwest.
The actual pressure distribution , however, and
consequently the winds and weather, change from
9
( Chg 7)
day to day, often very markedly. There is gen
erally a " depression” somewhere over north
western Europe or the neighboring seas, and these
depressions move, usually in an easterly or north
easterly direction, at an average speed of 530 miles
a day. The track most frequently followed passes
northeast from off northwestern Ireland, between
Scotland and Iceland and along the coast of Nor
way, giving southwesterly winds over the British
Isles and North Sea ; but depressions not in
frequently cross England or pass along the English
Channel, in which case the winds to the north
ward of them are easterly. Depressions often fol
low one another along nearly the same track at
intervals of a few days. When the center is to the
northward , the passage of the lowest pressure or
trough is often marked by a sudden squall and
shift of wind. A southerly gale often shifts to the
westward quickly to a point north of west. In
front of a depression the weather is warm and
muggy and the sky is generally overcast with
steady but not heavy rain, while in the rear the
weather is bright and cool with occasional squalls
and heavy showers of rain or hail. After a day
or so of fine weather, another depression usually
approaches, the wind returns to some southerly
point, and the sequence recommences.
In winter the low -pressure area near Iceland is
well developed , and depressions usually pass well
to the northward of the British Isles, giving per
sistently strong winds of the westerly type. The
depressions may be more than a thousand miles
across and cause widespread gales. In spring
pressure is high over Scandinavia and northeasterly
winds are frequent. In summer pressure is high
over the Atlantic and the prevailing winds are
west or northwest, depressions are small and ir
regular, causing local showers and thunderstorms
instead of great gales.
Anticyclones, or areas of high pressure, are
H. 0. 35
 10 GENERAL REMARKS

usually stable, moving slowly and giving consider
able periods of fine dry weather and light winds.
On the east coast they may cause fogs in winter.
The general direction of the wind is locally
modified to some extent by a tendency to follow
the direction of the coast and valleys, especially
during fine settled weather with moderate winds.
Land and sea breezes are developed on the east
coast of England in fine weather during summer,
but do not occur in winter or in stormy weather.
The sea breeze commences to blow directly on
shore about midday, and shifts during the after
noon until by sunset it blows parallel with the
coast.
1-39 Gales. — Tables 1 and 2 show the
mean number of general gales from different di
rections in each month during the 40 years, 1876–
1915.
BERWICK ON TWEED TO FLAMBOROUGH HEAD
Month
1-40 Fog and mists occur at all seasons of the
year in the vicinity of the English coast. Thick
weather, verging on fog, is very common . Part
of this is doubtless due to the westerly winds blow
ing the smoke of the great manufacturing districts
into the North Sea, for the weather is seldom clear
with westerly winds between Flamborough Head
and the Forth, or off the estuary of the Thames.
The northeasterly winds of spring bring, as a rule,
the clearest weather.
A summary of 30 years' observation collected
by the British Meteorological Office from the logs
of vessels shows the average conditions month by
month for the North Sea generally, as follows :
January : Southward of a line joining the Tees
and Blaavand Point, Denmark, fog occurs on
about 6 days; northward of this line there are
usually about the same number of misty days.
TABLE 1
N. NE. E. SE. S. SW. W. NW . Total

January 0.6 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.6 1.1 0.4 3.7
February 0.4 0.1 0.1 0.3 0.2 1.0 0.7 0.2 3.0
March 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.4 0.3 0.9 0.4 0.1 3.1
April 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.1 1.2
May 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.7
June 0 0 0 0.2 0.1 0.3
July 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.4
August 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.5
September 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.3 0.1
‫ווווווווו‬

0.1 0.5 1.3

October - 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.1 0.3 0:4 0.4 0.4 2.7
November 0.5 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.6 3.1
11

December 0.5 0.1 0.3 0.4 0.8 0.9 0.7 0.3 4.0

Total 3.3 2.0 1.4 2.0 2.5 5.0 5.3 2.6 24.0

TABLE 2
FLAMBOROUGH HEAD TO THE THAMES

January 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.5 2.4
February 0.1 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.3 0.6 0.4 0.3 2.2
i

0.1
‫רוזווד‬

March 0.1 0.3 0 0.1 0.5 0.4 0.3 1.8

April 0.2 0.2 0 0 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 1.0
May 0.1 0.2 0 0 0.1 0.1 0 0.5
June 0 0.1 0.1 0 0.2
July 0.1 0 -
0.1 0.2
August 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.6
September 0.2 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.7
October - 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.6 0.4 0.2 2.3
November 0.1 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.8 0.7 3.0
December 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.8 0.6 0.3 3.0

Total 1.6 1.7 1.3 1.0 1.9 3.8 3.8 2.8 17.9

Note . - A dash thus, - , signifies an entire absence of
gales . A cipher, 0, signifies that the mean number was less
than 0.1 .
By general gales ismeant a gale felt at more than half the
stations in the district. In these statistics a gale is con
sidered to be a wind of force 8 , and upwards, or traveling
with a velocity exceeding 40 miles per hour. No gale is
recorded that has not been felt at more than half the sta
tions in the district.

H.O. 35
 LEITH ROAD AND HARBOR
to silt, and is dredged periodically as re- 2-88 East Breakwater extends seaward for
quired. Vessels having a length of 600 feet a distance of about 1,000 yards from the north
and a breadth of 68 feet may be accommodated
at the Imperial Dock ( 1955 ) . The greatest
draft to berth at Leith was 29 feet.
The West Pier, 707 yards in length, extends
from the stone quay eastward of the ship- a distance of about 1,200 yards from Newhaven
building yard in a north- northwesterly direc- Harbor, located about 1,400 yards westward of
tion .
2-87 Traffic regulations . — Public traffic
regulations are in force, and a copy of them
should be obtained .
Traffic signals are shown from the head of West
Breakwater. When the Port of Leith is closed ,
2 yellow disc by day and four red lights in
the form of a diamond at night are displayed .
Tidal signals . - The following signals ,
made from an iron framework tower on West
Breakwater, indicate the depth of water over
the sill of Imperial Dock:
DAY SIGNAL NIGHT SIGNAL FEET
One yellow rectangle One red light 10
Two yellow rectangles Two red lights 15
Three yellow rectangles Three red lights 20
Four yellow rectangles Four red lights 25
Five yellow rectangles Five red lights 30
The intervening depths of 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 , feet ,
are denoted by 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 yellow triangles by
day and by 1 , 2 , 3 , or 4 green lights by night.
One yellow diamond shape by day , or one yel-
low light by night , indicates one -half foot.
It should be remembered that the depth can
be depended upon only in smooth water , and
that allowances must be made for the scend of
the sea at the mouth of the harbor.
37
( Chg 7)
western corner of the basin of the Imperial
Dock . It is constructed of massive stone
bulwarks , under wooden staging.
West Breakwater extends northeastward for
Leith Harbor entrance .
A light is shown from a white structure ,
on a two story building at the head of the
West Breakwater..
A fog diaphone and bell are sounded from
the light .
East Breakwater Light ( 55 °59' N., 3 °11 '
W . ).—A light is shown from a red structure
on a concrete base at the head of the East
Breakwater .
A pair of range marks and lights are lo
cated on the western side of the entrance to
Imperial Dock.
Dock signals. - A green flag is shown by day
and a green light by night from the flagstaff at
the south corner of Imperial Dock entrance to in
dicate that a vessel may enter.
A ball is hoisted near the entrance to Albert
Dock when the gates are open. During the night
tide a green light is shown at each corner of
entrance locks at Victoria and Albert Docks.
Coast guard . — There is a coast guard station at
Leith; Edinburgh is the headquarters of the Scot
tish district.
2-89 Harbor . — The berthing space not in
cluded in the wet docks below mentioned is known
H.O. 35
 38 ESTUARY OF THE FIRTH OF FORTH
as the Inner and Outer Harbors , seaward and
southward of Victoria Bridge , respectively ,
and Western Harbor , between West Pier and
West Breakwater .
At low water vessels lie aground at the
berths of the harbor quay .
The outer harbor, from the head of West
Pier to the basin at the entrance of Imperial
Dock , was dredged to 15 feet in 1953. From
there to the basin at the entrance of Albert
Dock the channel was dredged to a depth of
94 feet , thence to a depth of 71% feet to the
drydocks northward of Victoria Bridge .
Western Harbor is entered between the
heads of West Pier and West Breakwater and
is mostly shoal except in the dredged areas .
Two quays are located in the middle of the
southern part of the harbor. The western
quay is 500 feet long and had a depth of 267, feet
in 1959 and the northern quay, 424 feet long with
a berthing length of 340 feet, had a depth of 1672
feet. The depth in the dredged channel leading
to these quays is 1312 feet ( 1959). A conspicuous
grain elevator, 152 feet high , stands on the in
shore side of the above quay s.
Three dolphins are located about 200 yards
southward of West Breakwater Light.
There are three wet docks on the eastern side
of the water of Leith, namely, the Imperial, Al-
bert, and Edinburgh, and three on the western
side, the Victoria, the East Old Dock, and the
West Old Dock. The Imperial is the largest and
communicates with the Albert and Edinburgh
Docks.
The depth in the entrance to the Imperial Dock
at mean high -water springs is 309 feet ; Al-
bert Dock , 25 feet ; Edinburgh, 25 feet ; Vic-
toria , 23 feet ; East Old Dock , 17 feet ; and
West Old Dock , 17 feet. The depths main
tained in the docks are sill level.
A timber quay at the entra nce of Victoria
Dock allows the landing of passengers and
cargo. There is a depth of 231 feet along-
side at high -water springs. A special land
ing place for passengers suitable for all
stages of the tide is located near the en
trance of Albert Dock.
The total water space amounts to 62 acres.
H. 0. 35
The dock gates are opened generally 29%
hours before , and are closed at the time of,
high water in the port.
2-90 Bylaws. - A pamphlet containing the by
laws for the harbor and docks for the use of
mariners visiting the port may be obtained gratis
at the Leith Docks offices near the entrance to the
Albert Dock.
They are in force for vessels loading or unload
ing explosives, gasoline, or calcium carbide.
2-91 Victoria Bridge is the northern bridge
over the water of Leith and divides the outer
and inner harbors. By means of this bridge the
railroad communication between the wet docks
on each side of the harbor is chiefly maintained .
It is a swing bridge with a span 120 feet long and
can be opened by hydraulic power in 1 1/2 min
utes. Vessels must not attempt to pass the bridge
or to bring up within its range, unless they draw
2 feet less water than is shown by a tide gage on
the east side of the jetty adjoining it.
A white ball hoisted upon the bridge by day
signifies that the bridge is open and a vessel may
pass through. At night a red light is exhibited on
each side of the bridge ; one shows southward or
in the harbor, the other shows north or seaward
of the harbor, which means that the bridge is
across the harbor and vessels cannot pass.
Storm signals are displayed from the signal
station on the head of the West Breakwater at
Leith .
Wind and weather. See meteorological table
for Leith , appendix II.
2-92 Tides and tidal currents . - It is high
water, full and change, at Leith at 2h. 28m .; springs
rise 18 feet, neaps 14 1/4 feet above datum of
chart. The lowest tides in the Firth of Forth oc
cur during easterly or southeasterly gales, when
the surface water is blown out of the North Sea,
the highest tides during west and northwest gales.
In Leith Road, the west- going, or flood, current
begins 5 1/2 hours before high water at Leith, and
the east-going, or ebb, current begins 1/2 hour
after high water.
The velocity is 1 knot for both curreuts.
In moderate weather it is slack water, at about
200 yards off Leith pierhead, from 1 to 1 1/2
hours before high water, but with strong westerly
 INCH GARVIE
erly and westerly direction, is 50 yards broad and
270 yards long. A ruined battery with a castel-
lated tower, the top of which is 60 feet above high
water, stands 70 yards from the eastern end. On
the extremity of the point is a small conical struc-
ture, used during the construction of the bridge
for storing dynamite, which has the appearance of
a beacon .
The center cluster of piers of the Forth Bridge
stands on the northwestern end of Inch Garvie.
There is a tide gage showing the clearance
under the spans of the bridge on the north-
eastern pier. The gage is painted in black
and white horizontal bands 2 feet wide and
the 144- 146- and 154 - foot clearance levels
are indicated by figures .
Beacon . - A pile beacon stands close eastward
of Inch Garvie.
Mooring buoys. - Numerous mooring buoys, for
the positions of which refer to the chart, are located
westward of Inch Garvie .
Inch Garvie Light. — On the northwestern low-
water extremity of Inch Garvie, and close north
of the center cantilever of the bridge, a light is
exhibited from a black circular beacon with a
white lantern .
3-9 Forth Railway Bridge, which spans the
Forth between North and South Queensferry , con
sists of three cantilevers across the navigable
channels north and south of Inch Garvie, where
the center pier is situated, thus forming two spans
of 1,710 feet each. The total height of the vertical
columns is 370 feet, and in the center of the navi
gable channels, for a distance of 160 yards, there
is a clear headway of 147 3/4 feet at high water
under the spans.
Forth Bridge lights. - From the Forth Bridge,
at an elevation of 156 feet above high water, a
fixed white light marks the center of each span and
a fixed red light is shown from the end of each
cantilever on each side of Forth Bridge, defining
both the north and south navigable channels.
Fog signal. - During thick or foggy weather,
two bells (one on each side of the bridge) are
sounded simultaneously from the center of the
north span of the bridge.
Magnetic attraction. The compasses of vessels
passing under this bridge have been observed to be
deflected as much as half a point; it is therefore
advisable to steady the ship on a distant object
45
( Chg 7)
before arriving at the bridge.
A bridge was under construction in 1960 across
the Firth of Forth about % mile westward of the
above bridge.
3-10 Tides and tidal currents . It is high
water, full and change, at Leith , southward of the
eastern end of North Channel , at 2h. 28m., with
a spring rise of 18 feet above datum of charts.
The west-going current makes in the center of
North Channel, southward of Burtisland, at
about 2 hours before high water at Dover, or
5 1/2 hours before that at Leith , and the east
going current at 4 hours after high water at Dover,
or 1/2 hour after that at Leith . The velocity of
the current is from 1/2 to 3 knots, depending on
the age of the moon and the direction of the wind.
3-11 Directions - May Island to Forth Bridge.
-Approaching the Firth of Forth, May Island
should be made, whence course may be shaped on
either side of it, as most desirable. Thence steer
for Inchkeith , to pass about 1,500 yards north
ward of it. Any part of the top of the center
cantilever of Forth Bridge in range with Oxcars
Lighthouse bearing 250° leads through the en
trance of North Channel between Inchkeith and
the light buoy marking the southeastern ex
tremity of Blae Rock, until nearly abreast Burnt
island, from whence course should be shaped to
pass midway between Inchcolm and Oxcars, ob
serving that the middle of the southern span of
Forth Bridge in range with Oxcars Lighthouse
leads well northward of Oxcars Bank . From
abreast and northward of Oxcars steer to pass well
northward of the two buoys marking the north
ern limit of the prohibited area off Drum Sand,
and from thence under Forth Bridge northward
or southward of Inch Garvie, as requisite.
At night. — The lights on Inchkeith, Oxcars, Inch
Garvie, Forth Bridge, and Beamer Rock above it,
together with the light buoys at all points of im
portance, afford the necessary aids to navigation
at night to the anchorages above the bridge.
3-12 NORTHERN SHORE . - Kinghorn Ness
( 56 °04' N., 3 ° 10' W.), the north point of the en
trance to North Channel, is well defined and
prominent; the coast and dangers northward of it
are described in chapter 2. The shore is foul for a
distance of 300 yards southward of the Ness.
Bush of the Ness, which dries 3 feet, is the east
H. 0. 35
46 FIRTH OF FORTH - INCHKEITH TO STIRLING
ernmost of four rocks, showing at low -water spring
tides, between Kinghorn Ness and Pettycur, 400
yards westward of it, and near the edge of the
flat, which dries off about 250 yards.
Pettycur is a small-craft tidal harbor, formed by
a curved pier, and with a sluicing reservoir at its
inner end ; it dries 5 feet, and has a depth of 11
feet at high -water springs.
3–13 Coast . – From Kinghorn Ness westward,
the coast forms a small bay skirted by the rail
road, and the land behind increases in height to
the precipitous Binn of Burntisland, 624 feet in
height. This portion of the coast is fronted by an
extensive flat of sand, dry 1 to 14 feet at low -water
neaps, having near its center a ledge named Black
Rock, about 9 feet high. The Heuchboy, a rocky
ledge which dries 7 feet, lies on the western edge
of the flat. Salmon stakes are charted eastward
of Black Rock .
Buoy. A black conical buoy marked " Sand
end” and equipped with a radar reflector, is
moored just southward of the southwest extremity
of the bank extending southward of Black Rock.
Kirk Bush is a rocky patch with a depth of 1 foot
at low -water springs, situated a little more than 200
yards southward of the wall of the harbor works
of Burntisland; the general depth around is 7 feet.
A wreck , with 5 fathoms over it, lies about 1,750
yards 150° from Burntisland West Pier Light.
3–14 Burntisland Harbor (56 ° 03' N. , 3°14' W. ,
H.O.Chart 4688).— Burntisland Harbor is easy of
access and consists of three basins, which, includ
ing the approaches thereto, have a sheltered area
of about 35 acres. The entrance, facing south ,
between East and West Piers, is 250 feet wide
with a depth of 30 feet at high -water springs.
The harbor as well as the docks, is furnished
with hydraulic hoists and every convenience for
loading and discharging, which is carried on by
night as well as by day.
Old Harbor, 5 acres in area , is a tidal basin form
TABLE 8
By day Sional
A red flag
A white flag with a blue St. Andrew's cross .
H. 0. 35
ing the northwestern corner of Burntisland Har
bor. It dries 1 to 5 feet, but it is a useful an
chorage for small craft which may be damaged
and require beaching. Minor repairs can be ef
fected on the mud at low water.
Landmark . - A mast is located about 5 1/2
miles west -northwestward of Burntisland Harbor
entrance .
3–15 Burntisland Harbor lights. — At the head
of the outer East Pier a light is exhibited , from a
white iron tower 24 feet high .
A bell is struck in foggy weather when the ferry
boats are running.
From a white iron tower, 19 feet high, on the
outer end of West Pier, a light is shown.
Tide gage. — There is a tide gage on the south
side of the entrance to East Dock .
Storm signals are shown at Burntisland.
3–16 Burntisland Road - Prohibited anchor
age . — A submarine cable extends across Burntis
land Road and North Channel to a position about
142 miles south -southeastward of Ross Point (sec.
3–21). Anchoring and fishing is prohibited within
a circular area with a radius of 1/3 mile located
at the southern terminus of the cable .
Tides. It is high water, full and change, at
Burntisland at 2h. 15m.; springs rise 18 feet,
neaps about 14 % feet.
3–17 Pilots may be obtained by hoisting the
usual signal and should be picked up 11% miles
from the harbor entrance .
Pilotage is not compulsory, however, licensed
pilots are available .
3–18 Harbor signals.-- Table 8 shows signals
displayed on a flagstaff erected on East Dock
head .
Signification
Dangerous to enter, bring up in the roadstead .
Clear to come into East Dock .
 PORT EDGAR
Hawes Pier Light. - A light is exhibited from a
white steel tower with a concrete base, at the outer
end of Hawes Pier.
A fog signal is sounded on Hawes Pier for the
guidance of ferry boats.
Anchorage . — There is anchorage in about 17
fathoms of water about 400 yards 016° from the
West Pier Lighthouse of Port Edgar; the holding
ground further inshore toward Queensferry is not
so good. It is always necessary to moor and a long
scope is required on each chain.
3–33 Queensferry (South ) is a royal burgh
with a population in 1931 of 1,798. The Jubilee
Clock Tower is a prominent object. Fresh pro
visions are obtainable .
3–34 Port Edgar (56 ° 00' N., 3 ° 25 ' W.) , situ
ated 1,000 yards westward of Queensferry, is
formed by two breakwaters converging toward its
entrance, which is about 250 yards wide.
Two piers, known as East Pier and West Pier,
extend about 780 and 950 feet from the head of
the harbor. In 1960 both piers had a depth of 13
feet along their outer parts. The head of the har
bor dries about 200 yards.
A 10 -foot patch lies about 50 yards northeast
ward of the head of West Pier .
In 1960 there was a least depth of 14 feet for
about 200 feet on either side of the axis of the
entrance channel.
The west breakwater is formed of rubble with a
coping of cement, the east breakwater of rubble
stones only. Shoal water extends about 50 yards
from each breakwater end and vessels entering or
leaving should keep outside this shoal water.
Great caution is necessary if entering Port
Edgar when the tide is setting across the entrance.
Traffic in the port is prohibited from 1 hour before
to 1 hour after mean low -water springs and from 2
hours before to 2 hours after low -water ex
traordinary springs.
Port Edgar Light. - A light is exhibited from a
white tower 12 feet high on the end of the west
breakwater.
Society Bank is a sandy projection from the
sand bank fronting the shore 1/2 mile westward
of Port Edgar; it is fairly steep -to.
51
( Chy. Za
Westward of this the shore is fronted by mud
flats dry at low water, with shallow water beyond
to the distance of nearly 1/2 mile in places, past
Blackness and nearly to Bridgeness, referred
to later.
Light buoy . - A black conical buoy, showing a
flashing white light, is moored about 700 yards
southwestward of the light on the South Arm of
Rosyth Dockyard .
Prohibited area . - A prohibited area , within
which passage and anchorage is prohibited, ex
tends out from the opposite shore southwestward
of Rosyth Dockyard. The area is indicated by
dashed lines on the chart. The northeastern and
northwestern corners are each marked by a can
buoy painted in green and white checkers.
Mooring buoys. - Numerous numbered moor
ing buoys are moored on each side of the River
Forth above Port Edgar. For details and locations
see the charts.
3–35 Blackness, 3 1/2 miles westward of Port
Edgar, is easily distinguished by the high walls of
the old castle on the projecting point; it is one
of the most conspicuous objects in the river.
Rocks dry on the edge of the mud flat, 200 yards
off the point.
Beacons . - A light beacon with a circular top
mark stands on the head of the pier northward
of the castle .
Four light beacons are located on the shore
between Port Edgar and Blackness.
Prohibited anchorage. - Anchorage is prohibited
in an area, near Blackness Castle, defined by the
following limits:
A line extended 000 ° from Blackness Castle
flagstaff to the north shore marks the western
limit.
The eastern limit extends to the north shore 5 °
from a point 14 mile 090° from Blackness Castle
flagstaff.
3–36 North Queensferry (56 °01' N., 8 ° 24 '
W.) , on the northern shore, just above Forth
Bridge, lies nearly abreast Queensferry (South ),
distant about 1 mile, and had a population of
about 1,400 in 1931.
H.O. 35
52 FIRTH OF FORTH-INCHKEITH TO STIRLING
Around and northwest of North Queensferry South Arm, a coal storage jetty about 1,700 feet long,
extends east- southeastward from the southeastern corner
the shore is wooded and studded with cottages as of the Main Basin with depths of 2412 to 32 feet along
far as Limpet Ness.
rd of North Queensferry
forThe shore northwestwa
a distance of about 2 miles is the site of the
new naval harbor of Rosyth. Cult Ness is located
about 1/2 mile northwestward of North Queens-
ferry.
Piers. - A railroad pier, nearly 400 yards long,
extends out to the low water line with a shorter
pier between it and the bridge. Between these
piers it dries 6 to 10 feet, and 2 to 4 feet between
the Town Pier and the bridge.
Town Pier Light. - A light is exhibited from a
white framework tower situated at the head of
Town Pier.
A siren is sounded at the railroad pier for the
guidance of the ferryboats.
3–37 Beamer Rock . - Beamer Rock, about 150
yards in length and steep -to, lies on the northern
side of the main fairway of Forth River. There are
shoal depths varying from 4 3/4 to 6 fathoms at a
distance of from 200 to 700 yards westward of
the rock. Northward of Beamer Rock depths of
less than 3 fathoms extend as far as 600 yards
offshore.
Beamer Rock Light. - A light is exhibited from
a white structure with a red band, 40 feet high,
erected on the southern edge of the rock.
Fog signal. - During thick or foggy weather a
siren is sounded from the lighthouse.
Power cable. - A power cable has been laid from
Beamer Rock to the shore, in a northeasterly
direction. A small beacon, with a diamond top
mark, marks the landing point on the northern
shore. Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of
this cable.
3–38 Long Craig - Mackintosh Rock (56 ° 00'
N., 3 ° 24' W .).— Long Craig is a rock ledge ex
tending westward of the railway pier which un
covers, with a small rock, 1 foot high, on its
western extremity. Southward 200 yards of this
rock is Mackintosh Rock, with 3 feet of water, and
a depth of 1 1/2 fathoms, close southwestward of
it, beyond which it is steep - to .
3-39 Rosyth Dockyard (56 °01' N., 8 ° 26 ' W., H. 0.
Chart 4689 ). In 1935 the dockyard comprised the Main
Basin , with an area of about 1,500 square feet, entered
through a lock ; the Tidal Basin , close northward of the
MainBasin entrance channel; and the Boat Harbor, close
eastward of the Tidal Basin .
H. 0. 86
side . There are two piers and a berth for a floating
dock within the Tidal Basin with depths of 19 feet
alongside . A wharf , with a depth of 28 feet alongside ,
extends about 650 yards east -southeastward from the
Boat Harbor .
Three drydocks lie within the Main Basin . The ap
proximate dimensions of the largest are : maximum length,
864 feet ; breadth of entrance at MHWS, 109 feet; depth
over sill at MHWS, 40 1/3 feet.
The Rosyth branch railroad communicates with the
dockyard, which has an extensive system of railroad lines.
Supplies of all types can be obtained in limited quanti
ties. Large stocks of coal, fuel oil , and Diesel oil are kept
on hand, and are supplied to vessels by lighters. Water
is obtainable from pipe lines laid onto the wharves.
Tugs are always available.
3–40 Whale's Back Shoal.The southern side
of the main channel is fronted by Whale's Back,
a shoal divided near its middle by a boat channel
with a least depth of 1 1/4 fathoms. The eastern
portion of the shoal has a least depth of 4 feet,
the western has depths of 3 to 6 feet. Between
the 3 -fathom curves, the shoal extends 1,700 yards
west -northwestward from about 800 yards west
southwestward from the Admiralty Pier at Cult
Ness .
Dhu Craig Shoal. - Dhu Craig, a spit with
depths of 1 to 14 feet, lies westward of the above
shoal, separated from it by a narrow, unmarked
channel with depths of 3 to 4 fathoms in the south
ern entrance. The spit extends 550 yards south
ward from the southern part of the main basin and
also fronts South Arm at a distance of about
100 yards.
3-41 Channels . - Rosyth Dockyard is ap
proached by the channels eastward or westward of
Beamer Rock. The eastward has a least width of
about 1/4 mile and the westward nearly 1/2 mile.
The main channel extends east -southeastward
from the main basin , along the dockyard and flats
fronting the part being reclaimed . Its eastern
end, between the 3 -fathom curves is about 250
yards wide ; abreast the boat channel it widens to
about 400 yards, narrowing again abreast South
Arm.
The main channel which leads from a po
sition northeastward of Beamer Rock to Ro
syth Dockyard was dredged to a depth of 32
feet in 1958. Silting in the main channel and
the tidal basin at Rosyth averages up to 2
feet per year; depths in the dredged areas
should be adjusted accordingly .
 BRUCEHAVEN
A flashing white light is shown from a bea-
con on a wreck located about 12 mile south-
ward of Rosyth Castle.
3-42 Buoys. — The northeastern side of the
channel is marked by black conical buoys num-
bered 1, 3, and 5.
The southern side of the channel is marked by
the following buoys:
Buoy No. 2 , a spherical buoy with red and
white bands , is moored at the southeastern
corner of Wha le's Back Shoal .
Buoy No. 4, a red can buoy showing a flashing
red light, marks the northeastern edge of Whale's
Back Shoal.
Buoy No. 6, a red can buoy, is moored 400
yards eastward of South Arm Light. It marks the
northern side of Whale's Back Shoal and the north-
western side of the boat channel.
The lights on the light buoys in Main Channel
are lit only from October 1 to March 31 .
Range beacon . — A black and white beacon is
erected about 450 yards southeastward of Rosyth
Castle. This beacon, in range with the summit
( ruined chimney) of Rosyth Castle bearing 327°
true, leads through the channel eastward of Bea-
mer Rock and Whale's Back Shoal.
In 1931 it was reported that the black and white
beacon was not discernible. The northern edge of
the high buttress of the Forth Bridge at North
Queensferry in range with the center of the white
mark on the shore southward of Cult Ness bearing
112° astern leads up the middle of the main
channel.
3–43 Anchorages . — The river for about 4 miles
above Beamer Rock affords anchorages for all
classes of vessels in depths varying from 17 to
4 1/2 fathoms, mud bottom , but the holding
ground is not good .
During flood tide at springs, the eddies caused
by Beamer Rock are said to cause a vessel to sheer
considerably should she anchor nearer than 1,500
yards westward of Beamer Rock .
A prohibited anchorage area , about 14 mile
53
( Chg 7 )
wide and 34 mile long , extends southward
from the shore in the vicinity of the black
and white beacon located about 450 yards
so utheastward of Rosyth Castle.
A submarine cable extends, as indicated on the
chart, from the range beacon southeastward of
Rosyth Castle to mooring buoy No. 18 , located
about 1,300 yards southward. Ships must not be
anchored close to the cable.
Moorings. - Moorings are laid on both sides of
the river opposite the dockyard and on the south
ern side of the river eastward of Port Edgar are
moorings for aircraft.
Tides . — It is high water, full and change, at
Rosyth at 2h. 37m.; springs rise 17 1/2 feet,
neaps 13 3/4 feet above datum of the chart, which
is 8 feet 9 inches below Ordnance datum.
A tide gage is situated northward of the dock
entrance.
3-44 A light is shown from the southeast
ern end of South Arm Pier .
A nautophone is sounded at the light.
Explosives. Bylaws relating to the carrying of
petroleum and carbide of calcium are in force.
3–45 Coast. — Bruce haven , westward of
Rosyth Harbor, is formed by a single pier ex
tending southward with a cant to the south
east, from Capernaum Point , at the south
east extremity of the town of Limekilns;
it is protected by ledges eastward of it.
Beacons . — A beacon marks the southern ex
tremity of the rocks which dry 15 feet on the east
ern side of Brucehaven .
Beacon No. 2, with a triangular top mark,
point down, is located 2/3 mile northwestward
of the Dockyard Signal Tower. Two lights are
shown at an elevation of 30 feet, on request, from
the beacon .
Brucehaven Pier Beacon No. 3, with a square
top mark, stands on the head of the pier at the
boat harbor. A light is shown, on request, from
the beacon.
Broomhall. — The country westward from North
H.O. 35
54 FIRTH OF FORTH -
Queensferry is wooded and cultivated. Between
Limekilns and Charlestown for 1,000 yards the
land behind the coast forms a steep ridge on which
is the wooded park of Broomhall. From the
river, the house is seen only from the southeast.
Within the park is a square mass of limestone 50
feet high called Gellet Rock , the top of which is
level with the tops of the trees in the park, and
185 feet above high water. It is surmounted by
a flagstaff.
3-46 Charlestown Harbor (56 °02' N. , 3 ° 30'
W. ), nearly 1 mile westward of Limekilns, has an
area of 9 acres and a depth of 14 to 16 feet over soft
mud at high water of spring tides. It is not a busy
port, but some coal is exported .
The harbor, dry at low water, and protected
from all winds, is the property of the London and
Northeastern Railway Co. , and a branch line
connects it with Dunfermline.
Bylaws regarding explosives are in force at
Charlestown Harbor and obtainable at the port.
Charlestown Harbor Light. - A light is shown
from a red tower, white-domed , 15 feet high, on
the outer end of the west breakwater at Charles-
town Harbor.
Anchorage. - Charlestown Roads lie southward
of the rangeline on the chart between Limekilns
and Charlestown Harbor.
An anchorage area shown by dashed lines on
the chart has been established in the middle of the
river southward of Charlestown and Limekilns.
3-47 Pier. – From Kinniny Point, Crombie
Pier extends for a distance of about 600 yards in a
southerly direction, and then bends to the east-
ward for a distance of about 200 yards. Outside
the eastern arm and within it for a distance of
about 100 yards the area is being dredged to a
depth of 15 feet.
A wreck lies 2,860 yards west of the east end of
Crombie Pier.
Kinniny Point lights . — A light is exhibited at
the extremity of the pier and a similar light is
H.O. 35
INCHKEITH TO STIRLING
shown near the bend , each from a column, 10 feet
high.
Fog signal. — A fog signal is sounded on a dia
phone at the eastern end of the outer arm of
Crombie Pier.
Prohibited area - Buoys. — Dashed lines on the
chart in the vicinity of Crombie Pier indicate the
limits of an area into which all boats or vessels,
other than those authorized , are prohibited from
entering. The eastern and western outer ex
tremities are marked by black conical buoys .
3-48 Tancred Bank (56 °01' N., 3 ° 32' W.),
nearly in the middle of the river, and southward of
Crombie Pier, is nearly 11/4 miles long in a
northwest and southeast direction by 350 yards in
breadth . It is composed of sand, mud, stones, and
shells, and had 6 feet least water on it in 1942.
Foul ground, consisting of dangerous wreckage,
with a depth of 23/4 fathoms over it, lies on the
southern side of the western end of Tancred Bank.
Several isolated patches with depths of 23/4
to 3 fathoms exist in the fairway between the
western side of Tancred Bank and Dods Bank .
In 1942 less water was reported off the south
western extremity of Tancred Bank .
Light buoys. — The channel between Blackness
and Borrowstounness is marked on the southern
side by Dods Bank Light Buoy, a can buoy painted
red and showing a flashing red light, located about
11/4 miles westward of Crombie Pier, and on the
northern side by two black conical buoys near
Crombie Pier, and Torry Light Buoy, a conical
buoy, painted black and showing a flashing red
light, located 13/4 miles westward of the same pier.
A shoal with a depth of 3 fathoms over it is situ
ated close southward of Dods Bank Light Buoy.
A buoy, painted red and showing a flashing red
light, marks the eastern side of Tancred Bank .
Prohibited anchorage . - Anchoring and fishing
are prohibited in the channel southward of Tancred
Bank .
 GRANGEMOUTH
3-63 GRANGEMOUTH , situated at the eastern en
trance of the Forth and Clyde Canal, and nearly in the
center of Scotland, is a busy town . The accommodation
for shipping consists of about 58 acres of dock area , with
nearly 3 miles of quayage. The docks are furnished with
hydraulic hoists and every convenience for loading and
discharging cargo . There is railroad connection with
Glasgow , the Lanarkshire mines, and the whole system of
the Caledonian Railway. The population of Grangemouth
was 11,799 in 1931.
Drydock . — The approximate dimensions of the largest
drydock are : maximum length, 350 feet; breadth of en
trance at MHWS, 52 1/2 feet; depth over sill at MHWS,
24 feet.
Supplies.-- Fresh water is laidon at intervals around the
wet docks and provisions of all descriptions can be ob
tained . About 500 tons of coal can be put on board per
hour in the wet docks. There are oil tanks of 50,000 tons'
capacity, with several pipe lines to dock side.
3–64 THE FORTH AND CLYDE CANAL.
The Forth and Clyde Canal affords a navigable
channel between the east and west coasts of Scot
land for vessels not exceeding 8 1 / 2-foot draft.
The length of the navigation direct from Grange
mouth to the River Clyde is 35 miles, the side
branch to Port Dundas and Glasgow is 2 3/4 miles,
and the continuation to the Monkland Canal
1 mile; total, 38 3/4 miles. The number of locks
on the eastern side is 20, and on the western 19,
the difference being partly caused by the higher
level of the tide at high water in the Clyde than in
the Forth. Each lock is 71 3/4 feet long, 19 2/3
feet broad, with a lift of about 8 feet. The sum
mit level of the canal is 156 feet, its average width
at the surface is 63 feet, at the bottom 30 feet, and
its depth about 91/2 feet. The canal has six
reservoirs, covering about 400 acres, containing
12,000 lockfuls of water.
Vessels above 7 feet 6 inches draft can be ac
commodated with lighters for any portion of their
cargo which they may require to take out while
passing through the canal. The rate of tonnage is
according to the nature of the cargo ; tables of
tolls and regulations may be obtained at the col
lector's offices on entering the canal.
Falkirk, on the Forth and Clyde Canal, is con
nected with Edinburgh by the Edinburgh &
Glasgow Union Canal, available for craft 66 feet
in length, 11 1/4 feet breadth, and 4 -foot draft.
59
( Chg 71
It was reported (1944) that the canal was not
being dredged and was silting up.
3–65 FORTH RIVER . — Grangemouth to Alloa
(B. A. Chart 114d ).- Northwestward of Carron
River there is no navigable channel at low water
for vessels above 6 -foot draft, as before remarked .
A shoal with 4 1/2 feet of water over it lies be
tween the spit which extends southeastward from
Longannet Point and the southern shore. A patch
over which there is but 1 fathom lies about 600
yards southwestward of Longannet Point.
Inch Brake. In the fairway about one mile
above Longannet Point is a small detached rock
named Inch Brake, having 3 feet of water over it,
with an average depth of 12 feet around.
Buoy . - A spherical buoy, painted in black and
white horizontal bands, is moored close southeast
ward of Inch Brake.
3-66 Kincardine (56 ° 04 ' N., 8 °43' W .).- At
Kincardine the navigable channel of the River
Forth is contracted on either side to a width of
350 yards. The contraction of the channel causes
a greater velocity of tidal current, the ebb current
off Kincardine sometimes attaining a velocity of
3 knots. The foreshore on each side of Kincardine
has been reclaimed to the extent of over half a
square mile .
A bridge of the swing type crosses the river at
Kincardine.
Ferry piers on each side of the river are located
about 150 yards above the bridge.
A light beacon stands on the east bank of
the river about 150 yards above the east ferry
pier.
Cable. - Overhead cables, 140 feet above high
water, extend across the river at Kincardine.
Anchorage . — The anchorage off Kincardine is
northward of a line joining the ferry pier on the
eastern side and a point 100 yards southward of
the ferry pier on the western side.
3-67 Tidal currents . — The flood or northwest
going current begins about 4 hours before high
water at Leith and attains a velocity of 3 knots at
H.O. 35
60 FIRTH OF FORTH-INCHKEITH TO STIRLING
springs. The ebb or southeast- going current be
gins at about 1 hour after high water at Leith, and
attains a velocity of 3 1/2 knots at springs. The
phenomenon known as the "leaky tide” is often
discernible at Kincardine, but not so pronounced
as in the reach northwest of the town, and at
Alloa. It is not unusual, however, to see the flood
current arrested shortly after it has commenced ,
the water also to fall 6 inches, and the current to
run down. It is also common for vessels to swing
half round to the flood current, and afterwards re
turn to their original positions.
3-68 Middle Bank . - About 1,000 yards north
ward of Kincardine, Middle Bank obstructs the
channel. The channel of the river is continually
changing, and , from here on , local knowledge is
necessary. The chart is unreliable.
Blackhall Rock . - A pinnacle rock over which
there is a depth of 3 feet lies on the north side of
the channel, 1,000 yards northwestward of the ex
tremity of the ferry pier at Kincardine. The rock
has surrounding depths of from 6 to 7 feet.
Buoys .—Middle Bank E. Buoy , a black
conical buoy is moored off the southeastern
end of Middle Bank .
Kincardine Light Buoy is moored about 400
yards northwestward of the head of the ferry
pier on the east side of the river .
Airth Light Buoy, a red can showing a flashing
red light, is moored on the southern side of the
channel southward of Middle Bank .
Middle Bank W. Light Buoy, a black conical
buoy showing a flashing white light, is moored on
the western side of the channel westward of Ken
netpans.
A light buoy, painted black and showing a flash
ing red light, is moored about 1,000 yards south
southeastward of Alloa dock .
3-69 Kennetpans is situated on a small creek
on the northeast side of the River Forth, 1 mile
above Kincardine. Dunmore Village is situated
on the southwestern side of the River Forth and
1 mile above Kennetpans. Nearly opposite Dun
more the Black Devon Stream joins the Forth at
Clackmannan Pow.
A white light beacon stands on the bank about
400 yards above Dunmore Village.
H.O. 35
Submerged pipelines , marked at their in
shore ends by beacons , extend from Dunmore
to the opposite shore. Anchoring within 150
yards of the pipelines is prohibited.
Buoys . - Clackmannan Pow Light Buoy, a black
conical buoy showing a flashing white light, is
moored about 600 yards west-southwestward of
the entrance to Clackmannan Pow.
A black conical buoy is moored about 600 yards
westward of the entrance to Alloa wet dock.
3–70 Alloa lights . - From a pillar 4 feet high
on each side of the entrance to the wet dock , a
light is exhibited .
A light is shown from a pillar near the center of
the quay, at which vessels load and discharge,
northwestward of the dock .
Two lights are shown from posts 4 feet high on a
jetty and a dolphin at South Alloa .
Ferry piers. — At Alloa and South Alloa there are
ferry piers carried out to low -water mark of
ordinary springs.
Traffic signal. - A red flag hoisted on a staff at
the inner end of South Alloa ferry pier indicates
that all the berths are occupied and that vessels
must wait at Kincardine.
3–71 Tides and tidal currents. It is high
water, full and change, at Alloa, at 3h. 18m.;
springs rise 17 1/2 feet, neaps 15 feet. The phe
nomenon known as the "leaky tide” occurs here
occasionally, at about the period of neaps, in the
following manner : At about 4 hours after high
water, the current runs in for a short time, and the
water rises from 1 to 2 feet; at about 1 1/2 hours
before high water, the current runs out for a short
time, and the water falls about 1 foot. The north
west- going current begins about 4 hours before, and
the southeast-going current about 1 hour after,
high water at Leith. It attains a velocity of 3 knots.
A tide gage is located on the southern side of the
entrance to the Alloa wet dock .
Anchorage is not available, but vessels of light
draft can lie alongside the harbor pier at their own
risk . Vessels of more than 16 -foot draft seldom
visit the town.
Tugs. — The port has one tug.
3-72 ALLOA (56 °07' N., 8 °49' W.) lies on the north
east shore, in a bight formed by the river turning abruptly
 DUNBAR
About 200 yards westward of this perch , another
marks Wallace Head Rock, which dries.
Sicar Rock , a rocky patch with a depth of
4 1/2 fathoms and with 10 to 16 fathoms around,
lies in the eastern approach to Dunbar Harbors,
1 1/4 miles eastward of the light on Battery
Point. The sea at times during onshore gales
breaks heavily over this Rock . A patch of 4 1/2
fathoms lies 800 yards eastward of Battery Point.
Outer Bush (Buss), a small rock with a depth of
1 foot, the outermost danger at Dunbar, lies in
the approach to Broadhaven and the Old Har
bor and about 400 yards northeastward of Vic-
toria Harbor Light.
4-4 Victoria Harbor, northwestward of the
town and between Battery Point and Castle
Rocks, has an area of 4 1/3 acres. It is protected
on the north by a massive breakwater 190 yards
in length, surmounted by a parapet 15 feet high
and 21 feet above high water. The entrance
facing northwestward, cut through the solid rock,
is 80 feet wide . It is difficult to enter due
partly to a bend in the entrance between the
rock walls . This factor limits the length of
vessels that can enter to 100 feet and then
only during favorable weather conditions .
Northwesterly through southeasterly winds
cause considerable swell . A sandbar outside
the entrance limits the draft of vessels that
can enter to 13 feet at MHWS . There is a
depth of 12 feet in the harbor , and 19 feet at
the quays at high -water springs over a bottom
of rock , with a little sand here and there ; the
entrance to this harbor is also protected by
booms .
Broadhaven is the name given to the water
area between Battery Pier to the westward and the
entrance to the Old Harbor, which is now closed.
Dunbar Harbor Light is shown from a column
12 feet high on the middle quay of Victoria
Harbor.
Range lights are shown from pillars 12 and 13
feet high on Bayswell Hill ; in range they lead into
Victoria Harbor.
A light is shown 800 yards 342º from Dunbar
Church .
A prohibited anchorage and fishing area in
Dunbar Roads is limited by the arc of a circle
63
(Chg 7)
centered at the above light, having a radius of
1 1/2 miles and the bearings 20 ° and 40° from it.
Dunbar Roads. - Vessels waiting tide to enter
the harbors usually anchor westward of Dunbar
Steeples, with the tower of the church in range
with Dunbar Castle, and Knockenhair Tower, a
ruined mill,'bearing about 203 °, in 7 fathoms, sand.
Storm signals are exhibited from the coast
guard flagstaff at Dunbar.
Coast guard . - Dunbar is a coast guard station .
Lifesaving . - A motor lifeboat and rocket ap
paratus are maintained at Dunbar.
Tides. - It is high water, full and change, at
Dunbar at 2h. 8m.; springs rise 14 1/2 feet, neaps
11 feet.
4-5 DUNBAR (56 °00 ' N., 2 °31' W.) is prominently
situated upon a wide point eastward of Tynninghame
Sands, and is readily distinguished whether approached
from the east or west. The town is mostly built of a dark
colored stone. Among the more conspicuous objects is its
church , built of a reddish sandstone, and Knockenhair
Tower (the ruin of a windmill ) on a conical hillock west
ward of the town.
Dunbar, from its proximity to thebest fishing grounds
and the facility of carriage by the railroad either north or
south , is frequented by a number of boats during the
winter herring fishing. There is a customhouse here.
In 1931 Dunbar had a population of 3,751 .
Supplies . - About 140 tons of coal are usually in stock ..
About 20 tons can be put on board daily . The coaling
wharf (harbor wall) is 800 feet long, and with a depth of 2
feet at low -water springs. Fresh provisions are obtained in
moderate quantities and good water is piped into the pier.
Vessels cannot be watered at anchor.
Communication . There is railroad communication with
Edinburgh and Berwick and thence with the general
system .
4-6 Coast. – From Dunbar the coast, fronted
by rocky ledges to the distance of nearly 400 yards,
trends southeastward to Barns Ness Lighthouse,
a distance of 2 1/2 miles : between lies Vaultness ,
a low dark -colored point with a large house with
outbuildings on its western side.
Between Dunbar and Pease Bay, a distance of
71/2 miles, the land within is high and based upon
a flat foregound on which the railroad is occasion
ally visible. Doon Hill, 574 feet, the extremity of
the high back land, is bold and well defined .
Off-lying dangers.-- Bush of Blackstanes, with
a depth of 4 3/4 fathoms and 6 to 7 fathoms
around, lies 900 yards northeastward of Vaultness.
H. 0. 35
64 GUN HEAD TO NORTH SUNDERLAND
Guardy, a patch of 6 fathoms, with 10 fathoms
around, lies 1 1/4 miles northeastward of Vault
ness. It must be avoided during onshore gales.
A patch of 4 3/4 fathoms lies between it and the
shore.
Ruddystone, a rock with a depth of 3 fathoms
and 6 fathoms around, lies 1,000 yards northward
of Barns Ness Lighthouse.
4-7 Barns Ness (55 °59' N. , 2 °27'W. ) is a low
point, with rocky ledges extending 500 yards off
it, toward Ruddystone.
Barns Ness Light is exhibited from a white
tower, 121 feet high, on Barns Ness. Distress
signals are shown from the lighthouse when neces
sary for lifesaving purposes.
Tidal currents . - In the offing, eastward from
Barns Ness, the northwest-going current begins
at 3 hours after, and the southeast- going current
3 hours before, high water at Leith.
4-8 Skateraw . At 1 1/2 miles southeastward
of Barns Ness Lighthouse is the small harbor of
Skateraw, at the head of the bight formed by Tor
Ness and Chapel Point. The harbor is formed by
an east pier and a short western spur, with an en
trance 35 feet in width between them facing north
west; it has a depth of only about 5 feet at high
water, and is only useful for boats at near that time.
Outer Bush, a patch of 9 fathoms, with 11 to 12
fathoms around, lies 1 mile northeastward of Tor
Ness.
4-9 Coast. - Between Skateraw and Fast
Castle Point the coast forms a bight 6 1/2 miles
wide, at the head of which is Cockburnspath ; it
is free from dangers beyond the distance of 300
yards, but the 5 -fathom curve is nearly 1,000 yards
offshore northwestward of Cockburnspath. An
chorage should be taken only during offshore winds.
4-10 Cove Harbor (55 ° 56 ' N., 2 ° 20 ' W.) , 3
miles southeastward of Skateraw, is a small fish
ing harbor, formed by a north and a south pier,
with an entrance 72 feet in width, and a depth of
16 feet at high -water spring tides at the pierheads,
and from 11 to 12 feet at the berthage, on a rocky
bottom ; a heavy run is thrown into the harbor
by onshore gales. Rocky ledges extend 500 yards
seaward of the harbor, close beyond which are
sunken rocks ; the easternmost is known as the
Hurker, and lies off the west point of Pease Bay.
H.O. 35
A few small craft enter to discharge coal, but it is
chiefly used as a fishing harbor.
Coast guard . — Cockburnspath station is situ
ated at Cove, where a rocket apparatus is kept.
Storm signals are shown at the coast guard
station.
4-11 Pease Bay, at about 1,000 yards east
ward of Cove Harbor, lies at the mouth of a deep
and well-wooded ravine. The stone bridge or via
duct carried across it a short distance up the valley,
with its four unequal arches rising 120 feet above
Red Burn, is a striking object as seen from the sea .
A patch of 4 feet lies 400 yards northward of
Greenheugh, the east point of the bay.
4-12 Fast Castle Point (55 ° 56 ' N. , 2°13' W.)
lies midway between Pease Bay and St. Abbs
Head. Under Telegraph Hill, 568 feet high,
1,000 yards within the point, are the remains of
Fast Castle.
Between Fast Castle Point and St. Abbs Head
the coast is bold and rugged, with elevated land
nearly bare of wood, and falling in a steep slope,
forming cliffs in several places.
4-13 Coast. - Between Pease Bay and Fast
Castle Point, 3 1/2 miles to the eastward, lie
Siccar Point, Cargill Rock, Windylaw and Nick
Coves, with a landing place in fine weather in the
bight at Redheugh ; there are no off-lying dangers.
Just westward of Siccar Point, on the top of a steep
brow, are the ruins of the chapel of St. Helen.
4-14 ST. ABBS HEAD (55 °55' N., 2 ° 08 ' W.,
H.O. Chart 4470 ), a bold promontory of dark trap
rock, rising precipitously to a height of 303 feet,
the face of the cliff being broken into deep fissures,
is separated from Lumsdaine Hill (Cross Law ),
737 feet high , 2 miles westward, by a valley, caus
ing the head at a distance to appear like an island
when seen from the southeast or northwest. Many
portions of the rocky cliff have been detached, but
the head is bold-to, and there is a depth of 30
fathoms at the distance of 1,000 yards off it.
About 1,200 yards southward of the head is a rock
near the shore, known as the " Big Black Carr” ,
with others on either side of it, as charted .
There is good landing during offshore winds at
Pettigo Wick, the bight close westward of the cove .
 BERWICK
Ross is the village of Burnmouth, consisting of the northeast side of the entrance into the harbor.
several clusters of fishermen's houses. It has a
small harbor at the inner end of a natural opening
through the rocks formed by an east pier with a
north elbow ; the space within is barely sufficient
for 40 boats when close-packed. The population
of Burnmouth, together with Ross, was 722 in 1931 .
A rocket apparatus is kept at Burnmouth.
Storm signals are shown.
Burnmouth lights. - A light on the hcad of the
pier and a pair of range lights are occasionally
exhibited .
Ross Carrs. — About 1,200 yards northward of
Burnmouth Pier and 800 yards from the shore are
2 rocks named Ross Carrs, which dry 5 feet at
low water. A third rock, named South Carr, lies
600 yards eastward of the pier. They are steep -to
to seaward and rather in the way of small vessels
working alongshore. The mark to clear them is
Lamberton Farm , which stands high and has a
few trees about it, open of the foot of Lamberton
Hill, bearing about 185°. Berwick Pier Lighthouse
kept in sight bearing 160 °, or southward of that
bearing, also clears them .
4–26 Coast – Aspect. - Lamberton Hill, 705
feet, and Halidon Hill, 537 feet high, about 2 1/2
miles farther southward, stand about 1 1/3 miles
back from the coast and extend from Burnmouth
to Berwick ; the railroad skirts their base for the
whole distance and is generally in sight from the
sea. The coast line consists of steep banks and
cliffs about 60 feet high, gradually decreasing in
beight toward Berwick ; at their base is a mass of
rocks projecting 700 yards seaward.
A measured distance of 6,080 feet, marked
by 2 pairs of beacons and each beacon having affordingsuperior holding ground.
2 white diamond topmarks, is located close
northward of Berwick Harbor entrance . The
running course is 157° -337º.
4-27 BERWICK — Aspect ( 55 °46 ' N., 2 °00' night a red light at the masthead or where it can
W., H. 0. Chart 4692 ) .— Berwick stands on the
side of a hill which slopes down to the water on the
northern or Scottish side of Tweed River. The
spires on the town hall, St Mary's Church, the
Presbyterian Church, and an octagonal building
called the Bell Tower, are all conspicuousobjects from4-28a circular
on the higher ground to the north. A massive
stone pierwith a lighthouseat its extremitymarks top and base , on the head of the breakwater.
67
(Chg 7)
Tweedmouth and the village of Spital are situ
ated on the low ground forming the west and
south sides of the river.
Dangers in the approach . SealCarr is a sunken
ledge extending about 500 yards northeastward of
Sharper Head. The coast, which consists of cliffs
50 feet high, is fronted by similar ledges from Seal
Carr to the entrance to Berwick Harbor. These
ledges are known as Midden Buss, Ladies Skerrs,
Bucket Rocks, and Meadow Haven Rocks. The
shore is foul to a distance of about 1,000 yards.
The range for clearing these offshore dangers is
the Inlandpasture Chimney, in line with Borewoll
Chimney, bearing 186º. By night do not approach
the shore to less depth than 10 fathoms. Berwick
Lighthouse is obscured westward of 021 ° to
clear these dangers .
On the southern side, the approach is clear of
dangers except for Inner Buss, a bank with a depth
of 2 1/2 fathoms, sand over rock , which extends
1,000 yards offshore. Its outer extremity lies 800
yards southeastward of the lighthouse.
Anchorage . - Good anchorage may be found off
Berwick in depths of from 7 to 8 fathoms ,
about 1 mile east -southeastward of the break
water lighthouse , but it is exposed to north
erly and easterly winds . During certain east
erly winds it is possible to enter Holy Is
land Harbor, about 9 miles southward of
Berwick, when entry into the harbor of the
latter is dangerous . In strong westerly
winds anchorage in Berwick Bay® is better,
Explosive bylaws. — The master of every petro
leum ship shall on nearing the harbor display by
day a red flag not less than 3 feet square with a
white circular center 6 inches in diameter, and by
best be seen , but not less than 20 feet above the
deck . The Petroleum Acts and acts relating to
carbide of calcium are in force here, full details of
which will be found in the bylaws obtainable at
the harbor office.
Berwickstone
lights. - A light is exhibited
tower48 feethigh, with red
H.O. 35
68 GIN HEAD TO NORTH SUNDERLAND
Lights are also shown from the following
places ; the northeastern end of the Fish
Quay , the head of the pier, and the root of
the breakwater .
A light is exhibited from a concrete beacon
about 600 yards westward of Berwick Light.
A beacon , painted black and white with a
triangular topmark , is located close north-
eastward of this light .
Range lights in range bearing 210°, exhibited
from yellow beacons with black bands and tri-
angular top marks, are located in the inner harbor
about 1/2 mile southwestward of Berwick Light.
Storm signals are shown at the coast guard
flagstaff near the inner end of the breakwater.
Coast guard . - Berwick is the headquarters of
the coast guard division of that name,
Lifesaving . – A motor lifeboat and rocket appa-
ratus are maintained at Berwick .
4-29 Tweed River, on which is the town of
Berwick , carries a large body of water to the sea,
as the area of its catchment basin is 1,870 square
miles, greater than that of any river in Scotland
except the Tay. It has its source in Peebleshire at
a height of 1,500 feet in the same tableland as the
Clyde, and falls as a mountain stream 900 feet
in the first 16 miles of its course, or at the rate of
56 feet in a mile, after which it assumes a regular
descent of about 9 feet in a mile to Kelso. The
slope then decreases to 4 1/2 feet in a mile until
about 8 miles above Berwick, whence it has a de-
scent of less than 2 feet in a mile to the sea, which
it reaches after a total course of 96 1/2 miles.
4-30 Berwick Harbor is formed by the lower
or sea reach of Tweed River, which falls into the
sea at the distance of 1 mile below Berwick Bridge,
between the breakwater on the north and a long,
low, sandy spit, extending from Spital Point,
serving as a natural breakwater on the south.
Considerable shoaling was reported ( 1956)
to have taken place in the entrance of Ber-
wick Harbor .
The stone breakwater which defends the harbor
from easterly gales is built of rubble and sand-
stone, faced with ashlar; it is 830 yards in length
by 13 yards average width , and 24 feet in height.
The entrance to the harbor, facing southeast-
ward, varies in width , but in general is about 100
yards wide, narrowing northward of the sandy
spit off Spital Point ; it has a bar of rocky boulders
and sand which has a depth of 3 to 4 feet over it.
Foul ground with rocks in places extends 200
yards eastward of the end of the breakwater.
Westward of the elbow of the breakwater is
Crabwater Rock, nearly dry at low -water springs;
westward of which the Calot Shad, a horseshoe
shaped bank of sand and stones with rocky ledges
on it, extends nearly across to the southern side of
the harbor.
On the southern side of the channel, a shifting
sandbank extends about 400 yards northward of
Spital Point to within less than 100 yards of the
breakwater ; its eastern extremity is known as
Sandstell Point. Spital Point and the factory upon
it are protected from the action of the sea at
high water by a rubble wall.
The sandbank off Spital Point is liable to con
siderable alteration which may make the channel
between it and Calot Shad narrower then charted .
The channel within the harbor is marked
by buoys and beacons .
A bank which dries fronts the western shore,
northwestward of Fish Quay. On the bank are
several salmon weirs or batts .
The bed of the Tweed is frequently strewn with
large stones brought down by the freshets.
Power cable . - An electric power cable crosses
the river between Spital and Berwick .
Wharf . - Fish Quay, 800 feet long, with fish
curing stations on it, is situated close eastward of
Carr Rock , near Spital.
Berths. - The deepest berth is off Carr Rock ,
where there is a depth of 17 feet and small vessels
may lie at anchor with hawsers to the quay. In
other parts of the harbor there is a depth varying
from 3 to 6 feet at low water, with one berth of 11
feet depth on the Berwick side alongside the quay
immediately south of the old bridge. Vessels of
deeper draft or greater length, to lie afloat, must
enter the wet dock .
Wet dock . - On the Tweedinouth side of the
river there is a wet dock, with 500 yards of quay
accommodation , the depth on the sill being 18 1/2
feet at high water, ordinary spring tides. The
gates are opened one hour before and closed one
hour after high water, and the dock will accom
modate 16 vessels in a single tier . A pier
and a groyne extend from the shore and form
 BERWICK 68a
( Chg 7)
the north and south sides of the entrance
channel. A buoy is moored off the outer end
of the groyne. A flagstaff stands on the out
er end of the pier .
There are five berths, with lengths of 400, 346,
318, 210, and 114 feet. The 210 -foot dock is for
coaling.
In 1956 , considerable shoa ling was reported
in the harbor entrance and at the entrance to
the wet dock .

H.O. 35
 BLYTH HARBOR
A black conical buoy is moored in 24 feet of
water off the eastern side of The Sow.
Seaton Sea Rocks, 440 yards eastward of the
outer part of East Pier.
Range for clearing. - Tynemouth Castle build-
ings bearing 165° open their own breadth outside
St. Marys Isle leads eastward of the above shoals.
Light and bell buoy. - A black conical light and
bell buoy showing a flashing white light is moored
1,100 yards southeastward of the outer end of
East Pier. Vessels entering or leaving the harbor
should pass southward of this light and bell buoy.
Wreck . — The wreck of a vessel, dangerous to
navigation, lies about 1,500 yards south -south-
eastward of the outer end of the New West Pier.
5-31 East Pier or breakwater is nearly 1,600
yards long, in a 150 ° direction ; the inner part,
1,100 feet long, is of stone, and the outer portion
is of concrete, both having a timber superstruc-
ture. At its inner end a concrete sea wall has
been constructed .
Blyth Harbor East Pier Light. - A light is ex-
hibited from a gray lantern surmounting a white
tower, 46 feet high, erected on the pierhead.
Two subsidiary lights are exhibited from the
same tower 21 feet below the main light.
Fog signal. - A fog signal is made on a diaphone
on East Pier.
Storm signals.Storm signals are exhibited on
the ice factory, the large building on the eastern
side of South Harbor.
5–32 Old West Pier, of timber piling with
rubble heart, is nearly parallel with the East
Pier, but has a slight elbow at its northern end ;
it is joined to the mainland by a barrier wall
running at right angles to it, thus forming the
South Harbor. Both ends of this pier have been
demolished . The central portion is retained as a
training wall. Pecked lines on the chart indicate
the old limits of the pier.
A new pier has been built parallel to and a little
more than 200 yards westward of the Old West
Pier, but with a bend, bringing its outer end 200
yards westward of East Pier Lighthouse .
New West Pier Light. - A light is exhibited
from a white iron structure, 13 feet high, on the
pierhead of New West Pier.
Old West Pier lights. - A light is exhibited at
an elevation of 20 feet from the southern end of
Old West Pier.
A light is exhibited from an iron structure, 9 feet
high, at the northern extremity of Old West Pier.
85
( Chg 7 )
5-33 The channel between the piers has been
dredged to 24 feet at datum of soundings, with a
bottom width of 280 feet; it is nearer to the Old
West than the East Pier, the center of the channel
being about 175 feet from the former . The
channel depths are subject to siltage.
5–34 Beacons.—Two black pole beacons, each
surmounted by a cone-shaped topmark, mark the
eastern side of the channel abreast of Old West
Pier.
A red pole beacon with a can topmark marks the
western side of the channel abreast Old West
Pier, and a similar beacon is located about 200
yards north -northwestward of Inner West pier
head.
Range lights. - Rear light : A light is exhibited
from a white cylindrical tower, 61 feet high, on the
eastern side of the town .
Front light : A light is exhibited from a white
hexagonal tower, 29 feet high, erected on the
western bank of the river, 288 yards, 141°, from
the rear light. The rear and front lights and also
the light on the northern end of West Pier in range
bearing 321° lead between the piers.
Blyth Snook Range Lights. - Two lights, 95
yards apart, are exhibited from white lighthouses,
27 and 12 feet high, respectively, on Blyth Snook,
which in range bearing 338º lead through the in
ner part of the channel into Blyth Harbor. A
light is shown on either side of the channel
abreast the intersection of the two latter
ranges .
Beacon .-- A red pile beacon with a cylindrical
topmark lies 70 yards in a 60° direction from the
low range light in Blyth Harbor.
Coaling Staiths Light. - A light is shown at the
southern end of the new coaling staiths at the
head of the harbor.
5–35 The river, above the town, opens out into
a wide expanse, and forms a considerable reservoir .
The tidal flow ceases at the dam of Bedlington
Iron Works, 3 miles above Blyth.
5–36 Bylaws.--General bylaws are in force at
Blyth Harbor; also bylaws in respect to petro
leum, carbide of calcium, and explosives. A copy
can be obtained from the harbor master's office.
5–37 Coast guard .--- There is a coast guard sta
tion near the front range light.
Lifeboat. - A motor lifeboat is stationed at the
northern end of South Harbor at Blyth , and a
lifesavingrocket apparatus here.
5-38 Tides . - It is high water, full and change
H.O. 35
 86 NORTH SUNDERLAND TO THE RIVER TYNE
at Blyth,
feet, andat neaps
3h. 15m.;
rangesprings
6 feet. rise
The15currentdur-
feet, neaps 'of
1300theyearseighteenth
11
colliery caused an improvement in its trade. The popula
ing the flood sets westward directly across the tionin 1951 was about 34,700 .
harbor entrance . The tidal currents into and out
of the harbor change about an hour before the
currents outside.
The datum is zero on the harbor gage, or 1 foot
below mean level of low -water springs .
5–39 Pilots. — A pilot master and twenty -two
pilots belong to Blyth. A pilot in a steam cutter
will board a vessel making the usual signal.
Pilotage is not compulsory but is advis-
able .
A vessel requiring a pilot should sound
two short and three long blasts on the
whistle or fog horn .
Tugs.- Several tugs are available . Ves
sels requiring tugs by day should sound 1
long and 4 short blasts on the whistle.
Orders must be placed for tugs required at
night.
A boat service, for the securing of ship's
lines , is provided by day and night. Vessels
requiring this service should sound 2 long
and 2 short blasts on the whistle .
5-40 Directions.On approaching Blyth Har
bor from the northward keep the buildings of
Tynemouth Castle open their own breadth east-
ward of St. Marys Isle, bearing 165°, to avoid the
outside dangers. When East Pier Lighthouse
bears 280º, vessels should steer to pass south
ward of the light-and -bell buoy off the entrance,
bringing Blyth Lighthouses in range, bearing 321°,
and steer on that range between the piers until
Blyth Snook Lights come in range 338°, and enter
the harbor on that range; vessels are, however,
recommended to take pilots for this port. Coming
from the southward bring the Blyth Lighthouses
to bear 321°, and then proceed as from the north-
ward. The scend into the harbor during on-
s hore winds is at times considerable , owing
to the conducting effect of the breakwaters ,
but there is no effect on the northern side of
the river.
There is smooth water in South Harbor, but
vessels laying at the southern staiths must
take extra precautions because of the scend.
If necessary , additional springs may be ob-
tained from the harbor authority .
5-41 BLYTH (55 °08' N., 1 °90' W., H.O. Chart 4696 ).
-The town stands on the southwestern side of River
Blyth at its outlet. Coal was first shipped here upward of
H.O. 35
ago, but century,
the townwhen
continued small tillof the close
the opening
Cowpen
Harbor. - The deep -water area, including South Har
bor , is about 140 acres . The main harbor is faced on
its northeastern side by stone and timber quays up
wards of 1,000 yards long. The depth alongside the
quays is 27 feet, and the space available varies from
300to 500 feet in breadth .
On the southern side of the main harbor there are 4
coaling berths at the staiths , with lengths of
330 to 500 feet and depths of 21 to 30 feet
alongside .
On the southern side of the main harbor, about 800 yards
northwestward of the coaling berth at the staiths, is a
private quay about 250 feet long with a depth of 20
feet alongside.
On the northern side of the harbor there are 4 coal
ing berths with lengths of 360 to 555 feet, and a depth
of 27 feet alongside.
There are 2 coaling berths at the western staiths,
each 500 feet in length, with depths of 30 feet along
side .
Cowpen staiths have a combined berthing length of
1,400 feet with depths alongside of 25 to 27 feet.
To the westward of the Old West Pier is the South Har
bor, 23 acres in extent . There are 5 waiting
berths in South Harbor for vessels up to 450
feet in length , having depths of 20 to 30 feet
alongside .
There are also 4 berths for general cargo, hav .
ing a total quayage of 1,140 feet and depths of
19 to 21 feet .
There are 14 cranes in South Harbor, the largest having a
lifting capacity of 12 tons.
Vessels drawing more than 24 feet or over 400 feet in
length should be the subject of prior arrangement with the
port authority due to the limited berthingaccommodation
for deep-draft vessels.
Repairs . — Major hull, boiler , and machinery repairs
can be effected . Divers and diving equipment can be
furnished
Drydock . — The approximate dimensions of the largest
drydock are: maximum length, 468 feet; breadth of en
trance at MHWS, 6014 feet; depth over sill at MHWS,
22 1/2 feet. The drydocks have cranes with capacities up
to 25 tons.
Supplies . - Coal is readily procured , and vessels are
coaledalongside the coal chutes. Water is led down to the
quay, and can be supplied readily; marine stores of all
kinds are abundant.
Hospitals. — There are three hospitals.
5–42 The coast ( H. 0. Chart 4470 ).– From
Blyth to Seaton Sluice, nearly 2 miles southward
of it, the coast is low and sandy and numerous
colliery chimneys show within it.
One mile northward of Seaton Sluice is a high
sand hill called Mile Hill. A short distance within
the sluice is the wood of Seaton Delaval, with its
hall showing above it.
To the southward of Seaton Sluice is a rocky
cliff of varying height. The village of Seaton
Sluice may be easily recognized. Seaton Burn
passes through the village, a short distance below
which it makes an abrupt turn to the northward
and empties into the sea through a cut 600 feet
long, 40 feet deep , and 30 feet wide. This harbor
was closed in 1887 .
 SHIELDS
about 200 yards long with an alongside depth of 30
feet.
The bunkering jetty at the Lawe , South Shields,
can accommodate vessels up to 530 feet in length
with drafts up to 2812 feet .
Northumberland Dock is at Hay Hole, on the northern
side ofthe river, and contains 8 coaling staiths. This dock
is used for general import and export traffic, for which
there are four 3 -ton steam cranes and 3 large warehouses.
The dock has an area of 50 acres with a depth of 27 feet.
It is entered by a lock 52 feet wide and with a depth of
23 1/2 feet.
Repairs of all kinds can be made . A 150 - ton float
ing crane is available for handling heavy lifts .
Drydock . The approximate dimensions of the larg
est drydock are : Maximum length , 715 feet; breadth
of entrance at MHWS, 105 feet , depth over sill at
MHWS , 29 feet .
Supplies. — Coal, loaded from lighters, can be obtained
with 24 to 48 hours' notice at North Shields; about 2,000
tons are usually in stock at North Shields, and a large
quantity at South Shields.
About 1,000 tons of fuel oil are usually in stock at North
Shields, and from 8,000 to 16,000 tons at South
Shields. A self propelled 650-ton fuel oil barge is
available for bunkering vessels throughout the port .
Fresh provisions of all kinds can be obtained.
Water suitable for drinking or use in small tube boilers is
laid onto the quays and can also be supplied by water
boats .
Communication . — There is frequent communication by
steamship with all parts of the world. In 1929, 10,631
vessels with an average net tonnage of 1,135 cleared the
port . It is connected by rail with the general system .
Regular scheduled air service is maintained .
Hospitals. The sanitary conditions of the port are excel
lent. There are a numberof hospitals at South Shields.
6-21 RIVER ABOVE SHIELDS HARBOR
(H.O. Chart 4698 ).- Long Reach extends
westward for about 24 miles from Hay Hole
Point.
Bill Reach runs southward for 1 1/2 miles from
the western end of Long Reach to Bill Point.
St. Anthony's Reach , on rounding Bill Point,
opens out in a westerly direction for 1/2 mile.
Felling Reach extends 1,400 yards in a west
northwesterly direction from St. Anthony's Reach .
St. Peter's Reach extends 1,600 yards westward
and northwestward from the western end of Fell
ing Reach .
Swinging area . - There is an area 500 feet in
diameter, situated in St. Peter's Reach, in which
vessels of suitable size may swing.
6–22 Beacons — Lights .-- Two pairs of bea
cons, painted black with white bands, stand on
the southern side of St. Peter's Reach . The
center of the swinging area is at the point
of intersection of the range lines of these
beacons. At night the beacons are lighted .
Lights . - Two lights, vertically disposed,
are shown on the river side of the containing
93
( Chg7)
wall of Northumberland Dock from the east
ern and western extremities of a tanker
cleaning berth and from the eastern and
western ends of How don Staith . Similar
lights are shown from the ends of Jarrow Oil
Jetty .
Two vertically disposed red lights are
shown from the western extremity of the Vickers
Armstrong Naval Yard Jetty about 1/2 mile east
northeastward of St. Anthony's Point Light.
A group flashing red light is located on the
southern side of St. Anthony's Reach about
14 mile 092° from St. Anthony's Point Light.
A light is exhibited from a beacon located close
to St. Anthony's Point.
A flashing red light is located on the southern
side of Felling Reach about 2/5 mile 292º from
St. Anthony's Point Light.
A flashing white light is shown at St. Peter's
about 1/2 mile northwestward of St. Anthony's
Point Light.
Two vertically disposed red lights are shown
from the eastern extremity of St. Lawrence
Sanatorium Quay about 1 mile west -northwest
ward of St. Anthony's Point Light.
6–23 Newcastle Reach extends about 1,300
yards in a west-southwesterly direction to New
castle Bridge.
Bridges. — There are no bridges between the en
trance to the river and Newcastle.
The Tyne Bridge, which connects Newcastle
and Gateshead , has a single span. The distance
between quays is 374 feet and the clear headway
84 feet.
The swing bridge connecting Newcastle with
Gateshead has 4 spans, each about 101 1/2 feet
wide at the level of high water. It is so con
structed that the 2 central spans are swung around
on the central pier and allow masted vessels to
pass through.
North Eastern Railway Bridge, a high -level
bridge with 2 roadways, the upper carrying the
North Eastern Railway across the river, and the
lower for ordinary traffic, is a short distance west
ward of the swing bridge; the underpart of the
lower roadway is about 82 feet above the level of
high water.
King Edward Bridge, a high -level bridge, has
83 feet headway, and is 600 yards upstream from
H.O. 35
94 RIVER TYNE
the railway bridge. Vessels bound up river must
use the northern channel, and if proceeding down
the river, the southern channel under this bridge.
Redheugh Bridge, a high-level road bridge,
crosses the Tyne about 300 yards farther west
ward ; it has 4 river spans, the 2 mid -spans each
measuring 208 feet, and there is a clear height of
85 1/2 feet from the high -water springs level to
the underpart of the roadway.
6-24 Newcastle Bridge lights . - Red and green
lights are exhibited from the staging of the swing
bridge; the green light is changed to red when it
is dangerous to approach .
Two fixed white lights are exhibited, one on
either side, from the top of the center pier of
King Edward Bridge. Lights also mark the piling
erected to the south of the south channel in the
vicinity of the swing bridge and high-level bridge.
6-25 TOWNS. - The following towns stand along the
Tyne River between Shields and Newcastle. They all have
riverside quays and facilities for ship repairing. For port
facilities see Newcastle .
6-26 Jarrow . - The town of Jarrow is on the southern
side of the river, about 3 miles from its mouth and 7 miles
from Newcastle; its industries are shipbuilding , docking,
and repairing; there are also some paper mills. The supply
of coal is unlimited. The population in 1951 numbered
28,541.
6-27 Wallsend is on the northern bank of the river mid
way between Newcastle and Tynemouth. There are many
factories and workshops; also shipbuilding yards, the
Marine Steam Turbine Co.'s works, cement, alkali, and
aluminum works , and a colliery. In 1951 , the popu
lation numbered 48,645 .
6-28 Hebburn lies on the southern bank of the river,
which here is 260 yards wide. There is a frequent ferry
service. In 1951 , the population numbered 23,163.
6–29 NEWCASTLE UPON TYNE (54 °58' N. , 1 ° 35 '
W.) stands upon the sides and summits of the acclivities on
the northern bank of the river 9 miles by river above
Shields. The city presents a scene of great commercial
activity ; its manufactures (the most important of which
are shipbuilding, coal, and iron ) are very extensive; its
public buildings are numerous, among which its Norman
Keep, the tower of St. NicholasChurch , crownedby turrets
and buttresses, and the spire of All Saints' Church , are
very prominent. In 1951, the population was 291,723.
The United States is represented by a consul, a vice
consul, and a deputy consul.
Quayage. The Corporation Quay, at Newcastle , ex
tends for well over 114 miles eastward of the swing
bridge , with a total of 28 berths with depths up to 30
feet at low water. It is connected with the North East
ern Railway main line . Ample warehouse accommoda
tion is provided , as well as every modern appliance
for the rapid discharge and loading of vessels . The
largest crane is capable of lifting 65 tons.
H. 0. 35
Repairs of every description can be readily executed.
Drydock .-- The approximate dimensions of the largest
drydock (Hebburn ) are: Maximum length , 714 feet;
breadth of entrance at MHWS, 90 feet; depth over sill at
MHWS, 29 feet.
Supplies of fresh provisions, deck and engineering stores
are plentiful. A large stock of coal is maintained and can
be obtained on short notice . Fuel oil can be obtained at
Jarrow , South Shields, and at Elswick . It can also be sup
plied by oil barges. Diesel oil is also available. Water can
be obtained from water boats or from pipes laid onto the
piers.
Communication.-There is communication by railway ,
telephone, and telegraph with all parts of Great Britain.
There is frequent communication by steamships with all
parts of the world.
Hospitals. — The sanitary condition of the port is excel
lent. There are several well-equipped hospitals that will
receive seamen .
6-30 GATESHEAD (54 °58' N. , 1° 35' W. ) is a parlia
mentary , municipal, and county borough, situated in
North Durham on a steep declivity on the southern bank
of the river, opposite Newcastle. The quarries in the
neighborhood produce excellent grindstones. The output
of coal is considerable, there being a large number of col
lieries in the vicinity. There are extensive engineering,
chemical, iron , founding, glass, cement, and rope works.
In 1951 the population was 115,017 .
Gateshead is on the main line from King's Cross to
Edinburgh . There are also local lines and tramways.
Quayage.- The quay is eastward of the swing bridge,
the total length available for vessels being about 720 feet,
and a depth in berthage of 18 feet. There are 3 steam cranes
of 21/2-, 312-, and 4-tons lifting capacity .
6-31 TOWNS.-Felling, a town on the southern side
of the river, 1 1/2 miles eastward of Gateshead , had a
population of 25,286 in 1951 .
6-32 Dunston , on the southern side of the river, is
about 800 yards above Redheugh Bridge. The Dunston
Engine Works are situated here, and opposite them on the
northern side are the Elswick Works.
6–33 Blaydon is on the southern side of the river, about
4 miles above Newcastle Swing Bridge ; it is an important
manufacturing center. It had a population of 30,971
in 1951 .
6–34 Scotswood is on the opposite side.
6-35 Lemingtonis a village on the northern bank of
theriver adjoining Scotswood ; its principal industries are
coal mining, brickmaking, and glassmaking.
6-36 Newburn , 6 miles above Newcastle Swing Bridge,
is the westernmost of the industrial centers, and has some
important steel manufactories. It had a population of
21,940 in 1951 .
6–37 Depth . — The channel between Derwen
thaugh and Spencer's Steel Works at Newburn is
dredged from time to time to a depth of 27 feet at
high -water springs, but the depths are subject to
change. There are 2 bridges at Scotswood and 1
at Newburn , and the passage is only available for
craft without rigid masts or funnels.
 SUNDERLAND
Hudson Dock North is within the beaching ground at
the inner end of the South Pier, and from its having been
formed out of the low rocky foreshore, which was covered
at high water, to the southward ofthe harbor, is considered
an engineering work of considerable merit; an extension of
this dock is known as Hudson Dock South . The Tidal
Basin (enteredfrom the river ) is 2 3/4 acres in extent with
720 feet ofquays, and is connected to the Half Tide Basin
within by Nos . 1 and 2 entrances.
The North and South Hudson Docks have a total area
of 41 acres with 7,600 feet of quays and a depth of from 28
to 30 feet. The gateway fromHalf Tide Basin to Hud-
son Dock North has width
a between fenders
of 63 feet
and a depth of 2942 feet on the sill at MHWS .
The masting shears at Hudson Dock South are equal to
lifting 60 tons through 70 feet. There are also steam ,
hydraulic, and electric cranes for loading and discharging
cargoes.
Rails are laid round the docks which are in connection
with the general railways.
Hendon Dock is to southward of Hudson Docks, with
which it is connected by a waterway 205 feet long and
891% feet wide ,
This dock has 2,800 feet of quayage with a depth
of 31 feet alongside but is subject to silting ,
North Dock is at the inner end of the North Pier. It has
an area of 642 acres and depths of 342 to 64 feet._The
locks are out of repair and the dock is tidal. There
is also a small tidal basin of 142 acres , called North
Basin , at the entrance to North Dock .
Work was in progress on the construction of an 850
foot quay to extend diagonally across North Dock and
upon completion in 1960 will be able to accommodate
vessels up to 65,000 tons . The old locks have been
closed and a new 200 - foot wide entrance will be uti
lized . The quay berth and the access channel will be
dredged to a depth of 23 feet.
Deep -Water Quay, on the southern side of the river, just
to the southward of the entrance to South Dock , has a
length of 1,062 feet and a depth alongside of 304/2 feet. A
coal- shipping appliance is provided on the quay ca
pable of delivering coal at the rate of 750 tons per
hour . Five-ton quay cranes are provided .
Repairs of all kinds can be readily executed . The port is
one of the great shipbuilding centers of the world, and re
pair facilities are unlimited . Cranes capable of lifting 50 to
100 tons are maintained .
Drydock . - The approximate dimensions of the largest
arydock are ; maximum length 675 feet; breadth
of entrance 87 feet 6 inches ; depth over sill at
MHWS, 27 feet 4 inches . This drydock was open
ed in October 1952 , and can accomodate vessels
of up to 35,000 tons deadweight. Tugs are available .
Supplies of freshand dry provisions, deck and engineering
stores are plentiful.
Coal is supplied alongside coaling docks or from lighters.
The supply is unlimited, the port being in the heart of the
Durnam coal field . Coal can be delivered at a rate of
750 tons per hour at Sunderland Corporation Quay.
Fuel and diesel oils are obtainable at the same dock
or can be supplied by barge at any berth in the harbor.
Water , of excellent quality, is obtainable from pipe
lines laid onto the quays or from water boats. The
rate of delivery is about 100 tons per hour.
Communication . — The port is connected by rail with the
general system . There is frequent communication by Maiden Paps , 362 feet high , and Warden Law ,
steamship with all ports of the world .
The sanitary
Sanitary conditions.There conditions of the 637 feet high, a conical hill with a clump of wood
port are excellent. are several large and well
equipped hospitals. and colliery chimney near its crest, are prominent
99
( Chg 7)
7-22 River Wear, of which Sunderland Harbor
is the outlet, is a narrow and rapid stream , 65
miles long, and confined for the greater part of its
course between high banks of limestone rock.
Draining as it does a considerable surface of hilly
country, the river is liable to freshets.
The river is narrow and winding for 1 1/4 miles,
but near Pallion (name not given on chart) its
width increases considerably ; at Hylton , 11/2
miles farther, or 5 miles from the sea, the river
again becomes narrow , and so continues for the
remainder of its tidal course.
On the banks of the river are extensive ship
building yards, glass works, paper mills, and large
marine -engine works, which have 80- to 120 -ton
cranes for putting engines in a completed state
into vessels.
7–23 Bridges. - One mile from the entrance
pierheads the Wear is crossed by the new Wear
mouth Bridge, which was completed in 1929. The
span of the bridge is 375 feet wide and is higher
than the railway bridge close westward of it.
The railway bridge, about 25 yards westward of
the new Wearmouth Bridge, has a height of 82%
feet above high -water ordinary spring tides.
Queen Alexandra Bridge is situated about 1 1/4
miles westward of the railway bridge and has a
greater headroom .
7–24 THE COAST ( H. 0. Chart 4470 ), to the
southward of Sunderland, consists of grassy bank
with a rocky base , intersected at Ryhope
and Seaham by deep ravines, or " denes," as they
are locally termed ; the whole extent is fronted by
ledges and shoal water projecting 800 yards in
places.
Salterfen Rocks, 1 1/2 miles southward of South
Outlet, extend 600 yards from a point about 40
At Ryhope
feet high. At
Ryhope Dene, 1.2 miles from
Salterfen Rocks, the coast line changes to sand,
which continues to Featherstone Rocks at Seaham .
Pincushion or Black Rocks are 1 mile south
ward of Salterfen Rocks; abreast them is a point
80 feet high .
Tunstall Law, with a double summit called the
H.O. 35
100 RIVER TYNE TO RIVER HUMBER
in the background, while Old Seaham Church and
Rectory, surrounded by trees, are distinct objects
on the northern side of Seaham Dene.
A chimney, 200 feet in height, stands close to
the cliff edge just southward of Seaham Dene and
is conspicuous.
A wreck , dangerous to navigation , lies with 6
fathoms over it in the approach to Seaham nearly
4 miles eastward of Seaham South Pier Light.
7–25 SEAHAM HARBOR (54 °50' N., 1 °19' W.,
Plan A on H. 0. Chart 4700) has substantial
piers and docks connected with the interior by
railroads. The coast northward and southward of
the harbor, from Seaham Dene on the northward
to Dawdon Dene on the southward, consists of
limestone cliffs, 50 or 60 feet high, and broken by
denes, the principal of which appears to be Dawdon
Dene, off the entrance to which is Featherstone
Rock, 27 feet high ; rocky ledges, detached rocks,
and shoal water extend from 600 to 800 yards from
the coast .
The most conspicuous objects in the vicinity of
Seaham Harbor are the Glass and Bottle Works,
situated on the elevated land close over the south
ern portion of the docks, which have a chimney
170 feet in height. To the southward , abreast
Nose Point, is a colliery with a conspicuous
chimney 160 feet high , and 2 shafts are also con
spicuous.
7–26 Seaham Old Harbor. - The old harbor
of Seaham is enclosed by 2 breakwaters, forming
an additional outer harbor of about 4 acres in
extent.
The northern breakwater, about 2,400 feet in
length , may be said to commence at the London
derry Offices, and to extend in a curve for a dis
tance of about 800 yards, with a depth of about
10 feet at low water at its end.
The southern breakwater extends from near
the Glass and Bottle Works for a distance of
nearly 700 yards, with a slight curve, leaving an
entrance 280 feet between it and the North Pier
end . Within these breakwaters is the old harbor,
known now as the tidal basin , formed by the Old
H.O. 35
North and South Piers, with a depth of about 3
feet at low water; southward of the Old North
Pier is a wave screen , built as a protection to the
entrance to the docks, which lie within. It con
sists of concrete to half-tide level, above which
it is open woodwork.
A short groyne, covered at high water, marked
by a perch at its eastern end, extends eastward
of the extremity of the Old North Pier, to prevent
the rubble from being washed from the outside
of the pier into the channel to the docks. The
channel is kept clear by occasional sluicings from
the docks.
The Old Harbor consists of a tidal basin and
two wet docks. The tidal basin is on the eastern
side of North Dock, and mostly dries, but a chan
nel through it is kept clear of accumulation by oc
casional sluicings from the wet docks.
7-27 Entrance depths. — The depths over the 1
flat at the entrance are about 10 feet at mean low 1
water springs, deepening to 14 feet between the
piers ; a patch of 8 feet lies in the entrance ; the
depths are subject to change after gales. There is
a dredged channel to the docks, with a low -water
depth of 10 feet.
East-southeasterly gales cause the heaviest sea
in the entrance.
7–28 Seaham lights. - A light is exhibited
from an iron column, 33 feet high, with a black
and white band, on the outer end of the North
Pier.
A light is exhibited from an iron column, 24
feet high, on the end of the South Pier.
A light is shown from a green column 12 feet
high on the end of the wave screen.
A light is exhibited on the end of North Break
water and a fog signal is sounded .
A light is exhibited on the end of South Break
water .
These lights are all unwatched .
7-29 Dangers.-- Louis, & rocky patch, 1,100
yards eastward of the North Breakwater Light,
is 200 yards across and has a least depth of 30
feet , with 6 to 7 fathoms around the patch.
North Scar, with a least depth of 5 feet, lies on
 HARTLEPOOL APPROACH
are off the southeastern part of The Heugh , 100
yards eastward of the above breakwater.
Long Scar, upon the southern side of Hartlepool
Bay, and forming its defense on that side, is an
extensive ledge of rock projecting about 1,600
yards at right angles from the coast abreast Carr
House.
A black conical bell buoy equipped with a
radar reflector is moored in 25 feet of water
about 12 mile eastward of Long Scar.
Wrecks.–For a description of the danger
ous wrecks in Tees and Hartlepool Bays
see section 7-39 .
A shoal with a least depth just over 2 fathoms
lies about 1 1/2 miles, and a rock with less than
2 fathoms 1 mile, south -southeastward from
Heugh Lighthouse.
Harbor con
7-44 Docks . — Commissioners Harbor
sists of the Old Harbor and Victoria Dock. In
1838 Victoria Dock of 17 acres was excavated out
of a tract of waste ground between the tide harbor
and the town. In 1911 it was converted into a basin
with an entrance 200 feet wide. Fishing boats are
berthed at New Fish Quay at its eastern end.
Strong winds from northeastward and south-
westward produce a slight range in the harbor.
The entrance is between Old Pier on the east
ward and a stone jetty on the westward, their
heads being 200 yards apart.
West Hartlepool Harbor is situated upon the
low shore between Hartlepool and the village of
Seaton . At a spot offering little natural facility,
a tidal harbor and a series of wet docks have been
excavated, with drydocks, coal staiths, ware
houses, building yards, and timber ponds, and all
the appliances of a first-class port. On the beach
in front of West Hartlepool are remains of a sub
merged forest. The harbor is formed by North,
South, and Middle Piers, and leads up to the
docks.
West Hartlepool Docks are now entered through
Old Harbor and North Basin . West Hartlepool
entrance is silted up.
7–45 Depths. — The least depth over the flats
or bar in the approach to Old Harbor is 16 feet on
103
( Chg 7)
the range line, deeper within from abreast the
Middle Ground Buoy. The Old Harbor is dredged
to a depth of 24 feet (1955) , the Victoria
Basin was also dredged to a depth of 21 feet
at that time . Fish Quay is located at the
eastern part of this basin and a deep-water
berth located in the northwestern end of Old
Harbor was dredged to 29 feet in 1955 .
7-46 Old Harbor Range Lights . — The front
light is exhibited from a tower on the pier
head, and the rear light from a pole near the dock
master's office. These lights in range, bearing
329°, lead to the entrance. Care, however, must
be taken not to mistake them for the harbor
works lights.
Buoyage . — Middle Ground No. 2 Buoy, a can
buoy painted in red and white checkers, marks the
western side of the approach to Old Harbor. It is
moored in about 15 feet of water at the junction of
the entrance to both harbors in a position about
955 yards 189º from St. Hilda Church Tower.
Buoys Nos. 4 and 6, cans painted in red and
white checkers marking the western side of the
channel, are located about 650 yards, 201° and
480 yards 223 °, respectively, from the above tower.
Buoys Nos. 1 , 3, and 5, black conical buoys
marking the eastern side of the entrance channel ,
are located 875 yards 168°, 485 yards 190°, and
320 yards 247 °, respectively, from the same church
tower. Buoy No. 1 is a lighted buoy showing a
flashing white light and is known as Bar
Light buoy.
A beacon with a red can -shaped top mark is lo
cated on Middleton Strand at the outer end of a
pipe line about 600 yards westward of Old Pier
Light .
7–47 Signals. — Two amber lights indicate a
vessel may enter or leave the port.
A single amber light indicates a vessel may enter
or leave the port provided the assistance of a tug
is not required.
When no light is exhibited vessels may not ap
proach or leave the port.
H. 0. 35
104 RIVER TYNE TO RIVER HUMBER
7–48 Bylaws are in force at Hartlepool and
West Hartlepool docks.
No person shall take any vessel into or out of
the docks, or attempt to do so, unless he be the
master of such vessel or unless he has a pilot on
board .
The master of any vessel about to enter or leave
the docks shall observe the signals governing the
entry and exit of vessels into and out of the docks,
which at Hartlepool are fixed at the dock head on
the eastern side of the entrance to the company
harbor, northward of the ferry landing, and at
West Hartlepool at the dock head on the island
separating the two entrances.
Petroleum and explosives.-- Bylaws with re-
spect to petroleum and carbide of calcium and
with respect to explosives are in force for all parts
of the docks at Hartlepool and West Hartlepool
within the jurisdiction of the railroad company.
7-49 Coast guard. There is a coast guard
station near the lighthouse on The Heugh.
Lifeboat - Rocket stations. - There is a motor
lifeboat and a rocket apparatus at Hartlepool ; and
a rocket apparatus at Stranton, West Hartlepool.
Storm signals are shown from the lighthouse on
Old Pier.
7–50 Anchorage .-- Between The Stones and
Long Scar, Hartlepool Bay is clear. The best
anchorage is in about 17 feet, muddy sand over
clay, with All Saints' Church, Stranton , bearing
252 °, and St. Hilda Church, Hartlepool, 342º.
By night, anchor with Commissioners Harbor
front range light bearing 322°, just open to the
westward of Old Pier Light in the same depth.
7-51 Tides. It is high water, full and change,
at Hartlepool, at 3h. 28m.; springs rise 16 feet,
neaps 12 3/4 feet, and neaps range 8 feet. The
tidal current outside runs to the southward three
hours after high water.
7–52 Pilots for Hartlepool may always be ob
tained in moderate weather, and tugs are in at-
tendance when the tide serves for entering.
In thick weather vessels requiring a pilot should
sound number 6 of the Morse code.
7-53 Directions. - From the northward give
The Heugh a berth of 1,000 yards and pass 200
yards outside The Stones and the head of the
breakwater.
H. O. 35
Approaching from the southward, steer with
Heugh Lighthouse bearing not more than 330°,
passing outside by the bell buoy marking Long
Scar, which will be abreast when the southern
230 -foot Seaton Carew Iron Works chimney is in
range with Carr House, bearing 242°, when the
course may be altered for the entrance channel.
The tidal currents both on the flood and ebb set
directly across the approach .
No vessel should attempt to enter without a
pilot. Steer with the light tower on the pier
head in range with the lantern pole near the dock
master's office, bearing 329°, and steer on this
line, between the black conical buoys on the east
and the red and white checkered can buoys on the
west, into the old harbor, in which there are buoys
for mooring head and stern .
7-54 HARTLEPOOL (Plan B on H.O. Chart 4700) .
The exports consist principally of coal, coke, fuel, ma
chinery , ships, boats, etc.
The population of Hartlepool was 20,545 in 1931 and of
West Hartlepool 68,134.
Wet docks. Jackson , Union , and Coal Docks, which
are all connected with one another , have a total area
of 371, acres and are entered through Old Harbor and
North Basin . West Hartlepool entrance is silted up
and the gates are closed to navigation . The depth in
all 3 docks is 24 feet and the total quayage, 9,132
feet .
Swainson Dock consists of 834 acres with a depth of
2014 feet . It is entered from Jackson Dock by a pas
sage 48 feet wide with a depth of 2112 feet. There is
2,127 feet of quayage .
Central Dock , of 15 acres,with a depth of 2634 feet
is entered from Union Dock , or by the way of the
North Basin from Hartlepool Old Harbor . The passage
from Union Dock is 70 feet wide , with a depth of 2614
feet . The passage from North Basin is 70 feet wide ,
with a depth of 27 feet . The North Basin is 540 feet
long and 240 feet wide , the entrance being 70 feet
wide with a depth of 26 2/3 feet on the sill at mean
high water springs . Central Dock has 2,490 feet of
quayage .
There are timber ponds 57 acres in extent on the
western side of these docks .
The tidal berths in Old Harbor and Victoria Basin
consist of fishing and coal quays and a deep -water
berth for ore discharge . The latter berth is 550 feet
long with a depth alongside of 29 feet. The coal quays
and general cargo berths have a total berthing length
of 3,900 feet with depths of 20 to 23 feet alongside .
There are several pairs of shears at the port, constructed
to lift the heaviest class of machinery, besides numerous
cranes, including one 100-ton and one 90 -ton shears and
two 100- ton and two 60 -ton cranes .
Repairs to ships and their engines are readily executed.
Drydock. --The approximate dimensions of the largest
drydock are : maximum length, 570 feet; breadth of en
trance atMHWS, 591/2 feet; depthover sill atMHWS,
20 feet .
Supplies. Supplies of every description are plentiful.
Water is laid down round the docks.
 THE TEES
Vessels can be coaled with facility in the old harbor, as
well as in the docks. Coal is not stocked, but shipped
direct from the collieries.
Hospitals. - There are one municipal and two private
hospitals, including both Hartlepools.
7-55 The coast from Carr House extends 2 1/2
miles to the southward , to the entrance of the
River Tees; it is composed of low sand hills, with
a hard coast line fronted by Seaton and North
Gare Sands , which dry 4 feet. About 14 mile
southward of Carr House is Little Scar, a
rocky ledge , extending 300 yards from the
coast.
Seaton Carew, a bathing village standing
upon the coast, is nearly 1 mile to the south-
ward of Carr House . The pinnacles of its
church tower (the chief object) just show
over the houses.
Seaton Snook consists of a few detached
hummocks . Seaton Snook Point is 34 mile
southward of it.
7–56 THE TEES (54 °39' N., 1°08' W., H.O.
Chart 4474 ).— This estuary extends to Middles
brough about 5 1/2 miles from the entrance ; it
is about 2 1/2 miles wide between the embank
ments. This space is, for the most part, occupied
by sand banks that are uncovered at half ebb of a
spring tide, and between these the river in its
progress is confined by means of training walls,
and marked by buoys, light buoys, lights, and
beacons, so as to form a channel with an average
width of about 300 yards between the training
walls. The training walls are raised to about 7
feet above low water level.
There is a dredged channel from the sea to
Middlesbrough. In 1949, it was about 500 feet
wide at the entrance and 400 feet wide at the town.
The least depth in the track over the bar is about
24 feet and a least depth of 14 feet in the
channel about 1 mile below Middlesbrough.
In 1960 , vessels up to about 600 feet in
length with a beam of 74 feet and a maximum
draft of 30 feet at MHWOS could safely navi-
gate the Tees to Middlesbrough Dock.
7–57 Breakwaters. - North Gare Breakwater,
constructed of slag and concrete on North Gare
Sand, on the western side of the entrance, extends
from Seaton Snook about 12 mile in an east-
erly direction.
105
( Chg 7)
South Gare Breakwater . — This is built of slag,
rubble, and concrete on Bran Sand on the eastern
side of the river entrance; it extends northwest
ward from Tod Point 1 1/2 miles, curving toward
the north . Redcar Wharf extends from its root
nearly 1 mile westward to the channel.
7-58 South Gare Breakwater Light (54 °
39° N. , 1 ° 08 ' : W .) is shown on the head of
the breakwater. A fog signal is sounded at
the light and a signal station is maintained
here . A radiobeacon transmits about 200 feet
southward of the light.
7-59 Training walls. The seaward end
of the training wall on the eastern side of
the channel is about 34 mile south - southwest
ward of South Gare Breakwater Light. A
ledge of sunken rocks extends nearly 4 mile
northeastward from this extremity. The train
ing wall extends about 294 miles up the river
as far as Teesport.
The training wall on the western side of
the channel is not continuous . Seaton Chan
nel , 14 mile wide, enters the river about 144
miles southwestward of South Gare Break
water Light . The seaward end of the outer
portion is about 34 mile southwestward of
South Gare Breakwater Light. This portion,
about 12 mile long, has sunk from its original
height and is almost entirely covered by
sand . The inner portion extends about 314
miles from Seaton Channel to Port Clarence .
7-60 Dangers . - Triton Spit is the extension,
within the 3 - fathom curve of North Gare Sands.
It extends about 9 mile northeastward of the
seaward end of North Gare Breakwater.
Middle Ground is the slight shoaling about
42 mile north -northeastward of South Gare
Lighthouse. Middle Ground has a general
depth of 4 to 4% fathoms. A shoal patch of
2 % fathoms lies close eastward of the en
trance range about a mile north- northeast
ward of South Gare Breakwater Light.
A patch of foul ground, over which there is a
depth of 6 1/2 fathoms, lies 2 2/3 miles north
eastward of South Gare Breakwater Light.
Two other patches of foul ground lie respec
tively 14 and 1% miles southward of the
above patch.
H.O. 35
106 RIVER TYNE TO RIVER HUMBER
Wrecks.-- A stranded wreck lies nearly 34
mile southeastward of South Gare Breakwater
Light.
An area of foul ground lies about 1/4 miles
east- southeastward of South Gare Breakwater
Light.
7–61 Buoyage.- Tees Fairway Light Buoy,
equipped with a radar reflector, is moored
about 34 mile north -northeastward of South
Gare Breakwater Light.
The channel is marked in accordance with
the uniform system of buoyage (sec . 1-11 ).
7–62 Range.--- The entrance range is
formed by a pair of lights in range 210°
shown from towers on the western side of
the channel about 14 miles southwestward
of South Gare Breakwater Light. A fog signal
is sounded from the front range tower .
H.O. 35
7-63 This section has been deleted.
7–64 Beacons.- In addition to the lights ,
the training walls are marked by beacons .
Those on the western side are painted black
with a black topmark , point down; those on
the eastern side are painted red with a red
can topmark .
Storm signals are shown at Middlesbrough .
7–65 Regulations. - Speed regulations are
are in effect in the channel from a position
abreast the Seaton Channel entrance as far
as Stockton; limits of the speed vary from
8 statute miles per hour in the outer part of
the dredged channel to 5 statute miles per
hour in the channel between Middlesbrough
and Stockton .
 MIDDLESBROUGH
Berths .-- Middlesbrough Dock , a wet basin , is ap-
proached from the main channel of the Tees by a cut
400 yards long . The basin has 6,842 feet of quayage .
Depths alongside the several quays vary from 22 to
31 feet. It is entered by a lock 80 feet wide with a
depth of 32 feet 342 inches on the sill at M.H.W.S.
Deepwat er mooring buoy berths are available with
depths 39 to 47 feet at M.H.W.S.
Commissioners No. 1 Teesport Oil Berth has a
dredged depth of 37 feet at M.L.W.S. and can accom-
modate tankers up to 650 feet in length .
Deepwater Wharf has 365 feet of berthing space and
a depth of 15 feet alongside at M.L.W.S. Lyne Lees
Wharf has 1,000 feet of berthing space and a depth of
13 feet alongside at M.L.W.S. Dents Wharf has 1,000
feet of berthing space and a depth of 13 feet along-
side at M.L.W.S.
Work was in progress in 1960 on the construction of
a 3,215 - foot quay at Lacken by located close eastward
of Middlesbrough . Five deep-water berths with a depth
of 32 feet alongside will be provided .
Repairs to hull and machinery can be executed . A
60 -ton floating crane is available. One 120- ton crane,
& 80 -ton sheerlegs, and numerous cranes with cap-
acities from 3 to 35 tons are available.
There are powerful tugs in the port and numerous
lighters with capacities ranging from 40 to 220 tons .
Drydock .--- The approximate dimensions of the largest
drydock are: maximum length, 575 feet; breadth of en
trance at MHWS, 73 feet; depth over sill at MHWS, 26
feet .
Supplies. - All kinds of supplies are available. Fresh
water of excellent quality is obtainable at the wharves or
from water boats .
Coal is available in unlimited quantities. Modern
equipment is provided for rapid loading of coal.
Fuel oil is available. It can be delivered by pipe lines
from the dock or by tank steamer at berths in the river.
Diesel oil is available.
Communication . — There is communication by rail with
the general system .
Hospitals. There are three well -equipped hospitals at
Middlesbrough .
7-72 PORT CLARENCE , a shipping place for the coal
brought down by the Clarence Railway before the traffic
was diverted to the more convenient harbor of West
Hartlepool, and where are several blast furnaces, bridge
building works, saltand cement works, is nearly opposite
to Middlesbrough . Railroads connect Stocktonwith Port
Clarence and Hartlepool.
Coal. - Large supplies, but 24 hours' notice is necessary
when any quantity of coal is required. A small quantity
of fuel oil is also stocked .
7-73 Tees River is the boundary between the
counties of Durham and Yorkshire, and above
Stockton is narrow and winding to its source,
about 80 miles distant.
Depth . - From Middlesbrough to Stockton the
depth in the channel is 9 feet. Steamers drawing
21 feet 6 inches use it at high water spring
tides .
Several electric -power cables are laid in the bed
of the river at Haverton Hill, about 1 1/2 miles
above Middlesbrough Dock, which must be
avoided .
109
( Chg7)
7-74 Bridges. - Transporter Bridge with a 160
foot headway is located at Middlesbrough. Tees
(Newport) Bridge, with a 120 -foot headway at
high water when the main span is raised , and
21 feet when it is down , is located above
Middlesbrough .
Lights. — Two lights are shown from the landing
stages of the transporter bridge, on either side of
the river.
Two lights, 3 feet apart in a vertical line, are
shown from a beacon at Haverton Hill .
A light is shown at the ferry landing.
7-75 STOCKTON , upon the northern bank of the
Tees, about 12 miles from its outletto Stockton Bridge, is
a place of considerable antiquity. The population in 1949
was 73,420 . The river is 200 feet wide at Stockton . Its
trade has been principally with Holland, Hamburg, the
Baltic, and British North America.
Wharves . - The principal wharf is the Stockton Cor
poration Wharf which is about 970 feet long with
depths of 141/2 to 16 feet alongside.
Communications. There is railway communication with
the general system .
Hospitals. There are several well-equipped hospitals.
7-76 THE COAST ( H. 0. Chart 4471). —
From the mouth of the Tees to the villages of
Warrenby, Coatham and Redcar, which closely
adjoin each other, the coast is low and sandy. Be
hind are Barnaby and Burleigh Moors, with
arable slopes and wooded summits interspersed
with patches of a brown color marking the ex
tensive quarries of ironstone. Eston Nab Tower,
about 4 miles inland, is a prominent object.
7-77 Redcar (54 °37' N. , 1 ° 04 ' W .).— The
tower of Redcar Church shows a little above the
houses. There is a railroad and telegraph station.
Lifeboat. - There is a motor lifeboat at Redcar.
7-78 Salt Scars . — The Red Cars, or Salt Scars
as they are commonly termed , are 2 remarkable
rocky ledges parallel to each other abreast Coatham
and Redcar, extending from the coast 1 mile in a
northeasterly direction. They dry 4 to 5 feet.
Salt Scar Lighted Bell and Whistle Buoy ,
painted in black and white vertical stripes
and showing a group flashing white light, is
moored about 6 miles east- southeastward of
South Gare Light.
Redcar light and bell buoy, a conical buoy
painted black and showing a flashing white light,
is moored about 2 3/4 miles eastward of South
Gare Light.
H.O. 35
110 RIVER TYNE TO RIVER HUMBER
Redcar range lights . - Two range lights are ex-
hibited from lamp posts in the town of Redcar to
lead through the Luff Way through the Scars.
Another pair of lights are located about 14
mile northwestward of Redcar Church . These
lights in range 247 ° lead southward of High
Stone, a ledge of rocks lying about 1/3 mile
northeastward of the coast of Redcar .
7-79 The coast from Redcar to Marske is
sandy ; very little of Marske Village is seen from
the sea, but St. Germains Church, upon the bank
top close to the coast, and St. Marks Church
Tower, standing about 1,000 yards back from the
coast, are very plain objects. Capt. Cook Monu
ment, on Easby Moor, 1,057 feet high, is 71/2
miles inland.
From Marske the coast gradually increases in
height to Saltburn .
High Shoal. — The bottom is rocky and foul
from Salt Scars to abreast Marske, and one patch,
named The High, with 2 1/2 fathoms over it,
lies 1 1/2 miles northward of St. Germains Church .
7-80 Saltburn by the Sea (54 ° 35' N., 0 ° 58'
W.) was built near the village of Saltburn for the
accommodation of seaside visitors; it stands upon
a bank on the western side of a steep ravine and
has an imposing appearance from the sea. A large
mansion , 1,000 yards up the wooded glen ad
joining, appears on some points of view .
The population in 1951 was 8,428 .
A pier extends about 500 yards into the sea, at
which steamers touch almost daily in the season
from Scarborough, Whitby, Hartlepool, and
Middlesbrough.
Saltburn Light is shown from the pierhead .
Coast guard . — A coast-guard station, electri
cally connected , stands upon the bank opposite the
town of Saltburn .
Rocket station . - A rocket apparatus is main
tained at Saltburn .
7-81 Huntcliff, 1 mile eastward of Saltburn , is
a bold cliff, 360 feet high , nearly perpendicular,
H.O. 35
and of a dark red color. Beacon or Warsett Hill,
525 feet high, a rounded summit of the ridge, is
seen a short distance back .
7-82 Skinningrove . — At the head of a small
bay named Skinningrove Wick, between Huntcliff
and Redcliff, at the mouth of a deep ravine, is the
village of Skinningrove, with its church and some
chimneys.
A small pier extends from the shore just north
of Skinningrove.
Rocket station .There is a lifesaving rocket
apparatus at Skinningrove.
7-83 The coast from Skinningrove to Whitby,
a distance of 11 miles, lying in a southeasterly and
northwesterly direction, is mostly one continuous
line of cliffs, varying from 110 feet to over 600
feet in height, the most conspicuous being Redcliff
under Easington Heights. These bold cliffs are
broken by deep ravines at Staithes, at the head
of Runswick Bay, and in a few places between
Sandsend and Whitby. In many places it has been
much cut away for the alum works, now discon
tinued. Eastward of Runswick Bay the cliffs are
again high as far as Sandsend Village. The whole
coast, however, is subject to heavy landslips.
Lythe Church and Mulgrave Castle, the latter
in a richly wooded domain, are prominent a short
distance inland of Sandsend.
The coast between Huntcliff and Redcliff is
fringed by an irregular and dangerous ledge of
rocks that uncovers at low water for a distance
of 600 yards seaward ; vessels should not, therefore,
be navigated inside of the 10 -fathom curve;
this applies to the whole coast as far as Whitby,
the ledge of uneven and dangerous rocks being
only broken at Skinningrove, at the head of Runs
wick Bay, and from Sandsend to Whitby, between
which places the foreshore is sandy.
Redcliff (54 °34' N. , 0 ° 50 ' W., H. 0. Chart 4471),
3 1/2 miles southeastward from Huntcliff, is one
of the boldest features of the Yorkshire coast,
being 672 feet above high water, and of a deep -red
color, but it appears to be known also as Boulby
Cliff, a village of the same name being situated 1
mile eastward of it.
 WHITBY ROAD
In the neighborhood of Redcliff the cliffs are
much tunneled , and from seaward appear like
portholes in the cliff. From these works ironstone
is conveyed to the works at Skinningrove.
Staithes Nab is the next prominent point, 2
miles southeastward of Redcliff.
7-84 Staithes is a fishing village near the Nab,
shut in by high bluffs, and stands on the eastern
side of a small creek, or beck, and may be recog-
nized by a railroad viaduct across the creek; the
ground behind rises steeply, but the village is so
covered in by the cliffs as to be only visible in
certain directions from the sea. The harbor is
formed by two breakwaters. At high -water spring
tides there is a depth of 15 feet in the entrance,
which is about 200 feet wide.
It is a busy place in the herring season , at which
time smokehouses for drying the fish are built
against the cliff.
Staithes Light is shown from a steel tripod on
the west breakwater head . A beacon with a dia-
mond top mark marks the east breakwater head.
Coast guard - Rocket station . - On the summit
of the cliff on the eastern side of the village of
Staithes is the coast guard flagstaff and the
electrically connected station . A rocket apparatus
is also maintained here. A lifeboat is maintained
at Staithes.
7-85 Staithes Old Nab is a low black cliff
1,000 yards southeastward of the coast guard
flagstaff. There is a lookout hut and flagstaff here.
It is the most advanced point of this line of coast,
and vessels use it as a point of departure.
7-86 Port Mulgrave Wreckhills are two small
private shipping places for ironstone, between
Staithes Old Nab and Runswick Bay. Port Mul-
grave is formed by two breakwaters, and dries;
the depth alongside the breakwater is about 17
feet at high water. The port is only used by
lighters.
7–87 Runswick Bay. - High cliffs of alum
shale extend from Staithes Old Nab for 2 miles,
southeastward to Runswick Bay, the shore of
which, skirted by grassy banks, has a highly culti-
vated background. It is encumbered by sunken
111
(Chg 7 )
ledges, particularly off Kettle Ness, its south
eastern boundary . With onshore winds a heavy
sea quickly rises and breaks across the entrance
of the bay , where it is slightly shallower, and is
called " the bar.” There is nearly always a good
landing for boats under the village.
Two lights are shown close northward of the
lifeboathouse; in range they bear about 170 °
marking the northern side of the channel through
the offshore reefs to the lifeboat slip.
Small vessels anchor within Kettle Ness Steel
in southerly and southeasterly winds and in the
body of the bay with northwesterly winds. The
anchorage should be approached with a deep
ravine at the head of the bay bearing 229º.
Runswick is a village in the northwestern corner
of the bay.
Lifeboat. — There is a lifeboat at Runswick .
7-88 Kettle Ness. — Kettle Ness, forming the
eastern extremity of Runswick Bay, is red and
precipitous and much excavated by alum works;
near the point is a cone-shaped hill, on which
stands a stone beacon ; it is, however, difficult to
identify when more than one mile distant.
Coast guard . — There is a coast guard station
at Kettle Ness, where a rocket apparatus is kept.
7–89 Kelder Steel, 1 1/2 miles to the south
eastward of Kettle Ness, projects 800 yards from
the coast and must be carefully avoided .
Huntcliff, or Redcliff, kept in sight, bearing
287º, outside of Staithes Nab , leads northeast
ward of both Kettle Ness and Kelder Steel.
Wreck . - A wreck which is visible at all stages
of tide lies on Kelder Steel.
7-90 WHITBY ROAD may , for convenience,
be said to lie between Sandsend Ness to the west
ward and High Whitby to the eastward . A broad
sandy strand extends from Sandsend to Whitby;
above it are steep banks and a bold diversified
background, with Aislaby Windmill and Sneaton
Castle on the outline. The coast southward of
Whitby is cliffy.
Sandsend Ness, situated 1,200 yards southward
of Kettle Ness, is an abrupt and steep -to point,
H. O. 35
 112 RIVER TYNE TO RIVER HUMBER
fringed by a narrow ledge of rocks ; here are some
disused alum works.
The ruins of an abbey on the summit of the yards. The inner end of the extension is connected
eastern cliff, its church , close westward , and
modern terraces and hotel upon the western
cliff, are prominent from the sea .
Sandsend Bay is formed between Sandsend
Ness and Upgang Rocks and is a common an-
chorage in northwesterly winds for vessels bound
to Whitby or to the northward. Anchor with
Mulgrave Castle, bearing 251°, and Staithes Old
Nab kept in sight, bearing 303º, in 6 fathoms,
sand over clay bottom.
Sandsend is a village situated at the mouth of a
wooded vale.
Vessels waiting tide to enter Whitby Harbor
usually anchor in Sandsend Bay with north
westerly winds; but in Whitby Road, between
Upgang Rocks and Whitby Rock , with winds from
southeastward, with the West Pier Lighthouse
bearing from 161° to 167° in 8 fathoms of water.
7-91 Whitby Harbor . — The entrance lies be
tween the pier extensions continued within by the
old East and West Piers, which are 20 feet above
high water. They are constructed of rubble and
faced with stone, the distance between the pier
heads being 160 feet. It comprises the lower por
tion of the Esk and is divided into outer and inner
harbors.
The outer harbor, 24 acres in extent, which
dries over its greater part, has Scotch Head Pier
or Jetty and a wharf, alongside which is a depth of
7 feet on the western side, and Tate Hill and Fish
Piers on the eastern side . The Fish Piers
have a low water depth of 3 to 10 feet along
side .
In 1960 a wharf was under construction in
the outer harbor to accommodate vessels up
to 200 feet in length . The wharf is to be 400
feet long and will be extended if and when
the trade requires it.
The inner harbor which dries almost completely
is double the extent of the outer one, but has in it
the Bell Shoals, a large mud flat, which much re
duces the waterway at low water. It is the place of
refuge in stormy weather, and numerous small
vessels can be conveniently berthed in it, for
which purpose moorings, buoys, and posts have
been provided . The bottom in the channel of
both harbors consists of gravel, mud, and shale.
H.O. 35
The West Pier with its extension projects north
ward from the west entrance point for about 500
with the old pier end by a half tide ledge and a
bridge.
The East Pier with its extension projects north
ward from the east cliff for about 500 yards. There
is a small opening covered by a bridge between the
old pier and the extension, and another opening at
the inner end of the old pier.
The bar is a flat ledge of shale extending across
the entrance between the piers, with more or less
sand upon it, according to the prevailing winds ;
in 1955 there was a depth of 7 feet on the bar and
4 feet in the channel into the outer harbor.
7-92 Dangers.--Saltwick Nab (54 ° 29' N.,
0 ° 35 ' W.) , situated 1,620 yards to the eastward of
East Pier, is a low but conspicuous rocky promon
tory of a dark color, 62 feet high. Inland and be
low the cliffs it has been much excavated by old
alum works. About 500 yards eastward of this
point there is a small bight in the rocky ledge,
which affords a landing place for boats in moderate
weather.
Black Nab , 1,000 yards to the southeastward
of Saltwick Nab , is a small rocky islet, 42 feet high,
of dark appearance, situated on the rocky fore
shore at a short distance from the coast.
Upgang Rocks, about 1 mile westward of the
harbor entrance, are a cluster of rocks covered by
kelp, and with 3 feet over them, extending 1,200
yards along the coast and 1,200 yards from it.
Staithes Old Nab, bearing 302°, open of Kettle
Ness, or High Whitby Lighthouse, showing over
Saltwick Nab, bearing 132°, leads northeastward
of the rocks.
Whitby Scar and Rock extend from the eastern
cliff and are covered with kelp, visible at low water .
The rock has 2 feet on its outer edge, but its ex
tremity, as defined by the 3 -fathom curve, ex
tends 1,050 yards northward of the lighthouse.
Larpool Hall, standing in the woods above the
Esk Vale, just open westward of East Pier, bear
ing 184°, leads westward of the Rock and Scar.
A pair of beacons in range 164° stands on
the south shore of the outer harbor . These
beacons form the entrance range that leads
from the roadstead to the outer harbor .
 WHITBY HARBOR
The second pair of range beacons stands
on East Pier about 100 yards southeastward
of the lighthouse on the old head of West
Pier . These beacons in range 029 ° astern
lead from the alinement of the entrance bea
cons toward the wharves .
7–93 Buoys.—A black bell buoy is moored
1,350 yards northward of East Pier Light-
house .
The channel in the harbor is marked by small
black buoys on the eastern side and red buoys
on the western side.
7-94 Whitby lights. - A light is exhibited from
a grey wooden house on the extremity of West
Pier Extension. A fog signal is sounded from a
nautophone on the head of West Pier.
A light is exhibited from a yellow cylindrical
tower, 73 feet high, on the old head of West Pier.
A light is exhibited from a grey wooden house,
23 feet high, on the extremity of East Pier Ex-
tension .
A light is exhibited from a yellow cylindrical
stone tower, 43 feet high, from the head of Old
East Pier.
Both inner lights are exhibited from 2 hours be-
fore to 2 hours after high water, when there is more
than 10 feet of water on the bar, except when it is
not safe to enter.
By day a ball is hoisted on the staff on the west-
ern pier lighthouse and kept there while there is
10 feet on the bar, except when it is not safe to
enter.
7-95 The swing bridge connecting the two
new parts of the town and forming the division
between the harbors spans a clear waterway 70
feet in width . Green lights are shown from the
swing bridge when it is open and red lights when
it is closed.
7-96 Coast guard . — There is a coast guard
station at Whitby.
Lifeboats - Rocket station . – At the foot of
West Pier, are two motor lifeboats, belts, and lines,
and at the East Pier a lifesaving rocket apparatus.
An alternate lifeboat is stationed at Upgang,
for use when, from insufficient water or too heavy
sea , the lifeboats at Whitby cannot be launched .
7-97 Storm signals are shown from the coast
guard flagstaff on the eastern side of the entrance
of the harbor and from the harbor master's fiag-
staff on the western side.
113
(Chg 7)
7-98 River Esk extends 16 miles above Whitby
Harbor, but as it drains a hilly country , the fresh
ets discharged by it are often sudden and heavy,
running through the bridge passage and between
the piers with a velocity of 5 miles an hour. In
dry weather the outward motion of the current is
scarcely perceptible. The tidal character of the
river has been greatly curtailed by a dam at Rus
warp Mill, 2 1/2 miles within the bar ; the tide
rises during springs 3 or 4 feet at the dam , but
does not extend beyond it, and the scour through
the harbor is thus rendered almost entirely de
pendent upon the land floods.
7–99 Tides . — It is high water, full and change,
at Whitby at 3h. 45m.; springs rise 15 feet, neaps
11 1/2 feet, and neaps range 8 feet.
Tidal currents . — The current during the flood
sets strongly to the eastward across Whitby Rock,
except when the sea breaks heavily upon it ; then
there is but little set through Whitby Road.
7-100 Pilots . — There are 2 pilots, under a
master, and their services may always be obtained
in moderate weather.
7–101 Directions. During springs, and in
very fine weather, with smooth water, vessels draw
ing 15 feet may enter Whitby outer harbor, and
those of 11 feet draft during neaps.
Whitby Harbor should never be attempted in
gales from northward to northeastward , for the
sea then breaks a long way offshore and renders
the approach dangerous; under such circum
stances vessels will be warned off by a flare on the
West Pier, but if forced to run in they will be
directed by signals from the West Pierhead.
If approaching Whitby Harbor from the north
ward, avoid Upgang Rocks by the marks pre
viously given.
Approaching from the southeastward , keep
North Cheek, Robin Hood Bay, open of High
Whitby, bearing 141° ; this will lead about 400
yards outside the bell buoy marking Whitby Rock ;
Larpool House, over the entrance to the harbor,
bearing 184 °, and just open westward of East Pier
leads westward of the above bell buoy. When
the entrance beacons are in range 164 ° steer
this course into the outer harbor.
Should boats not venture off, a vessel may safely
run for the harbor if the ball be hoisted on the
West Pier Lighthouse; but if a flare is lighted on
the West Pierhead the harbor should not be at
tempted.
H. O. 35
114 RIVER TYNE TO RIVER HUMBER
In steering for the entrance to the harbor keep
midway between the piers, and then pass between
the buoys marking the channel, black on the east
ern and red on the western side. The channel
within the entrance lies midway between Scotch
Head and Tate Hill Pier ; it then continues parallel
to the face of the quay on the western side,but if
one is to enter the inner harbor, the bridge will be
opened within 2 hours of high water.
By night. - From the northward keep in the
occulting red sector of High Whitby Light until
the light on the head of the extension of
West Pier bears 167° , when course should
be altered to pass between the 2 pierhead
lights into the harbor.
Vessels from the southeastward should keep in
the white sector of High Whitby Light until the
light on the head of West Pier bears 167°, and
then they should proceed as directed above.
7-102 WHITBY, a town of considerable importance
even at the period of the Norman conquest, occupies a
position on both banks of the Esk , at its junction with the
sea. The population in 1931 was 11,441.
Its industries, however, have considerably declined.
Formerly shipbuilding flourished .
Fresh and staple provisions are plentiful. Moderate
supplies of deck and engine stores are stocked; water
is laid down to the quay side . Diesel oil can be ob
tained at the quay or supplied by barge . Advance no
tice is required for large quantities .
Hospital. - There is a seaman's hospital on the eastern
side ofthe inner harbor.
7-103 COAST - High Whitby or Ling Hill
(54 °29' N. , 0 ° 34' W., H. 0. Chart 4471) is 4 1/4
miles southeastward of Sandsend Ness, and 13/4
miles southeastward of Whitby Harbor.
High Whitby Light. - A light is exhibited from
a white octagonal tower, 44 feet high , on the
northern slope of Ling Hill. The lighthouse is
connected by telephone with the general system .
Fog signal. - During thick or foggy weather, a
fog siren is sounded from a house 270 yards north
westward of the lighthouse.
7–104 Coast. – From Whitby to Robin Hood
Bay the coast consists of high, dark colored cliffs,
occasionally tinged with red.
North Cheek or Bay Ness is a bold headland ,
2 1/2 miles south - southeastward of High Whitby
Lighthouse.
South Cheek or Old Peak is 2 1/2 miles farther
to the southeastward .
H. 0. 35
7--105 Robin Hood Bay . - Between North and
South Cheeks, is Robin Hood Bay. The shore is
divided between cliff and grassy bank, broken
here and there by deep gullies or becks, and be
hind the ground, which is highly cultivated , rises
like an amphitheater. Ledges skirt the shores of
the bay, and the clear space is very limited .
Gay village, chiefly inhabited by fishermen, is
perched upon the face of the cliff in the north
western corner of the bay, with several new red
brick buildings about it.
Near to the brink of South Cheek , at a height
of over 600 feet, stands Raven Hall Hotel, with
Ravenscar village, consisting of several con
spicuous buildings , in the vicinity . A con
spicuous radio mast stands almost 1 mile
westward of the village.
There is anchorage under the North Cheek with
the wind as far to the northward as west-north
west, and under the South Cheek with winds to the
westward of south -southwest, but neither position
can be recommended except for temporary stop
ping in summer.
Robin Hood Bay has been reported ( 1958)
to be a good radar target at a distance of 14
miles , and identifiable with charted features
by radar at a distance of 8 miles .
7-106 Coast guard. There is a station at
Baytown village, in the northwestern part of
Robin Hood Bay.
Lifeboat - Rocket station .-- Near the coast
guard station in Robin Hood Bay there is a life
saving rocket apparatus. A rocket apparatus is
also kept at Ravenscar.
Storm signals are shown at Robin Hood Bay.
7–107 The coast. – From Robin Hood Bay
(54 ° 26 ' N.,0°31 ' W.) high cliffs continue for 3 1/2
miles to Hayburn Wyke or Cove, a slight indenta
tion at the mouth of a wooded vale, and then they
decline in height considerably to Cloughton Wyke,
a small cove rather more marked than Hayburn
Wyke. From the cliff at Hundale Point the coast
continues of the same character but gradually de
creases in height toward Scarborough and is
backed a few miles inland by the high ridges of
Silpho, Suffield, and Seamer.
The whole coast from Whitby to Scarborough
is generally foul for 1/4 mile offshore but in Robin
Hood Bay and Scalby Ness for double that
distance.
When to the southward of Cloughton Wyke,
 SCARBOROUGH BAY
Scarborough Castle should be kept open, bearing
westward of or more than 170° in order to avoid
the foul ground from Scalby Ness.
7–108 Coast guard . — There is a station at
Burniston, about 2 1/4 miles southward of Hay-
burn Wyke.
Rocket station . - A lifesaving rocket apparatus
is kept at Burniston .
7-109 SCARBOROUGH BAY (54 ° 17' N. ,
0 ° 23' W. , H.O. Chart 4704) is about 10 miles south-
eastward of Robin Hood Bay and open and ex-
posed to all winds in the eastern semicircle;
strong winds from north - northwestward also send
a heavy sea into the bay but the bottom is smooth
and soundings regular.
In the northern portion of the bay the fore-
shore is a smooth sand upward of 300 yards broad
at low water; within it the land rises with a steep
ascent, and upon this slope stands the town in the
form of an amphitheater.
The southern part of the bay is bordered by
steep grassy slopes with rocky ledges in front.
Aspect. - The ruined keep of the castle on the
summit of Scarborough Rock and the war me-
morial 75 feet high , on Oliver Mount are the most
prominent objects in the bay.
Scarborough Rock (54 ° 17' N. , 0 ° 23' W.), 277
feet high, and the castle crowning its promontory,
among the most striking objects on the Yorkshire
coast, form the northern point of Scarborough Bay .
The rock has been reported (1958) to be a
good radar target at a distance of 18 miles ,
and identifiable with charted features by ra-
dar at a distance of 14 miles .
7-110 Dangers. — White Nab, a cliffy point,
192 feet high, 1 1/2 miles southward of the rock,
is the southern point of the bay.
Rocky ledges, which dry, extend generally
about 300 yards from nearly all parts of the shore,
the outermost being South Steel, off Scarborough
Rock; Ramsdale Scar, southward of the harbor
entrance ; Dovehole Scar, off Dickinson Point;
and Perilous Rocks, off White Nab.
Wrecks. - A wreck which is a danger to vessels
anchoring close inshore, lies 180 yards southwest
115
( Chg 7 )
ward of the outer end of the East Pier.
A wreck lies sunk about 1,690 yards east
southeastward of Vincent Pier Light.
7-111 Anchorage in 29 feet, sand over blue
clay, in which the anchor holds well, may be taken
about 1,000 yards southeastward of Vincent Pier
Lighthouse.
7-112 Scarborough Harbor is the result of
many alterations and additions, and is, as a whole,
well designed for protection. It is formed by the
East, Old, Vincent, and West Piers, enclosing 2
independent harbors, East Harbor, of 5 1/2 acres,
and Old Harbor of 9 acres.
The harbors are damaged by silt, for the tidal
current which sweeps round the bay from south to
north carries the lighter particles from off the
shore and deposits them in the still water of the
harbors. This eddy begins 1 hour before high
water by the shore and continues until 2 hours
after low water; in strong southeasterly winds,
however, it sets constantly past the harbor's
mouth .
East Pier is the extension of the eastern coast of
Scarborough Rock for 400 yards in a southerly and
southwesterly direction.
A stone lookout house, with a red -tiled roof,
stands on the inner end of the East Pier, and care
must be taken not to mistake it for the Vincent
Pier Lighthouse when making the harbor in thick
weather.
West Pier is wider than the other piers and ex
tends 200 yards from the coast opposite Vincent
Pier.
Old Pier is to the westward of East Pier, and
nearly parallel to it.
Vincent Pier is rectangular, and constructed off
the heads of the above piers, being joined to the
Old Pier by a bridge.
The outer East Harbor entrance, which is 26
feet wide, is closed during the winter by a timber
structure. Vessels then pass through the draw
bridge in Vincent Pier, which is 32 feet in width.
Old Harbor entrance is 100 feet wide.
7-113 Depths. - Practically the whole of East
Harbor and the eastern part of West Harbor dry at
H. 0. 35
116 RIVER TYNE TO RIVER HUMBER
low water . The western part of West Harbor
has been dredged to a depth of 3 feet . The
bottom is mud , sand , and clay with small
stones and boulders .
7–114 Vincent Pier tidal signals. - A white
occulting light is shown from a white tower on the
elbow of Vincent Pier when there is a depth of 12
feet or more in the channel. A black framework
ball hoisted above the lighthouse by day has the
same significance.
An orange fixed light is shown from a window in
the same light tower when there is a depth of less
than 12 feet but more than 6 feet in the channel.
A fog signal is made from the lighthouse.
A buoy, spherical, and painted green and orange,
is moored 190 yards 187° from the light on Vincent
Pier.
West Pier Light is exhibited from a post, 10
eet high , on the outer extremity of West Pier.
East Pier Light is shown from a mast at
the head of East Pier.
7-115 Coast guard - Lifesaving . – There is a
coast guard station on the eastern part of the
summit of Scarborough Rock.
A motor lifeboat is maintained at the western
end of the old harbor.
Storm signals are displayed from a flag
staff on Vincent Pier.
7-116 Carbide of calcium . — The harbor com
missioners have made stringent bylaws with re
spect to vessels with carbide of calcium, which is
only to be brought into harbor in strong hermeti
cally closed receptacles, containing each not more
than 140 pounds, and of which immediate notice
must be given . A copy of the regulations should be
obtained immediately on arrival in the harbor.
7-117 Tides. — It is high water, full and
change, at Scarborough at 4h. 11m.; springs rise
15 3/4 feet, neaps 12 1/2 feet, and neaps range
9 1/4 feet.
7-118 SCARBOROUGH . — The town is a watering
place, with numerous visitors. A chalybeate spring to the
southward of the town is connected to it by a bridge,
which , with the large Cliff Hotel near it, are prominent
objects from the bay . A branch of the North Eastern Rail
way connects Scarborough with York and Hull. The
population in 1949 was 43,220.
There is a sea wall, with promenade and carriage drive,
round the base of Scarborough Rock , connecting the north
and south bays.
H.O. 35
Supplies. — Water is laid on to West, Vincent, and Old
Piers, and is supplied in any quantity at reasonable rates.
All other supplies are abundant.
Hospital.-- There is a hospital and shipping office for
seamen.
7–119 THE COAST ( H. 0. Chart 4471 ) from
Scarborough to Filey is a continuous line of dark
red cliffs. Clayton Bay, 2 miles to the southward
of Scarborough, with a water mill near its head, is
sometimes used by small vessels as an anchorage
in southerly winds.
Yons Nab (Red Cliff), its eastern point, is high,
and the cliffs then diminish in height to Carr Naze.
Horse Rock, a rocky ledge, is 1 mile east-south
eastward of Yons Nab, and projects 1,000 yards
from the coast on the western side of Newbiggin
Wyke. From Scarborough to Horse Rock foul
ground extends 1,000 yards from the coast, thence
to Filey Brig it is clear.
In working between Scarborough and Filey the
shore must be given a berth of at least 1,000 yards.
7-120 Filey Bay (54 ° 12' N., 0°16' W., H. 0.
Chart 4701) is about 7 miles southeastward of
Scarborough ; it affords shelter from winds from
the northward and offshore, but is too shallow to
protect any but light-draft vessels. The hard coast
line of the bay is fronted by Filey, Muston, Hun
manby, and Reighton Sands. On the outer edge of
Muston Sands and 400 yards offshore is Mile
Haven Stones a collection of stones.
Carr Naze, the northern point of the bay, on
which there is a Board of Trade lookout, is 135
feet high, and well defined.
Filey Brig is a line of remarkable ill -defined
rocky ledges extending east-southeastward from
Carr Naze, and forms the northeastern end of
Filey Bay. High Brig Rock is 7 feet high, and
from its southern side, the Spittles, the remains of
a pier, partly seen at low -water springs, extends in
a southerly direction.
Brig End, the eastern extremity of the ledges, is
860 yards eastward of Carr Naze; shoal water ex
tends 300 yards outside it.
Filey Brig has been reported (1958) to be
identifiable with charted features by radar
at a distance of 10 miles .
7-121 Light and whistle buoy . - Filey Brig
 WITHERNSEA
stripes and showing flashing white lights, extends
southward from a position about 5 1/2 miles east-
ward of Hornsea to about 3 3/4 miles southeast-
ward of Aldbrough . For positions of the buoys
marking this range, consult H. O. Chart 4472 .
Mappleton Church, 2 1/4 miles southward of
Hornsea, surmounted by a spire, is a valuable
seamark .
Hilston red brick tower and small spire church
and Tunstall Tower Church, upon high ground,
are prominent objects.
7-150 Tunstall. — The village of Tunstall is
2 1/4 miles southward of Grimstone Garth, and 1
mile southward of Tunstall is Sand le Mere, where
the remains of a lake occasions a break in the cliff.
The next gap occurs at Withernsea, and the in
termediate cliff averages from 40 to 60 feet in
height.
7-151 Withernsea . Withernsea church , 2
miles southward of Sand le Mere, though it stands
low , is a plain object from the sea, as is also a
large terrace upon the coast.
Withernsea Light (53 °44' N., 0 ° 02' E.) is ex-
hibited from an octagonal white tower 127 feet
high , situated 300 yards northwestward of the
church .
Wrecks. Several dangerous wrecks lie about
1 1/2 miles offshore along the coast between
Withernsea and Dimlington.
A conical buoy with black and yellow vertical
stripes marks a sewer outlet southward of Withern-
sea .
7-152 Shoals. - Numerous shoals exist off the
121
( Chg 7 )
coast between Withernsea and the Humber River.
Shoals with least depths of 18 and 36 feet lie as
far as 1 1/2 and 3 3/4 miles, respectively, from the
shore. For futher information consult the latest,
best scale charts of the area.
7–153 Coast guard . — There are stations
at Hornsea , Withernsea , and Easington , at
all of which a line- throwing apparatus is
maintained .
7–154 This section has been deleted .
7–155 Patrington church spire, a short dis
tance inland, is seen from every direction in the
vicinity of the Humber, excepting when hidden by
the higher land ofDimlington . A conspicuous
chimney stands about 234 miles eastward of
the spire .
Dimlington.Southward of Withernsea , cliffs
recurs, and, at Out Newton, 4 miles southward of
it, rises into the bold elevation Dimlington Height,
a cliff of boulder clay and pebbles 130 feet high ;
this, being a very distinct object from the offing,
serves to mark the neighborhood of the mouth of
the Humber. From Dimlington the cliffs decline to
the southward.
Easington church and windmill, 1 1/2 miles
farther southward, are both prominent.
Kilnsea.Southward of Easington the coast is
very low. Beyond the village of Kilnsea and the
cliff a short distance to the southward of it, the
coast, skirted by low sand hills, bends more
westerly, and the Holderness coast finally ends at
Spurn Point, the northern entrance point of the
River Humber.
H.O. 35
 CHAPTER 8
RIVER HUMBER APPROACH - OUTLYING DANGERS
8-1 General remarks . — The outlying dangers
in the approach from all directions to the River
Humber are given in this chapter. In the vicinity
of these dangers fleets of fishing vessels are often
met with, and a careful lookout for them should
be maintained.
8–2 Dogger Bank ( H. 0. Chart 4841).— This
bank, as defined by the 20 -fathom curve, lies be
tween latitude 55°50' N., longitude 5 °00 ' E. , and
latitude 54°05' N. , longitude 1°10' E., and extends
about 140 miles in a northeasterly and south
westerly direction, the greatest breadth being 70
miles. The general depths on the bank are from
10 to 20 fathoms.
Caution - Obstructions. Several fishing steam
ers reported ( 1935) that they sustained severe
damage to their hulls and nets on Dogger Bank in
the area between the parallels of latitude 54°50' N.
and 55 ° 03' N., and the meridians of longitude
3 ° 20 ' E. , and 3°25' E.
Two shoals of 5 1/2 and 7 fathoms lie about 9
miles eastward of the 10 - fathom curve of Inde
fatigable Banks.
8–3 Southwest Patch . — This extensive patch,
65 miles from Flamborough Head, is at the south
westerly end of the Dogger Bank, and is 35 miles
long in an east -southeasterly and west-north
westerly direction by 8 miles in width. It has
depths on it of 714 to 10 fathoms , over which
the sea breaks heavily in gales, and is a favorite
resort of the Humber fishermen . A detached bank
with a depth of 9 fathoms lies 8 miles northward of
the eastern end of Southwest Patch . About 4
miles northward of the Southwest Patch are two
detached patches with 10 fathoms over them.
8–4 Outer Well Bank (54 ° 09' N. , 2°04' E. ) is
about 5 miles in length with 9 fathoms least
122
H. 0. 35
water on it ; it lies on the southern edge of the
Dogger Bank .
Tidal currents . — About 20 miles southward of
Outer Well Bank the south -going current com
mences at low, and north - going current at high,
water at Dover, the maximum velocity being
about 1 1/4 knots.
8–5 Shoals between Indefatigable Banks and
Smiths Knoll. - Indefatigable Banks (53 ° 32' N.,
2°21 ' W. , H. O. Chart 4473) are the outermost in
the approach to the Humber from the eastward
and southward, and consist of two narrow banks,
with a total length of about 13 miles , as de
fined by the 10 -fathom curve , and depths of
734 to 10 fathoms .
8-6 Swarte Bank , situated about 8 miles
southwestward of the Indefatigable Banks, as
defined by the 10 -fathom curve, is a narrow ridge,
21 miles long northwest and southeast, and about
1 mile wide. The general depths on it are from 6
to 8 fathoms, but there is a patch of 5 fathoms at
its northern end, and one of 5 1/2 fathoms at
6 1/2 miles from the same end.
About midway between Indefatigable and Swarte
Banks is a similar but much smaller ridge, with 8
to 10 fathoms over it, and for about 15 miles
northwestward of Swarte Bank are several patches
of 9 to 10 fathoms.
Tidal currents. At about 3 miles northward
of the southeastern end of Swarte Bank the north
going current commences at high water at Dover,
and the south-going current at low water, the
maximum velocity being about 1 1/2 knots ; see
table on chart .
8–7 Broken Bank , situated 5 miles south
 IMMINGHAM
at low water. The dividing line can frequently be
seen on the surface.
From about one hour after high water till about
one hour before low water, especially at springs, an
eddy may be met with just inside the dividing line.
When between the piers and approaching the
lock entrance, where the pile piers join the
masonry, allowance for the current must also be
made, there being another dividing line due to
water flowing between the piles of the piers on the
one side and the entirely slack water caused by the
masonry entrance on the other.
The strength of the ebb current off the piers is
reported to be about 5 knots at springs and to
reach 7 knots under exceptional conditions, the
strength of the flood being from 1 to 3 knots and
under exceptional conditions 4 knots. Caution is
therefore particularly necessary when entering
or leaving on the ebb . It should also be remem
bered that the ebb stream frequently runs for 50
minutes after low water.
Slack water usually occurs 1/4 hour and about
1 hour, respectively , after high and low water ,
the times of which are affected by the strength
and direction of the wind. They are usually ad
vanced and the rise of the tide increased by north
erly winds, the opposite effect taking place with
southerly winds, when a longer slack may con
sequently be expected.
The direction and strength of the ebb is greatly
affected by rainfall inland, and after heavy rain
may continue to run 2 hours after the time of low
water; the last of the ebb stream always runs
strongly. The strength of the ebb is from 3 1/2
to 5 knots and of the flood about 3 knots.
Should the exigencies of the service require the
passage of a vessel into the lock when a strong cur
rent is running, she must enter at low speed , hug-
ging the western jetty on the flood and the east
ern jetty on the ebb.
It should be remembered that immediately as
a vessel's bow enters the comparatively slack water
between the jetties her stern will be swung by the
fast-moving outer current to starboard on the
flood and to port on the ebb, rendering a collision
with the jetty away from which the current is
flowing inevitable if the dock entrance be ap
proached at too high a speed .
Note . — The velocity of the currents as given
above is considered excessive by some authorities.
141
( Chg 7 )
9-55 Pilots.- Pilotage is compulsory .
The pilot boat cruises near Spurn Light Ves
sel but during rough seas may move to the
vicinity of Bull Light Vessel . Warning of
such move is broadcast by Humber Radio .
9-56 Directions. - Vessels should proceed as
for Grimsby until about 14 mile northward of
Clee Ness No. 4 Lighted Bell Float; thence
alter course to pass about 14 mile southward
of Middle Lighted Bell Float No. 7 , making
due allowance for tidal currents . When Kill
ingholme Range Lights can be made out,
steer with them in range ahead , bearing
292 ° , until abreast Holme Light Buoy No.
11. When abreast Holme Ridge better water
will be obtained by opening the high light a
little to the southward of the low light. For
Immingham Dock vessels have only to turn aside
out of the main route when abreast the dock.
There is no difficulty in entering or leaving Im
mingham Dock at any state of the tide, either by
day or by night, when in charge of a licensed Hum
ber pilot. Vessels over 200 feet in length entering
without the assistance of the tugs should only
enter the lock pit at slack water, unless compelled
by the exigencies of the service to do so at other
times.
A depth of at least 28 feet at mean low -water
springs is normally maintained, if possible, in the
entrance. All vessels should ascertain the depth
of water before entering.
9-57 IMMINGHAM - Wet Dock (53º87' N., 0 ° 18 '
W.).--This dock, which is the deepest on the eastern coast,
and situated on the southern shore of the estuary , 5 1/2
miles above Grimsby, is the property of the Great Central
Railway Co. It is constructed for commerce generally.
The entrance is through a lock 840 feet long by 90 feet
wide ( fitted with 3 pairs of gates, dividing the lock into sec
tions of 524 feet and 316 feet), between 2 outcurving jetties,
theeastern jetty being for passengers and the western for
coal. The dock is rectangular in shape, with 2 long arms
running parallel to each other on the western side. The
total water area exclusive of the locks is 45 acres ,
and the total length of quayage 5,956 feet . There are 7
coal hoists inside the dock each capable of dealing
with 700 tons per hour. One hoist is movable , and can
work 2 holds of a vessel simultaneously.
A commodious granary with elevator and automatic
weighing machines is situated at the eastern end of the
dock. The dock is fully equipped with hydraulic cranes
ranging from 2 to 50 tons.
All parts are connected by railway.
Repairs to hull and machinery can be made . Divers
are available . The dimensions of the largest graving
dock in the port are as follows : length , 740 feet ;
width , 56 feet; depth on sill at MHWS , 234/2 feet. A
new graving dock was under construction in 1960 and
when completed will be about 600 feet long and 90
feet wide .
H. 0. 35
142 RIVER HUMBER
Supplies in abundant quantities can be obtained .
Water can be obtained from water boats . About 50 tons
can be delivered per hour.
Large quantities of coal can be obtained . There are seven
hydraulic coal hoists, capable of delivering 700 tons of coal
per hour.
Fuel oil and Diesel oil can be supplied alongside or by
tanker.
9-58 RIVER HUMBER FROM IMMING
HAM TO HULL (H.0 . Chart 4707)Southern
shore.- From North Killingholme Haven the
shore , fronted by sand flats, extends north-
westward for 34 miles to Skitter Ness , a
low rounded point with 2 beacons on it.
Halton Middle is a shoal which forms at
irregular intervals in midchannel abreast
North Killingholme Haven , where the usual
depth is 18 to 21 feet. As a rule it disappears
in a few months .
Halton Flat is a shoal , with depths under 18 feet,
which extends about 1 mile from the southwestern
shore between Skitter Haven and Skitter Ness.
Skitter Sand , according to the last survey , dries
from 1 to 7 feet, and extends 1 mile northward of
Skitter Ness, but no description of this sand can
be true for any length of time as it is subject to
great and frequent changes.
9-59 Buoys . - Halton Flat and Skitter
Sand are marked on their eastern sides by
the uniform buoyage of the main channel .
Light Buoy No. 12 is moored off Halton
Middle about 12 mile north-northeastward of
the pierhead of North Killing holme Pier .
Skitter Haven Light Buoy No. 14 , Sand
End Lighted Bell Float No. 16 , Elbow Light
Buoy No. 18 , and Anson Light Buoy No. 20
are moored in successive positions .
H. O. 35
Hook Light Buoy No. 22 is moored about
12 mile southwestward of the Hydra ulic Tower
at King George Dock at Hull .
A light buoy and a bell buoy, two can
buoys known as “ East Deposit” and “ West
Deposit ” , respectively , are moored on the
northern side of the drying portion of Skitter
Sand. The upper part of the buoys is painted
yellow and the lower part black.
Shoals .-It was reported in 1958 that a
depth of 17 feet existed 14 mile northwestward
of Elbow Light Buoy No. 18 , and the mid
channel area extending to about 12 mile north
westward from the buoy was shoaling .
9-60 Hull Middle (53 °44' N. , 0 ° 20 ' W.) is a
detached shoal of mud and sand, 1,000 yards
northwestward of Skitter Sand. As delineated by
the 1-fathom curve it extends in an east-north
easterly and west-southwesterly direction, vary
ing in length from 24 to 5 miles . In 1957
there were depths of 2 to 6 feet on this
shoal. No description of this shoal can be
true for any length of time as it is subject to
constant change .
Shoal . - A 5 - foot shoal exists about 42
mile east- southeastward of St. Andrews Dock
Flagstaff.
9-61 Buoys . - Lower West Middle Light
Buoy No. 24 and Upper Middle Lighted Bell
Float No. 26 on the northern edge of Hull
Middle mark the southern side of Hull Road .
9-62 Eastern shore . — The shore from
Stone Creek to Thorgumbald Clough is de
scribed in section 9-48 .
 SALT END
9–63 Buoys . - Foul Holme Spit, Foul
Holme Sand , and Paull Sand are marked on
their outer edge by the uniform buoyage
system as follows:
Holme Hook Light Buoy No. 15 is moored
about 1 mile north - northeastward of Killing
holme Rear Range Light.
North Holme Lighted Bell Float No. 17 is
moored about 1 mile north - northeastward of
North Killingholme Pierhead .
Paull Sand Light Buoy No. 19 is moored
about 3 mile southward of Thor gumbald
Rear Range Light .
Paull Sand Light Buoy No. 19A is moored
about 1 mile west-northwestward of Paull
Church Tower .
9–64 Thorgumbald Clough is a rather
prominent point about 5 miles northwestward
of Stone Creek .
Thorgumbald Clough Range Lights .-- Two
lights, visible 5° on either side of the range
line , are shown on Thorgumbald Clough .
These lights in range 135° lead through the
channel. The front light is moved as the
channel alters .
Paull._From Thorgumbald Clough the
bank runs 2 miles in a north - northwesterly
direction and then turns abruptly to the west-
ward at King George Dock . The village of
Paull, with its disused old lighthouse and
flagstaff, is on this bank about 34 mile above
Thor gumbald Clough.
9-65 Salt End is an industrial site lo
cated on the northern side of the entrance
to Hedon Haven, a small creek marked by
dolphins about 12 mile above Paull .
Salt End Oil Jetties.- Two oil jetties
with T -heads , Oil Jetty No. 1 and Oil Jetty
No. 2 , extend about 14 mile from a common
terminus on shore to the deepwater channel .
Oil Jetty No. 1 extends southwestward from
this terminus; Oil Jetty No. 2 extends west
143
( Chg 7)
ward . There is a mooring buoy on each side
of each jetty with the T -heads. A depth of
30 feet at L.W.S. exists at the heads of the
jetties. A third jetty is under construction
and upon completion in late 1960 will be
able to accommodate vessels of up to 27,500
tons deadweight with a draft of 36 feet.
Lights are shown from the heads of both
jetties. Traffic signals are made for vessels
approaching the jetties .
Auxiliary lights are shown from heights of
50 feet at the foot of each jetty on berthing
of vessels at the jetties.
Salt End Range Lights . - Two lights are
exhibited on the Salt End Oil Jetties . These
lights in range 108° lead through the channel
from Hull Road.
Prohibited area . - Anchorage and fishing
is prohibited in the channel area between
Salt End and Skitter Sand .
9-66 The Hebbles, which dry for the
greater part of the distance between Salt End
and King George Dock, about 1 mile north
westward, are the shoal ground extending
about 42 mile offshore . An isolated drying
patch is located close northwestward of the
head of Salt End Oil Jetty No. 2 .
Buoys .-- Hebbles Light Buoy No. 21 is
moored about 34 mile northwestward of the
head of Salt End Oil Jetty No. 1 .
9-67 Channel. - From Immingham Dock en
trance the channel turns north -northwestward for
5 miles, passing Clay Huts Shoal, Foul Holme, and
Paull Sands to the eastward, and Halton Flat to
the westward , with a least depth of 21 feet
(1959) in the fairway eastward of Halton Mid
dle and Halton Flat . From thence it curves
round to the westward to Hull Road , 3 miles
distant, the Hebbles Shoal being to the north
ward , Skitter Sand and Hull Middle to the
south ward , the depths being from 20 to 42
feet as far as Alexandra Dock.
H. O. 35
144 RIVER HUMBER
The depths are subject to frequent and sudden
changes, especially abreast of White Booth Road .
The channel from Thorngumbald to Hull is
curved and narrow and the tidal currents rapid,
the north -going current setting obliquely upon the
Hebbles. In consequence of the shifting nature of
Skitter and Hull Middle Sands this is the most
critical portion of the navigation of the Humber
and any mistake would be attended by disastrous
consequences. The directions should therefore be
followed with unusual care and attention .
9-68 Anchorage . - White Booth Road is off the
Lincolnshire Bank 1 mile above Killingholme
Lights. The anchorage is in from 27 to 50 feet.
A convenient berth can be taken up by bearings
of Killingholme Lights and other objects.
Care must be taken to avoid a foul area
located about 12 mile east- northeastward of shown from iron columns 18 feet high, on the river
Killingholme Range Rear Light.
Hull Road is to the northward of Hull Middle.
In using it the only precaution necessary is not to
anchor too near to the Hebbles, though the closer
in the easier the tide. The bottom is mud and
sand, and the depth 20 to 30 feet. The upper part
of the roadstead is too shallow for large vessels.
Several small foul areas are located in Hull Road .
Vessels are prohibited from anchoring in the
fairway ; they are expected to proceed into dock or
alongside the quays as soon as possible after
arrival, so that the fairway may be kept clear and
collisions avoided.
Vessels of large size must not remain at anchor
in the stream during low -water springs, as the
depths are liable to vary from those on the plan,
and grounding may be attended with serious
results.
Vessels wishing to moor in the stream for any
length of time should apply to the Humber Con
servancy Board for a berth.
9-69 Hull Harbor . — That portion of the Hull
River between Victoria Dock entrance and the
confluence with the Humber — a distance of about
1,000 yards — is usually designated the Old Harbor.
The town was formerly encircled by fortifica
tions, but their site is now occupied by a chain of
docks, connected at their extremities with the
H. 0. 35
Hull and Humber, the river frontage extending for
upward of 3 1/2 miles. Victoria Dock, added to
the number in 1850, was excavated out of the
ground eastward of the Hull; it also communi
cates with both rivers. Alexandra Dock , also
excavated to the eastward of the Hull, was opened
in 1885, and since extended , and King George
Dock is just eastward of Alexandra Dock. To the
westward of Hull River are situated the Humber,
Queen's, Prince's, Railway , Albert, William
Wright, and St. Andrew's Docks.
The docks together embrace an area of 200
acres, exclusive of timber ponds, which are 24
acres in extent.
9–70 Dangers . - Several small foul areas
exist in the harbor approaches .
9–71 King George Dock lights. — Lights are
wall at about 200 yards on either side of the
entrance .
A light is exhibited, from an iron framework
mast, 90 feet high, situated just northward of the
Customs Watch House. The mast by day in
range with either of the beacon towers on the
eastern and western sides of the entrance indi
cates the eastern or western limit of the dredged
area .
Lights are shown from a structure with a
black triangular topmark which stands on a
sunken barge close off the extremity of Half
Tide Wall . This wall marks the river bank for
about 1,200 yards east-southeastward of the
entrance of King George Dock.
Alexandra Dock Range Lights (53 °45' N. , 0°17'
W .) .— There are range beacons, 25 and 20 feet
high, on the eastern side of the entrance. Lights
are exhibited at night from these beacons. In
range, the beacons bear 323° .
Railway Pier lights.
There is a wharf belong
ing to the Hull & Barnsley Co. on the western side
of the entrance to the Alexandra Dock about 400
yards long. At each end there are two vertical
lights exhibited from poles, 20 feet high .
Fog signal. - During thick or foggy weather a
fog bell is sounded at each end of the wharf.
Victoria Dock lights. - By night, two vertical
lights are shown on each side of the entrance when
 HULL DOCKS 145
( Chg 7)

the gates are open . When the gates are Two blue lights, one on each side of the cattle
closed, a single light is shown on each side depot on the Citadel ground, are shown from sun
of the entrance . set to sunrise when cattle are being landed.
A light, not visible from the river, is shown A blue flag hoisted at any of the docks, other
during tidal hours from the western extremity of than the King George, St. Andrews, and Alexandra
the East Pier, and a similar light from the eastern Docks, indicates that the dock at which the signal
extremity of the West Pier. These lights are for is shown is full.
the guidance of vessels leaving the dock at night. King George Dock traffic signals. — The follow
A light is exhibited from a dolphin at each end ing signals are made at the entrance to King
of the landing stage at Victoria Pier. George Dock :
A fog signal is sounded on a nautophone at Traffic signals: The following signals for in
Victoria Pier. coming vessels are hoisted vertically, 5 feet apart,
Humber and Albert Dock lights . - Two vertical on the signal mast, 50 feet high, near the dock
red lights are shown at the entrance when the master's office, which is shown as a signal tower on
gates are open . When the gates are closed only the chart:
one light is shown. Signal Signification
A light is shown at the eastern end of Albert By night: One red light- No vessel to approach the
Dock. By day: One diamond shape- entrance or piers.
A light is shown at the eastern end of St. By night: Two red lights - Vessels in the river may
Andrews Dock . By day: Two diamond shapes come alongside the pier.
Two lights, vertically disposed , are shown from By night: Three red lights-- | Vessels in the river may
By day : Three diamond shapes enter the lock pit.
the eastern end of the east pier at the entrance to
St. Andrews Dock .
Two lights, vertically disposed, are shown from Alexandra Dock tidal signals. — The following
a mast at the corner of the sea wall westward of tidal signals are displayed from the yardarm of a
nust on the eastern side of the entrance :
St. Andrews Dock extension .
Fog signal. - During thick or foggy weather a Signal Signification
nautophone is sounded from the eastern side of One framework ball. 22 feet.
the entrance to St. Andrews Dock . Two framework balls (vertically ) -- 24 feet.
9–72 Explosives. — Vessels carrying explosives, Three framework balls (vertically ) 26 feet.
petroleum , carbide of calcium , or any materials Four framework balls (vertically ) 28 feet.
Five framework balls ( vertically) - 30 feet.
of these natures, are subject to special regulations.
The master should provide himself with a copy At night red lamps are used in place of balls.
of the bylaws at the earliest opportunity .
Victoria Dock tidal signals. — The following
9–73 Storm signalsS. ignals are shown from
a flagstaff on Victoria Pier, Hull. tidal signals are displayed from the stay of a mast
at the entrance .
General docking signal. – At all the docks at
Black balls indicate the time before high water .
Hull except at St. Andrews a red flag at the signal
mast, at the entrance, denotes that dock gates are Signal Signification
not open , but ships may approach the dock One ball (halfway down ) 1/2 hour.
entrance . One ball (close to masthead ). 1 hour.
The absence of the red flag denotes that the Two balls (in line) -- 2 hours.
Three balls ( in line). 3 hours .
gates are open , but attention must be paid to the
tidal signals.
The half-hour ball is lowered at high water.
A red light at night has the same signification as
a red flag by day.

H. O. 35
146
RIVER HUMBER
At this dock no vessels are let out after high
water, although occasionally some are admitted.
Albert Dock traffic signals . - Two vertical lights
close together are shown from halfway down the
signal staff, when vessels may enter. The tidal
signals are the same as at Victoria Dock.
Vessels enter and leave from 2 1/2 hours before
till 1 1/2 hours after high water.
Vessels can lie alongside Riverside Quay out-
side this dock at any time of tide.
Humber Dock signals . — The same system of
signals as at Albert Dock.
St. Andrews Dock signals. — The tidal signals
are the same as those at Victoria Dock.
The following signals are shown from the flag-
staff on the southwestern side of the dock entrance :
By day .-- Framework ball close-up at
yardarm .
Dock closed .
At night. - Red light.
By day . - Framework ball half-mast. Depth sufficient
to come along
At night. - Green light.
side.
By day . - Cone at yardarm .
At night. - Green light over white light. Approach piers.
9–74 Tides . - It is high water at full and
change at Victoria Dock at 6 hours 20 minutes.
Springs rise 21 3/4 feet, neaps 16 3/4 feet.
9–75 Pilots . — Pilotage is compulsory.
9–76 Directions from Immingham to Hull .
- After passing Immingham , vessels should
be guided by the main channel buoyage and
steer to pass westward of the buoys marking
Clay Huts and Foul Holme Spit and eastward
of the buoys marking Halton Middle , Halton
Flat, and Skitter Sand . After passing east-
ward of Elbow Light Buoy No. 18 off Skitter
Sand the Thorgumbald Clough Lights should
be brought in range 135 ° astern , which leads
past Salt End ; thence in midchannel until
Salt End Lights come in range 108 ° astern ,
which range leads up the channel to Hull
Road or to the docks as required .
By night. – Proceed as directed in the day-
time using the lights of the channel buoyage
H.O. 35
and range lights instead of the marks them
selves .
Auxiliary lights ( sec. 9–65 ) are shown
downstream from the Salt End Oil Jetties to
assist vessels berthing at the Salt End Oil
Jetties .
9-77 KINGSTON UPON HULL (HULL ) (59 ° 45' N.,
0°17' W.), situated at the junction of the Hull River with
the Humber, 19 miles above Spurn Point, is a place of the
first mercantile importance.
The town stands upon a low level, and the southern face,
which skirts the Humber, is about 2 miles long. The tower
of the Church of Holy Trinity, Ranks Mill tower north
ward of Victoria Dock , and the clock tower on Riverside
Quay, are the chief objects which are seen in the approach
from below .
The population in 1951 was 299, 105 .
Docks. - King George Dock, the easternmost of all, has
an area of 53 acres and an average depth of 32 feet is main
tained in it; it is entered direct from the Humber by a lock
750 feet long and 85 feet wide, with average depths of 20
to 17 feet below the level of M. L. W. O. S. on the outer
and inner sills, respectively. The depths in the dredged
area in the approach to the lock are subject to change and
may be as much as 6 feet less than charted . There are
9,774 feet of quays.
There are 6 coaling berths, fitted with hoists and electric
conveyors capable of shipping 800 tons per hour ; there are
also large warehouses and sheds available for storage.
Four traveling pneumatic grain elevators are located
at King George Dock . Each has a maximum discharge
rate of 150 tons per hour.
Alexandra Dock has a total area of 54 acres, and a depth
of 31 to 33 feet; it is entered direct from the Humber by
a lock 546 feet long and 82 feet wide, with depths of 33 1/4
and 31 3/4 feet on the outer and inner sills, respectively.
The lock can be divided into two lengths of 321 and 221
feet. There are 13,391 feet of quays .
Victoria Dock has an area of 20 acres and a depth of
27 2/3 feet; it is entered from the Humber through a half
tide basin by gates 50 feet wide, with a depth of 25 feet on
the sill. It is also entered from the Old Harbor by a dry
pool basin by gates 45 feet wide, with a depth of 21 feet
on their sill. There are 4,760 feet of quays.
Albert Dock has an area of 24 1/2 acres with a depth of
30 feet; it is entered from the Humber by a lock 320 feet
long and 79 feet wide, with a depth of 28 1/4 feet at mean
high -water springs . There are 13,324 feet of quays at
Albert and William Wright Docks .
William Wright Dockis a continuation of Albert Dock,
the dimensions of the Albert Dock governing its entrance.
St. Andrews Dock has an area of 19 1/2 acres, with
depths of 25 to 31 feet; it is entered from the Humber by
a lock 250 feet long and 50 feet wide with a depth of 28
feet on the sill. There are 9,018 feet of quays.
The remaining docks are of smaller dimensions.
River Pier , 1,300 feet in length , runs westward from
the entrance of Alexandra Dock along the north side
of Hull Road . Ships of moderate draft can berth at any
stage of the tide , the minimum depth being 18 feet .
Repairs. - All repairs to hull and machinery are ex
ecuted with facility. There is a 100 -ton crane in Alexandra
 CHAPTER 10

THE HUMBER TO CROMER

10-1 GENERAL REMARKS ( H. 0. Chart oyster grounds.

4472).— The deep bight between the Humber and
Cromer, the upper part of which is known as the
Wasb, is for the most part occupied by numerous
and dangerous sands, some skirting the mainland,
while others lie out a considerable distance in the
offing; through these sands the several rivers
which have their outlets in the Wash , find their
way at low water. The rapidity of the tides in this
deep bight, the low character of its shores, and
the mist which almost constantly prevails, render
this the most difficult portion of the navigation of
the east coast, and consequently a more than com-
mon degree of vigilance is necessary when navigat-
ing in the locality.
10-2 The coast. - From Donna Nook, at the
entrance of the Humber, to Skegness, 21 miles to
the south -southeastward, at the entrance to the
Wash , the coast is composed of sand hills.
Landmarks. — The most conspicuous objects to
be seen are 4 targets on piles between Donna
Nook and Theddlethorpe, the water tower and
the convalescent home at Mablethorpe . In
very clear weather the tall spire of Louth
Church , as well as the Lincolnshire Downs
may be seen in the background .
Shoal flat. — The flat which fronts the Lincoln
shire coast shelves gradually from the mainland to
the 6 -fathom curve, which is about 10 miles off
shore abreast Saltfleet, and 5 miles abreast Ingold- them ; they then decline , being in some places not
mells Point; where it becomes merged in the
shoals forming the bar of Boston Deep.
10–3 Saltfleet, 3 1/2 miles southward of Donna
Nook, was formerly an important market town, at Mablethorpe and at Chapel St. Leonard.
the greater part of which was destroyed by an Storm signals are shown at Mablethorpe.
inundation of the sea . It has a conspicuous wind
mill and many trees, and abreast are some noted
Lifesaving . – A rocket apparatus is maintained
at Saltfleet.
10-4 Theddlethorpe, 3 miles southward of
Saltfleet, has 2 conspicuous churches, those of
East and West Theddlethorpe, which stand prom
inently forward near the coast line ; a clump of
trees is seen between them. Both churches have
towers. The masts of the radio station are con
spicuous. West Theddlethorpe is surmounted by
a flagstaff and weather cock. East Theddlethorpe
has a small pinnacle at each corner of the tower.
10-5 Radio station . There is a radio station
at Trusthorpe . It transmits navigational
warnings to vessels approaching or leaving
the Humber River .
A radio direction finder station is located
nearly 1 mile southwestward of Trusthope .
10–6 Mablethorpe, 3 miles farther south
ward, is a small watering place connected
to Louth by a railroad. Mablethorpe church
has a low tower with a pinnacle at each
corner , it stands close behind the sand hills .
Northward of Mablethorpe there is a long high
sand hill, and the coast guard station is 1 mile to
the southward of it.
Southward of Mablethorpe, the sand hills are
of moderate height for a mile or two, with a few
houses showing here and there between and upon
more than 15 to 20 feet high, and the shore is
defended by extensive groynes.
Coast guard . — There is a coast guard station
10–7 Sutton -on -Sea . — About 1 mile south
ward of Trusthorpe Mill is the small village of
149
( Chg 7)

H.O. 35
150 THE HUMBER TO CROMER
Sutton -on -Sea, very little of which can be seen
owing to the sand hills in front hiding it.
Ingoldmells Point is 8 miles southward of
Sutton -on -Sea . Within the point Addlethorpe and
Ingoldmells Churches are very plain objects, as is
also Ingoldmells Windmill.
10-8 The coast to Skegness, 2 miles south
ward of Ingoldmells Point, is low, few of the sand
hills being 20 feet high, and several windmills are
seen a little distance behind them. Winthorpe
Church is prominent.
10-9 OFFSHORE DANGERS. Protector
Overfalls, 8 miles eastward of Saltfleet, consist
principally of a ridge of sand extending, within the
5 -fathom curve, in a northerly and southerly
direction for 4 miles, with 2 1/2 fathoms upon the
shoalest part. There are 5 to 6 fathoms around,
with 7 and 8 fathoms to the westward , and it
shelves gradually to the eastward. There is a
small detached shoal of 4 1/2 fathoms about a
mile to the northward . There are also detached
patches of 4 and 4 1/2 fathoms a mile to the south
ward, and 4 3/4 fathoms a mile eastward. There
is a shoal ridge 2 miles long with 5 1/2 fathoms
over it 4 miles southeastward of Protector Over
falls .
These shoals are greatly in the way of vessels
proceeding from the Humber to the Wash .
Protector Light Buoy , a black conical
buoy showing a flashing white light, is
moored about 800 yards eastward of the
northern end of the shoalest patches of
Protector Overfalls .
10–10 Saltfleet, Theddlethorpe, and Trus
thorpe Overfalls, between Protector Overfalls and
the mainland, are a series of patches, so close
together that they are practically one, with 2 3/4
to 5 fathoms over them, lying out from 2 to 4
miles from the mainland, abreast the respective
places from which they take their names. There
is a 25 - foot patch about 3 miles east-north
eastward of Chapel Point.
A 2 3 / 4 -fathom patch lies at the southern end
of the Trusthorpe Overfalls, about 3 miles east
ward of Trusthorpe Church.
These shoals lie inshore of the track of large
H. 0. 35
vessels, and there is plenty of water over them
for small vessels.
10-11 Buoys.- " DZ ” Buoys numbered in
numerical order mark the limits of a firing
area ( sec . 9–9) which between Donna Nook
and Mablethorpe extends 4 to 5 miles off
shore .
A wreck , with a depth of 3 % fathoms over
it, lies about 5 miles east-northeastward of
Saltfleet. Several detached patches with
depths of 234 to 334 fathoms lie between 412
and 542 miles northeastward of Saltfleet .
10–12 Inner Dowsing Overfalls is a clus
ter of detached patches about 1/4 miles in ex
tent, with a least depth of 4 fathoms over
them , situated 5 to 6 miles southeastward of
Protector Overfalls .
Inner Dowsing Overfalls Buoy, a red and white
checkered can buoy surmounted by a red can top
mark , is moored on the northwestern edge of
Inner Dowsing Overfalls.
10–13 Inner Dowsing, 6 miles southeastward
from Protector Overfalls, is a very narrow ridge of
sand, extending 7 miles in a 355° and 175° direction,
and 800 yards wide, within the 5 -fathom curve.
In the center of the ridge there are several patches,
with under 3 fathoms. The least depth is 13/4 fath
oms. There is a deep gully to the westward of
this ridge, with depths of over 10 fathoms, the
greatest depth being 20 fathoms. The eastern side
of the ridge shelves off gradually to 11 fathoms.
There are three isolated patches with depths of
less than 6 fathoms to the southward of the ridge,
the least depth being 4 3/4 fathoms.
Extensive s hoa ling has been reported to
the northward and westward of North Inner
Dowsing. Pending a survey, mariners are cau
tioned to avoid this area.
10_14 Wrecks .- Several dangerous wrecks
lie eastward and northeastward of Inner Dow
sing shoal. For details of these wrecks , con
sult the latest best scale charts of the area .
A wreck, with a least depth of 334 fathoms
over it , is located about 4 miles east- south
eastward of Ingoldmells Point.
 DANGERS - WESTERN SIDE OF THE WASH
changes. Vessels navigating among them must
consequently do so with great care. On both sides
of the Wash they form a continuous chain , con
nected by the 3 -fathom curve.
Lynn Knock (53 °05' N., 0 °27' E., H. 0. Chart
4710) lies on the western side of the Wash ; it is,
as defined by the 5 -fathom curve , 14 miles long
north and south , and 600 yards wide, but of very
irregular outline. The least depth over it is 9
feet. The shoal is steep -to, and during springs
there are heavy overfalls on it. Off its northern
end are two detached shoals, with 28 and 29
feet of water, respectively.
Light buoy - Buoy. - North Lynn Knock Light
Buoy, a conical buoy painted black and showing
a flashing white light, is moored about 1
mile northeastward of the northern end of
Lynn Knock .
South Lynn Knock Buoy, a conical buoy
painted black , is moored on the southeast
end of Lynn Knock .
Outer Dogs Head lies about 2 miles westward
of Lynn Knock . It runs generally in a northerly
and southerly direction, and has several places
with depths of less than a fathom over them and
one place which dries.
Inner Dogs Head lies southward of Outer Dogs
Head and 2 1/2 miles from it. As defined by the
1 -fathom curve, it is 2 3/4 miles long in a north-
easterly and southwesterly direction and 1 mile
wide. This shoal dries 14 feet and a detached
portion about 800 yards southeastward of the
main shoal dries 3 feet.
Knock Shoals . - The Outer and Inner Knock
Shoals lie 1 mile westward of the Dogs Head .
As defined by the 1 -fathom curve, they are 3 1/4
miles long in a north -northeasterly and south-
southwesterly direction and 1,400 yards wide.
The Outer Knock dries 8 feet and the Inner Knock
8 feet; they are separated by a narrow channel
which has a least depth of 8 feet.
10–43 Buoys . - A red and white checkered
buoy is moored close northwestward of the
northern part of Outer Knock.
155
( Chg7 )
No. 7 Buoy is moored about 2/3 mile west
ward of the southwestern extremity of Inner
Dogs Head .
10-44 Long Sand . — This shoal is immediately
to the southward of the Dogs Head Shoals and
separated from them by Parlour Channel. Long
Sand runs in a southwesterly direction from the
channel for 5 miles, and is from 1 1/2 miles wide at
its northern end to 1 mile at its southern end ;
it dries 7 feet at its center and 6 feet on the Hook,
its eastern point, which is steep -to, with depths
over 10 fathoms at 300 yards from the drying
line.
The Ants . This sand bank is situated immedi
ately to the southwestward of Long Sand and is
separated from it by a very narrow channel. It is
1 mile long, 12 mile wide , and dries 7 feet.
Roger Sand, which includes Bar Sand on its
northwestern side and is joined to Hook Hill by
Toft Sand on its southwestern end, is immediately
south of The Ants and is separated from it by
Freeman Channel. It dries about 11 feet.
Freeman Beacon, surmounted by a red refuge
can and 35 feet in height, is on its northern edge.
Gat Sand is just to the southward of Roger
Sand, Gat Channel lying between them . This
sand is 2 1/2 miles long east and west, and dries
from 3 to 8 feet.
10–45 Channels into Boston Deep. - Parlour
Channel, 2 1/2 miles long and 300 yards wide be
tween the 2 -fathom curves, with a least depth of
11 feet at its inner end, is a side channel from the
Wash into Boston Deep ; it lies between Inner
Dogs Head and Long Sand. Northerly winds set
up a swell in the channel. Local knowledge is
necessary for the navigation of this channel.
Parlour Channel is marked by three buoys:
PA and PB are can buoys with red and white
checkers; Pi which marks the northern
H. O. 35
156 THE HUMBER TO CROMER
side of the channel, is a black conical buoy. These 10-48 BOSTON DEEP . — This channel, lead
buoys cannot be relied upon. ing to Boston, is 2 to 3 miles off but not quite
10-46 Freeman Channel (52° 58' N., 0 ° 14' E.) parallel to the Lincolnshire coast; its length from
connects Lynn Deep with Boston Deep. It lies just abreast Skegness Middle to Clay Hole is
between Long and Roger Sands and is 3 1/2 16 1/2 miles, with an average breadth of about
miles long and 200 yards wide at its narrowest part 1,200 yards.
between Freeman Beacon and The Ants; the least Vessels drawing 20 feet can reach Boston at
depth is 14 feet. The tidal current in Freeman springs, and 14 feet at neaps, but there is con
Channel sets in a northeasterly direction with the siderably more water in the deep itself.
ebb and in a southwesterly direction with the Vessels proceeding to Boston in 1960 were
flood . limited to a draft of 18 feet 6 inches . Loaded
The northern side of the channel is marked by vessels over 1,400 gross tons require the
black conical buoys, marked " F,” and numbered services of a tug prior to entering the river .
from the eastward from 1 to 3 ; from No. 1 buoy Scullridge Shoal is a detached shoal between
a flashing white light is exhibited and from No. 3 Long Sand and Friskney Flat.
a flashing white light. As defined by the 1 -fathom curve it runs in a
The southern side of this channel is marked by northeasterly and southwesterly direction for 1
can buoys, painted in red and white checkers, mile and has a breadth of 200 yards. It has a
marked " F " and lettered " A ," " B ," " C ,” and least charted depth of 1 foot.
" E ” from eastward. F. E. Lighted Buoy, showing 10_49 Buoyage . — The buoys marking the
a red flashing light, is moored about 13/4 miles northern channels of Boston Deep are de
westward of Freeman Beacon . scribed in sections 10–34 , 10—43 , and 10–45 .
A spherical buoy, painted in black and white The fairway in Boston Deep is marked by
horizontal bands and fitted with a black diamond lighted and unlighted buoys . All very small ,
top mark, is moored off the western entrance in di fficult to see and should not be relied on.
position 1.15 miles 286 ° from Freeman Beacon.
10_47 Gat Channel lies between Roger Sand
on the north and Gat Sand on the south ; it is
only used by local fishing vessels.

H.O. 35
 BOSTON
100 tons an hour or 1,000 tons between tides . Three
days ' notice of requirements should be given .
Fuel oil and diesel oil are supplied by barge at the
quays .
Communication . - Boston is connected with the Great
Northern Railway, and with Hull , Wisbech, London , Leith ,
Grangemouth , Dundee, and Hamburg by steamer.
Hospital. There is a hospital close to the dock .
10–64 River Welland . — The channel to the en
trance of this river lies in the Fossdyke Wash , be
tween the Scalp to the westward and Herring Hill
and Middle Sands to the eastward ; it is 3 1/2
miles long in a southwesterly direction from abreast
New Cut Channel to the outer end of the em
banked portion of the river, from whence the
banks are marked by beacons. The channel is
narrow and intricate, and although it is to a cer
tain extent buoyed , local knowledge is necessary to
navigate it. The channel is lighted during the
winter.
Between the light beacon at the southern
edge of the entrance to New Cut and the
original entrance to the embanked portion of
the Welland River, new training walls were
completed in 1953 .
From the outer end of the original embanked
portion the river runs in a southwesterly direc
tion for 3 miles to Fossdyke Bridge. During the
summer it is encumbered with deposit brought in
by the flood, and the width, which averages 120
feet from Fossdyke Bridge to the reservior, de
creases to 60 or 70 feet from thence to Spalding,
12 miles above its junction with the Witham .
10-65 Pilots. — A pilot vessel lies on the south
ern side of the channel, 4 miles below Fossdyke
Bridge; there are two pilots, but pilotage is not
compulsory. The signal for Fossdyke pilot
is the pilot flag over a red burgee.
10-66 DANGERS ON EASTERN SIDE OF
THE WASH - Burnham Flats .-- These flats, as
defined by the 3 -fathom curve, are triangular in
shape, the base extending eastward along the
coast of Norfolk as far as Wells, 11 1/2 miles, the
apex being 10 1/2 miles north by eastward of
Gore Point. The depths over the shoalest parts
vary from 6 feet to awash .
159
( Chg 7)
Burnham Ridge is 1 mile long, parallel to the
western edge of Burnham Flat, and 1 1/2 miles
southwestward of its northern point. It has a
head with 18 feet of water on it, near the north
ern end and 11 feet near the southern end .
Woolpack is the southwestern part of Burnham
Flats ; its southern edge is 4 miles north of Gore
Point, and is formed by the northern side of the
Sledway, which separates Woolpack from Middle
Bank;
10-67 Buoys. - Woolpack Buoy, a red can
buoy , is moored about 14 miles west-south
westward of the southwestern end of Wool
pack .
A red can buoy is moored off the western side
of Burnham Ridge.
Light buoy.—Burnham Flat Lighted Bell
Buoy, spherical, painted in red and white hori
zontal bands and showing a flashing white light,
is moored off the northern point of the flat.
10-68 Middle Bank (53 °01' N., 0 °32 ' E.),
about 2 miles north of Gore Point, is triangular in
shape, a little oyer 1 1/2 miles long, and dries 1 to
4 feet. It is separated from the Woolpack by the
Sledway.
Gore Middle lies 1,000 yards eastward of the
southeastern corner of Middle Bank and dries
2 feet.
10-69 Sunk Sand, separated from Middle
Bank by a channel 1 1/4 miles wide, is of a broken
triangular shape with apex to the northward.
The western arm dries 8 feet. It is steep-to on its
western side.
South Sunk Sand lies to the southwestward of
Sunk Sand and is practically a continuation of it,
being separated from it by a very narrow channel
with only 1 foot in it. It is 1 1/4 miles long and
dries 6 feet near its center.
Sunk Light Buoy, painted in red and white
checkers and showing a group flashing white light,
is moored off the western edge of South Sunk Sand.
10–70 The Bays Channel, northward of Gore
Point on the eastern side of the Wash, is a narrow,
shallow, and uneven channel, between Gore Mid
H. O. 35
160 THE HUMBER TO CROMER
dle, Middle Bank, and Sunk Sands to the north
westward and the sands off Gore and Hunstanton
Points to the southeastward ; it is protected from
northerly winds by Middle Bank, under which
small vessels sometimes anchor. Vessels of light
draft, with south and southwesterly winds, prefer
this channel to the one between Burnham Flats
and Docking Shoal.
The depth varies from 7 to 17 feet, but the
shoalest water, 3 feet, lies to the eastward 'of
Sunk Sand .
In the channel between Middle Bank and Sunk
Sand the least water a vessel need pass through is
8 feet and this is the best passage into Lynn Deep
from the Bays; but another, used by coasters, is
south of Sunk Sand, where the least depth is 3 feet.
There are several other passages into the Wash
used by coasters between the Woolpack and
Middle and the Middle and Sunk Sands.
10–71 Directions. - The Bays Channel should
only be used by vessels of light draft, and then
only with local knowledge, as it is crooked, and
the bottom uneven . Vessels should pass south
ward of Gore Middle and follow the deepest water
shown on the chart by fixing the position by bear
ings of objects on shore, and pass into the deeps
south of Sunk Sand with Hunstanton water tower
astern bearing 092°, the least water being 3 feet.
10—72 Outer Ferrier Sand , which dries 1
foot, lies about 1 mile southward of South
S'unk Sand and 1 % miles offshore. Ferrier
Sand, which is joined to the coast at its
southern end , lies about 34 mile southward of
Outer Ferrier Sand .
10–73 Pandora and Blackguard Sands.
These sands form one continuous bank , Old Bell
Middle forming the northern, Blackguard Sand
the middle, and Pandora Sand the southern por
tion. They are separated from Seal and Daseleys
Sands to the westward by Daseleys Sledway.
To the eastward, they are separated from Style
mans Middle and Peter Black Sands by Bull Dog
Channel. Pandora Channel connects by its south
ern extremity Daseleys and Bull Dog Sands.
A barrier wall about 34 mile in length and
marked by beacons on either end is located
in a position about 234 miles northwestward
of the range lights at the entrance to Lynn
Cut .
H.O. 35
Bull Dog Channel lies between Blackguard
and Pandora Sands to the westward and Style
mans and Peter Black Sands to the eastward.
10–74 Light buoys . — No. 1 light buoy, a con
ical buoy painted black and showing a flashing
white light, is moored about 34 mile northward
of the northern extremity of Old Bell Middle .
No. 3 Lighted Bell Buoy, a black conical bell
buoy showing a group flashing white light, is
moored about 700 yards northeastward of the
northern extremity of Stylemans Middle.
A black conical buoy, showing a group flashing
white light, is moored about 1/2 mile southward
of the southern extremity of Stylemans Middle.
A tide gage is attached to a 33 - foot bea con
located on the eastern side of Stylemans
Middle .
10-75 Seal and Daseleys Sands. Seal Sand
is the northern and Daseleys Sand the southern
portion of a large sand bank, extending 4 1/2
miles in a northerly and southerly direction, and
1 1/2 miles in an easterly and westerly direction,
which lies about 700 yards westward of Pandora
and Blackguard Sands.
10–76 Thief Sand, which dries 7 feet for 2 1/2
miles in a north and south direction , lies about 600
yards westward of Seal and Daseleys Sands, and
is separated from them by Teetotal Channel.
A light is shown on a refuge beacon located
on the southern end of Thief Sand .
Targets. — Two targets, each consisting of a
barge, are moored on Daseleys Sand about 3,200
yards northeastward, and 2,400 yards east- south
eastward of the refuge beacon on Thief Sand .
10–77 THE OUSE . — The estuary of the Ouse
has undergone many remarkable changes. Orig
inally it was close to the Norfolk coast, occupying
what is still termed the Old Channel. In 1773 it
shifted 1 1/2 miles to the westward to Bull Dog
Channel, where it remained until 1812, when it
again moved 4 miles more westerly to its present
position. Considerable alterations have since been
made in the channel of the Ouse below Lynn, and
a straight cut 4 miles long, extending from Lynn
across the marshes and through the sands, has
been made.
10–78 Old Lynn Channel, leading to Old Lynn
 THE OUSE
Road, is between the Westmark Knock to the
westward , and Roaring Middle and Whiting to
the eastward . It runs to the southward , curving to
the southeastward for 5 miles, and is about 1,400
yards wide at the entrance, narrowing to 400 yards
between the Whiting and Outer Westmark Knock .
The depths vary from about 24 to 49 feet (1943)
in the fairway as far as Old Lynn Road.
Buoyage.- Old Lynn Channel is marked on
its western side by black conical buoys, and
on its eastern side by can buoys painted in
red and white checkers . Buoys in this area
are liable to be moved without notice, how-
ever , to meet changes in the channel .
10-79 Old Lynn Road (52° 52' N. , 0°17' E.),
which is really a part of Old Lynn Channel, is the
area abreast of Whiting Shoal, about 1,600 yards
long, from abreast of Whiting Beacon to the south-
ward, and about 400 yards wide. The best anchor-
age in it is found in 26 feet, mud, sand, and clay,
in which anchors hold well.
Upper Lynn Channel is the channel above Old
Lynn Road ; it runs from the road in a south-
easterly direction for 5 miles, to Lynn Cut en-
trance, and lies between Thief, Daseleys, and
Pandora Sands to the northward and Hull and
Breast Sands to the southward . It is tortuous,
and has a shoal which dries 2 feet halfway through.
In 1958 the principal channel of approach
to Lynn Cut was through the New Channel to
Kings Lynn and through Cork Hole to Lynn
Cut and had depths of 1 foot to 8 feet in its
southern part. The entrance is eastward of
No. 1 Lighted Bell Buoy and the channel is
marked by light buoys and buoys .
Caution . The position of the buoys are
often changed to mark the varying direction
of the channel and bank formations.
In 1948 large vessels anchored near Roaring
Middle Light Float. Smaller vessels may anchor
in Cork Hole.
10–80 Lynn Cut is the mouth of the River
Ouse artificially defined by embankments 10 to
15 feet high ; its length is 2 3/4 miles in a 162°
direction from its northern end ; the northern ends
on both sides for about 2 1/4 miles are rough
training walls which dry 9 feet. At its outer end
its width at high water is about 530 feet, and at
low water about 365 feet; at its inner end the
161
( Chg 7)
widths are 485 and 320 feet, respectively .
The depth in the cut at low water is from 2 to
12 feet. Vessels of 20 and 14 feet draft can reach
the town at high -water springs and neaps, respec
tively, but at low -water springs there is some
times only 1 foot in the channel, which is con
stantly changing.
Vessels using the channel in 1959 were
limited to a draft of 16 feet at high water
springs, 11 feet at neaps , and a maximum
length of 250 feet .
10-81 Range lights . - Two range lights, 235
yards apart, are exhibited from poles, 40 and 22
feet in height, on the eastern side of the embank
ment; in range, bearing 158° they lead through
the entrance to the cut.
A light is shown from a red pile structure, 33
feet in height, on the western side of the cut.
An overhead cable , with a clearance of
about 160 feet at MHWS , crosses Lynn Cut
about 1 mile north -northwestward of the en
trance of King's Lynn Dock s.
10–82 Roaring Middle . — This shoal, which
dries for 1 mile, is the end of a long narrow strip
of shoal water. As measured by the 3 -fathom
curve, it extends 5 miles in a northerly direction
from Lynn Road.
The western edge of the shoal is marked by
three can buoys painted in red and wbite checkers.
Roaring Middle Light and Bell Float .—A
light float, painted red and marked “ Roaring
Middle " and showing a group flashing white
light , is moored about 144 miles north-north
ea stward of the northern extremity of Roaring
Middle .
10–83 Whiting Shoal is situated on the south
ern end of Roaring Middle, and forms the north
eastern boundary of Lynn Road . It dries 3 feet
over an area of about 1,000 yards in a northerly
and southerly direction, and of 600 yards in an
easterly and westerly direction, but the 6 -foot
curve, running close to the drying curve on the
eastern and western side of the shoal, extends
about 1,200 yards to the northward of the drying
area .
Beacon . - A refuge beacon, 23 feet high, sur
mounted by a cylinder, stands on the western
edge of the dry part.
H.O. 35
162 THE HUMBER TO CROMER
Tide gauge.-A tide gauge, the zero of which is
set to the level of the outer dock sill at King's
Lynn, is attached to the Whiting Beacon .
10–84 Bar Flat, on the western side of Old
Lynn Channel, is the head of a shoal tongue ex
tending from the entrance to Wisbech Channel,
River Nene ; it has 18 feet at its tip.
Bar Flat Buoy, a black conical buoy, is moored
off the northern end of Bar Flat .
10–85 King's Lynn Harbor. — There are two
mooring buoys outside the dock entrance which
may be used by vessels. There is 7 feet in this
berth . At low water there is a depth less than 6
feet generally over the harbor.
There are small wharves above the docks at
which vessels drawing not more than 12 feet can
lie on the mud.
Canals . - King's Lynn is connected with Bed
ford and Cambridge by the Ouse River and canals.
10–86 Docking signals. - A square blue flag by
day, or a red light at night, is hoisted at a flagstaff
near the entrance to Alexandra Dock when ves
sels may enter.
A square red flag by day or a green light by
night indicates that vessels are leaving the dock
and that vessels in the harbor are to keep clear.
The dock gates are open about 1 hour before
high water and close very shortly after high water.
No flags are hoisted when the dock gates are
closed .
Fog signal. — A fog signal is sounded when neces
sary , at about the time of high water, from the
southern pier of the entrance to Alexandra Dock .
Storm signals are displayed at King's Lynn.
Harbor bylaws are in force with respect to land
ing, etc. , of petroleum and calcium carbide. Copies
of these bylaws may be obtained from the dock
master. Particular attention should be given
to the regulation requiring a proper number
of hands on board at tide times to handle
mooring tackle.
Tides. — The time and height of tides is neces
sarily very uncertain, and much influenced by the
wind.
H.O. 35
10–87 Pilots . - A pilot vessel for King's Lynn
cruises northward of No. 1 black conical light
buoy, moored at the northern end of Old Bell
Middle at the seaward entrance to New Lynn
Channel. Pilotage is compulsory for merchant
vessels above Bar Flat Buoy and in the new chan
nel to King's Lynn.
10–88 Directions. — The land in the vicinity
of Old Lynn Channel being flat and low , no land
marks are available for navigating it. Vessels
will therefore have to depend on the buoys and
beacons, and the lead , but as the channels are
liable to change and the tides to set across them ,
especially in the upper part, the services of a pilot
are indispensable. From a position 1,000 yards
westward of Roaring Middle Light and Bell Buoy
steer for the entrance to Old Lynn Channel be
tween Bar Flat and Roaring Middle Buoys, then
steer through the channel, leaving the conical
buoys on the starboard hand and the can buoys
on the port hand, and passing through Old Lynn
Road , turn to the southeastward through the upper
part of the channel, and, bringing the range lights
in line 158°, steer for the entrance of the Cut and
pass through it to the docks. The approach
to Lynn Cut is through Cork Hole as describ
ed in section 10–79 .
10-89 KING'S LYNN (52 °45 ' N., 0 ° 24 ' E.) , situated
upon the eastern bank of the Ouse, 3 miles within the Cut
entrance and 8 miles above Lynn Road, extends along the
river for 1 1/2 miles. A finely wooded country rises behind
it in gentle eminences, and in front of it is a flat alluvial
district. Owing to the low situation of the town , the two
towers of St. Margaret's Church, the spire of St. Nicholas,
and several tall chimneys are all that can be seen of it from
the sea. The population in 1944numbered 23,528 .
Docks. — There are 2 wet docks, the Alexandra ( outer)
and the Bentinck (inner).
The Alexandra Dock has an area of 6 1/4 acres and
depth of 21 feet. It is entered by a lock 200 feet long and
 RIVER NENE
50 feet wide, with a depth of 25 3/4 feet at mean high-
water springs. It has 2,000 feet of quays.
The Bentinck Dock has an area of 9 1/2 acres and a
depth of 21 feet. It is entered from Alexandra Dock by a
lock 200 feet long and 50 feet wide, with a pair of gates
and a depth of 21 feet. It has 2,750 feet of quays.
There is a 12-ton crane , some small cranes , and
facilities for handling cargoes. The quays are connected
with the North Eastern Railway system .
There is a warping buoy in the center of each dock. In
Bentinck Dock there is a hydraulic coal tip on the northern
wall for bunkering vessels. On the southern wall there are
several hydraulic cranes for discharging vessels.
Repairs . - All ordinary repairs to hull and machinery
can be executed .
Supplies . Supplies are plentiful. Water can be ob
tained by pipeline at the quays in both wet docks .
Coal is easily procured , about 1,250 tons being kept
in stock ; vessels are coaled in the docks . An ample
supply of diesel oil and fuel oil is maintained . Deliv
ery is made by tank truck .
Hospital . — There is a hospital in the town .
Communication .-- King's Lynn is connected by railroad
with the general system .
10–90 River Nene .-The River Nene is
entered from the northward across Bar Flat
(sec . 10–84) through Wisbech Channel and
Wisbech Cut. Vessels drawing 17" feet at
springs and those drawing 1342 feet at neaps
have reached the town of Wisbech; the
depths, however, are liable to change.
Wisbech Channel is formed on its western
side by Old South Sand and on its eastern
side by Outer Westmark Knock and Wisbech
Eye (sec . 10–40 ). A pile, drying 4 feet, is
located near the northern end of Outer West
mark Knock .
10–91 Lights . - Westmark Knock Light
Beacon stands on Outer Westmark Knock
near its northwestern end on the eastern side
of the channel.
Light Buoy No. 1 is moored on the western
side of the entrance nearly 9 mile northward
of Westmark Knock Light Beacon .
A light beacon stands on the western side
163
lang 7 )
of Wisbech Channel at its entrance between
Old South Sand and Wisbech Eye .
The remainder of the channel is marked
by light beacons .
Firing area.-Holbeach firing danger area
is marked on its eastern limits by :
Three conical buoys , each painted in red
and yellow stripes, the northern one with a
reflector, are moored in positions close west
ward of the channel about Y4 mile , 1 mile ,
and 142 miles , respectively , northward of
Westmark Knock Light Beacon.
Several beacons stand in this area .
10–92 The channel .– A deep , with a
depth of 50 feet abreast Outer Westmark
Knock , extends about 142 miles to the south
ward from Bar Flat. From abreast the south
ern end of Outer Westmark Knock the channel
has depths of 1 to 5 feet; it is tortuous and
subject to change. Navigational aids conform
to the uniform system .
10–93 Wisbech Cut, which is the embank
ed entrance to the River Nene , is about 6
miles southward of the bar; it runs nearly
straight southward for 3 % miles to Sutton
Bridge and has a breadth of 120 feet. The
entrance to Wisbech Cut is marked by towers
on the eastern and western embankments .
Lights are shown when required from posts
on the embankments between the entrance to
Wisbech Cut and the port of Wisbech.
10–94 Sutton Bridge (52 ° 46' N. , 0°12' E.) .—
Three miles above the entrance the navigation is
crossed by Sutton Bridge, a revolving iron struc
ture, with two openings, each 60 feet wide. Ves
sels discharge below the bridge on the western side.
Vessels usually tow up from the road. The navi
gation is free of shoals.
H.O. 35
 164 THE HUMBER TO CROMER
Sutton Bridge — Signals . — 1. Vessels approach-
ing the bridge by day, from either direction, and
requiring to pass through, must, as soon as they
come in sight of the bridge, exhibit a flag at their
foremast to indicate that they require the bridge
to be opened. When vessels are towed the tug
must carry the flag. By night the vessel or tug,
as the case may be, must exhibit a red light, 6 feet
below the regulation masthead white light.
2. If from any cause by day the opening of the
bridge will have to be delayed, two balls painted
red and 4 feet apart vertically, will be hoisted on
a 20-foot mast erected on the deck of the turret
until the bridge can be opened , when they will
be lowered .
3. By night 1 red light on the turret will in
dicate that the bridge is across the river. While
the bridge is being opened this light will gradually
turn until it is obscured, when a white light will
be visible, indicating that the waterway is clear
for vessels to pass through. If from any cause the
opening of the bridge will have to be delayed , a
second red light will be exhibited above the exist
ing one until the bridge can be opened, when the
second light will be again obscured and the bridge
opened as above.
1
4. For the purpose of guiding vessels through the
bridge white lights have been fixed on each of the
dolphins, and range lights have been established
on the eastern bank .
5. Steamers, tugs, etc., must sound their whistles
at frequent intervals until it is observed that the
attention of the bridgeman is obtained. Vessels
without steam power must similarly sound their
foghorns.
10–95 Tides. — The tide is rapid during springs,
but with freshets the neap flood sometimes does
not reach the town. Springs rise 20 1/2 feet at
Sutton Bridge and 15 feet at Wisbech. The cur-
rent during the flood runs for 4 hours at Sutton
Bridge and for 3 hours at Wisbech .
10–96 Pilots. There are three Wisbech pilots
H.O. 35
under a master ; they board at the road. The
pilot cutter meets vessels off Bar Flat
Buoy when previous notice has been given
to the Harbor Master, displays a red and
white flag , and is marked “ No. 3WI. ”
Pilotage is compulsory.
10-97 WISBECH is on the Nene, 12 miles above its out
let .The town, which is ancient, and the largest in the Isle
of Ely , stands upon both banks of the river, which is here
crossed by an iron bridge; it is the principal market town
in this part of the country; the corn market is important,
and quantities of grain are annually exported . Timber is
the principal import. Wisbech Canal connects the Nene
with the Ouse. În 1931 the population numbered 12,005 .
Quays . — At the town there is a depth of from 1 to 5 feet
at the quays.
Communication. — The Midland Railway Co. has a
coaldrop at Wisbech , in connection with the river; and
there is also a branch line of the Great Eastern Railway.
10-98 THE COAST EASTWARD OF GORE
POINT (52 ° 59' N., 0 ° 32' E. , H. O. Chart 4710). —
From Gore Point the coast, which consists of sand
hills, trends to the eastward for 5 1/2 miles to
Scald (Scolt) Head , its continuity being bro
ken only by Thornham and Brancaster Harbors ;
just to the eastward of Thornham Harbor it
is fronted by clay and stones , which dry out
for some distance .
Behind Gore Point appear Holme Church, a
plain and prominent object; the fine old church
of Thornham , with its ruined tower ; Titchwell
Church, with a slender spire ; the square tower of
Brancaster Church among the trees. Holme Hall,
a large red brick house at the west end of a wood
showing upon the skyline a short distance from
Brancaster Down, is a very plain object. There
is a conspicuous lifeboat house (to the westward
of which is a large red brick building) on the coast
in front of Brancaster Staith . Behind these ob
jects is an elevated range of hills, moderately
wooded, on the western end of which Ringstead
Windmill also stands boldly forward.
10-99 Scald (Scolt) Head (52 ° 59' N., 0 ° 41'
E.) is a remarkable long sand hill and is the
most northerly point on this coast.
Thornham , a small and indifferent harbor, is
formed by a creek the channel of which crosses a
broad sandy foreshore and is constantly varying
 CHAPTER 11
CROMER TO ORFORDNESS , WITH YARMOUTH AND SHOALS IN THE APPROACH
11-1 THE COAST FROM CROMER (52 °56 '
N., 1 °19' E., H. 0. Chart 4473) runs almost in a
straight line to the southeastward for 18 1/2
miles, to Winterton Ness, where it curves to the
southward. To the southeastward it continues
high for 1 mile, with indications of extensive land
slips; in fact, the whole of the mud cliffs (as they
are termed ) from Cromer to Happisburgh, at
10 1/2 miles southeastward of it, being formed of
diluvial matter, principally clay with masses of
chalk embedded in it, is subject to incessant in
roads of the sea. It is fronted by a submarine
forest.
After passing Foulness off Cromer the whole of
the coast thence to Happisburgh is fairly clear,
and may be approached with the lead, except
abreast Trimingham , where shoal water of 4 1/2
fathoms extends 1 1/4 miles off, and patches, with
4 1/4 and 5 fathoms over them , respectively, also lie
about 1 1/2 miles off Mundesley and Happisburgh,
for which reason the shore thereabouts should not
be approached nearer than a depth of 9 fathoms.
11-2 Aspect. — The village of Overstrand, 1 mile
to the southeastward of Cromer Lighthouse,
stands back from a lower part of the cliff, and
behind is well wooded hill and dale; a large hotel
(in ruins) is prominent to the southeastward
of the village. The cliff again rises towards
Sidestrand, 144 miles farther . The village of
Trimingham , at 144 miles southeastward of
Sidestrand, also stands back a little from the
cliff. Just southeastward of Trimingham is
Bea conhill House, a small building on the
top of the highest hill over the cliff, which
is a conspicuous object from seaward. There is a
conspicuous high mast close by Beaconhill House.
A fixed red obstruction light is shown from this
high mast.
Southward of Mundesley, the cliff continues
high for more than a mile, then descends to Bac
ton, and to Happisburgh ; the average height is not
more than 20 feet. Several churches with square
towers show behind the coast line ; the most con
spicuous is Bacton . Stow Hill Mill is also
conspicuous, but from close inshore it is sometimes
hidden by the higher slope in front of it.
11-3 Mundesley (52 °53' N., 1 ° 26' E .).— The
cliff, generally of uniform height from Sidestrand
to Trimingham , gradually declines towards Mun
desley, which is seated in a score or break in it,
at 13/4 miles farther southeastward ; here, sev
eral large breakwaters have been built to resist
the encroachment of the sea. The village is small
and well built.
Coast guard . — There are coast guard stations
at Mundesley.
Rocket apparatus is maintained at Mundesley.
11-4 Happisburgh (Haisborough ), situated
4 3/4 miles southeastward of Mundesley, stands
upon a rounded hillock a short distance back from
the cliffs, and but few of the houses are seen from
the sea . The church adjoining the northwest side
of the village, a lofty structure, with an embattled
tower, 150 feet high, is one of the most prominent
objects on the coast. Owing to the cliff in front
having an understratum of sand and gravel, the
sea has made rapid advances upon it.
Haisborough Light. - A light is exhibited from
a tower 85 feet high, painted white with three red
bands, erected about 600 yards southeastward of
the church. The lighthouse is connected by tele
phone with the Happisburgh post office.
A wreck with 372 fathoms over it, marked
by a buoy, lies about 1 1/3 miles north -north
eastward of Haisborough Light.
171
lang 71
H.O. 35
 172 CROMER TO ORFORDNESS
Coast guard . — There is a coast guard station at
Happisburgh, where a rocket apparatus is main
tained .
11-5 The coast from Happisburgh to Winter
ton Ness, 9 miles southeastward, is clear, and may
be approached by the lead.
Depths of from 34 to 37 feet lie outside the 6
fathom curve within a distance of about 1 1/2
miles northeastward of Winterton Ness.
The change from cliff to sand hills occurs about
1 mile to the southward of Haisborough Light
house. The sand hills are from 30 to 40 feet high
at Palling, 3 1/2 miles southeastward of Happis
burgh, and lower from thence to Winterton Ness,
5 1/2 miles farther.
The chief landmarks are Waxham Church with
a thick conspicuous tower, Ingraham Church with
a high prominent tower, and Hickling Church,
which is prominent.
Coast guard . — There is a coast guard station at
Palling, where a lifeboat and a rocket apparatus
are maintained .
11-6 Winterton Ness is distinguished by a
high sand hill. The village of Winterton is behind
the sand hills, but the lofty tower of its church is
a fine seamark, visible many miles seaward, and
forms an excellent guide to the northern entrance
to Yarmouth Roads. Behind this church Martham
Church , about 2 miles inland, is conspicuous.
Landmarks (52 ° 43 ' N., 1°42' E .).— The disused
lighthouse, a red cylindrical tower, 69 feet in
height, surmounting a building, stands on an
eminence 500 yards to the southward of Winter
ton and a little back from the shore.
Shoal.—The 3 - fathom curve extends from
the coast just northward of Winterton Ness
for about 2/3 mile .
Coast guard - Lifeboat . - There is a coast
guard station at Winterton , where a lifeboat
is maintained .
H.O. 35
11-7 The coast. - From Winterton Ness the
coast is sandy and straight in a 162 ° direction for
a distance of 4 1/2 miles to Caister Point, and
fairly steep -to ; it is backed by sandy cliffs and
sand hills, which terminate at Caister Point.
The village of East Caister is 600 yards within
Caister Point. The coast guard flagstaff on the
end of the sand hills, the church, the reservoir
siphon pipe close to the church, a large conspicuous
tower, and a hotel on the cliff just north of the vil
lage are the chief objects visible from seaward .
Conspicuous masts are located about 2 1/2 miles
northwestward of Caister Point.
From Caister Point the coast is low and sandy
and trends southward for 4 1/2 miles to Great
Yarmouth Haven . Just to the southward of
Caister Point the 3 -fathom curve extends 300
yards from the coast and from thence it gradually
approaches toward it until abreast Yarmouth. A
drying shoal extends from the mainland eastward
to South Caister Buoy, situated about 1 mile
southeast of Caister Point.
There is a flagstaff on the coast northward of
Yarmouth ; St. Nicholas Church spire and a
chimney 125 feet high near it ; Royal Naval Hos
pital ; a chimney 180 feet high ; Nelson Monu
ment ; and Gorleston Church are conspicuous
objects from seaward .
Note . - A light is shown from Nelson Monu
ment . This light will be shown only in bad
weather as a navigational aid to vessels at anchor
in Yarmouth Roads.
11-8 Coast guard . — There is a coast guard
station at Caister Point, where an auxiliary watch
is kept ; no lifesaving appliances are maintained
here.
11-9 THE WOULD AND HAISBOROUGH
GAT (52 °55' N., 1 °40' E., H. 0. Chart 4473).
The Would, a channel 16 miles long and 7 miles
wide, begins abreast Cromer, and is continued
between Haisborough Sand and the coast of Nor
folk , with the outlets through Haisborough Gat
 HAISBOROUGH GAT
to the southeastward , and Cockle Gateway and
Barley Picle to the southward.
It has depths from 8 to 13 fathoms at its north-
western end, and from 11 to 21 fathoms at its
southeastern end.
Haisborough Gat (52° 48' N., 1055 ' E.), the
southeastern exit from The Would, is between
the 3 shoals, Haisborough Sand, Hammond Knoll, extremity.
and Winterton Ridge to the northeastward, and
Winterton Shoal and Newarp Bank to the south-
westward. It is a clear passage 4 miles wide, with
depths of 10 to 21 fathoms, and the only safe and
suitable channel for vessels of deep draft at all
times.
An irregularly -shaped foul area exists in
Haisborough Gat. This area extends from a
position about 1 mile southward of the south-
ern end of Haisborough Sand in a southeast-
ern direction to Newarp Banks thence south-
ward to abreast Cross Sand (sec . 11–25 ) .
11-10 Dangers in the Would and Haisborough
Gat - Haisborough Sand . — This shoal on the
northeastern side of the Would lies 8 miles from
and parallel to the Norfolk coast. As defined by
the 10 -fathom curve, it is crook shaped, extending
12 miles from its northwestern point in a south-
easterly direction to the curve, and from thence 5
miles north -northwesterly to the point of the
crook ; it is about 1 mile wide. This shoal, which
is steep -to all around, has a least depth of 1 foot
and its position is generally but not always in-
dicated by breakers.
Haisborough Tail, which lies parallel with and 2
miles eastward of the southern part of Haisborough
Sand, has a least depth of 142 fathoms over it.
11-11 Haisbro’ Light Vessel (52 °59' N., 1 °85'
E., H. 0. Chart 4473 ).-- A light is exhibited from
a light vessel, painted red, and marked " Haisbro ','
moored in 11 1/2 fathoms off the northwestern
point of the shoal.
A fog diaphone is sounded from Haisbro ' Light
Vessel and she is equipped with a radio-
telephone.
11-12 Buoys.-- Haisborough Sand is marked
by the following buoys:
North Haisbro ' Buoy, spherical, painted red
and white in horizontal bands, surmounted by a
can top mark is moored in 9 fathoms on the north
western point of the shoal.
173
( Chg 71
East Haisbro' Buoy, black conical, surmounted
by a conical top mark, is moored in 15 fathoms on
the eastern side of the shoal.
North Middle Haisbro' Buoy, a can painted in
red and white checkers, is moored in 10 fathoms
on the western edge of the shoal, about 13/4
miles south - southeastward of the northwestern
Middle Haisbro' Buoy , a can painted red , is
moored in 13 fathoms on the western edge of the
shoal, about 5 miles southeastward of the north
western extremity.
South Middle Light Buoy, a light and bell buoy
painted in red and white checkers and showing
a group flashing white light, is moored in 13 fath
oms 1 1/2 miles northwestward from the southern
end of the shoal. It has a radar reflector.
South Haisbro' Buoy, a can painted in red and
white checkers, surmounted by a red can top mark ,
is moored in 10 fathoms on the southeastern edge
of the shoal.
11-13 Hammond Knoll, lying just eastward of
Haisborough Tail, is similar to Haisborough Sand
in shape, but about 74 miles long and 1,400 yards
wide, as defined by the 10 -fathom curve . The least
depth on it is about 4 feet on its southeast
ern part.
Buoys . — The knoll is marked by the under
mentioned buoys:
North Hammond Knoll Buoy , black conical,
moored in 10 fathoms about 234 miles north
northwestward of the southernmost wreck
which lies on the knoll.
South Hammond Knoll Buoy , a red can buoy ,
is moored at the southern end of the shoal ,
about 1 % miles south - southeastward of the
same wreck .
11-14 Wrecks . - Numerous dangerous wrecks,
a few of which are marked by buoys showing green
lights, lie sunk in The Would , Haisborough Gat,
and in the area northward and northeastward of
Hammond Knoll. For locations of these wrecks
and the buoys marking them see H.O. Chart 4473 .
11-15 Winterton Ridge (52 °50' N., 2°01 ' E.).
-The northern end of this ridge overlaps the
southern part of Hammond Knoll, and then runs
parallel to it to the southward for 7 1/2 miles;
it is 1 mile wide within the 10 -fathom curve. The
least depth on it is 2 1/4 fathoms, situated near
the center of the shoal; it has from 12 to 18
fathoms around it.
H. 0. 35
174 CROMER TO ORFORDNESS
The area between Winterton Ridge and Smiths
Knoll is known to fishermen as the Middle Ground,
and the soundings on it are very irregular.
North Winterton Ridge Buoy, black conical,
with a cone top mark, is moored 1 1/4 miles north
ward of the 2 1 / 4 -fathom head .
South Winterton Ridge Light Buoy, a spherical
buoy painted in red and white horizontal bands
and showing a group flashing white light, is
moored about 2 1/2 miles southeastward of the
2 1 /4 -fathom head .
11-16 Hearty Knoll. — The northern end of
this shoal, as defined by the 10 -fathom curve, lies
about 2 miles east -southeastward of the shoalest
part of Winterton Ridge; from thence it runs for
6 miles in the general direction of the shoals
previously described. The general depths over
it are from 5 to 9 fathoms, but the least water is a
head of 4 3/4 fathoms situated 2 miles from its
southern end.
Depths of less than 10 fathoms extend about
31/4 miles southward from the northern extremity
of Hearty Knoll which is thus practically joined
to the southern end of Winterton Ridge.
11-17 Newarp Banks ( H. 0. Chart 4473) are
three banks on the southwestern side of Hais
borough Gat, which lie 7 3/4, 83/4, and 7 1/2
miles east -northeastward of Winterton Church .
The northern bank, 1 1/4 miles long northwest
and southeast, as defined by the 10 -fathom curve,
and 800 yards wide, has a least depth of 37 feet.
The southeastern bank , 1 1/4 miles long and 1,000
yards wide, has a least depth of 31 feet. The
third bank , which lies between the southeastern
Newarp bank and North Cross Sand, is 1 1/2
miles long northwest and southeast, is 700 yards
wide, and has a least depth of 35 feet.
During stormy weather the sea breaks on these
banks.
11-18 Newarp Banks Light Vessel (52° 48.5'
N. , 1 °55'E .).— A light is exhibited from a light
vessel of the tower type, painted red, marked
" Newarp ” moored in 18 fathoms of water, north
eastward of the northern bank .
A fog diaphone is sounded at the light vessel.
H.O. 35
11-19 Winterton Shoal, 3 miles westward of
the northeastern Newarp Bank, is the northern
head of a bank extending northward from abreast
Yarmouth ; within the 10-fathom curve it is
2 1/4 miles long, east-southeast and west -north
west, and 800 yards wide, with a least depth of
35 feet.
11-20 Tidal currents. — The turn of the tidal
current is not coincident with the local times of
high and low water anywhere between Cromer
and Winterton or in The Would and Haisborough
Gat, but will be found to be running to the south
ward when the tide is rising at Dover and to the
northward when the tide is falling there, the slack
current occurring close to the time of high and
low water at Dover. The direction of the current
is fairly parallel to the channels, but it has a
tendency to rotate, the last of the ebb or north
going current turning to the northeast and east
ward and the last of the flood or south - going cur
rent to the southwest and westward. This peculi
arity of the set of the tidal current with reference
to the local times of high and low water has the
effect that the current over the sands is at its full
strength at high and low water by the shore, and
that at slack water it is nearly always half tide on
the shore; consequently at low water by the shore
the current, especially with northerly winds,
ripples or breaks over almost every inequality of
the bottom ; with strong northerly winds during
the strength of the north -going current there are
not only heavy breakers over the whole of Hais
borough Sand, Hammond Knoll, and Winterton
Ridge, but also on Winterton Overfalls, the least
depth on which is 33 feet, and on the Newarp, the
least depth on which is 31 feet. The rotatory
action of the current here is in exactly the con
trary direction to that which obtains at the Dud
geon and Outer Dowsing; there it turns against,
here with , the hands of a clock .
In Haisborough Gat in general, the south - going
and north - going currents set fairly through it, but
across Newarp Banks. The latter must be care
fully guarded against in the vicinity of the banks.
The south -going current in the Gat runs while the
 LOWESTOFT APPROACH
South Barnard Buoy, a black conical buoy ,
surmounted by a cone, is moored off the southern
edge of Barnard Shoal, about 1 mile south-
eastward of Benacre Ness.
11-69 Lowestoft High Light (52° 29' N., 1 ° 45 '
E .).— A light is exhibited from a white cylindrical
tower 53 feet high, situated on the cliffs 800 yards
north -northwestward of Lowestoft Ness. It is
partially obscured by houses when bearing more
than 347º. It is connected by telephone for life-
saving purposes only.
An auxiliary light is exhibited from a window in
the same tower .
11-70 Channels . - There are four chan-
nels of approach to Lowestoft Harbor: From
northward through Yarmouth and Corton
Roads, Lowestoft North Road and across the
Ridge; from eastward or southeastward through
Hewett Channel , Gor leston and Lowes toft
North Roads and across the Ridge; or through
Newcome Channel and across the Ridge ; from
southward by crossing Barnard northward of
East Barnard Buoy and passing through Pake
field and Lowestoft South Roa ds .
There are no obstructions in the northern
approach , the shore is clean throughout, and
the inner sides of Carton and Holm Sands are
clearly marked by buoys.
The least depth over Inner Shoal, about 1
mile offshore, was 15 feet (1954) .
The old Holm and Stanford Channels lie
about 1/4 miles and 1/2 mile respective ly, north
eastward of Newcome Channel. Both chan
nels have shoaled considerably and are un
marked .
New come Channel lies between the south
western side of Holm Sand and the northeast
ern side of Newcome Sand. In 1958 there was
a least depth of 17 feet in the fairway. The
depths in the channel are liable to constant
change , especially after a succession of
easterly gales, and local knowledge is essential.
During the strength of the tidal currents, there
are heavy tide rips over The Ridge.
The channel abreast Benacre Ness, between the
ness and Barnard Shoal, is very narrow and
185
( Chg 7 )
suitable only for vessels of very light draft, with
local knowledge. The channel is subject to change,
and southerly gales have been known to reduce
the depth 2 or 3 feet. A least depth of 8 feet could
be carried through the channel in 1955. There are
depths of 12 to 20 feet in Pakefield and Lowestoft
Roads all the way to the entrance to Lowestoft
Harbor.
11-71 Anchorage . - Corton Road is well pro
tected, but confined as an anchorage, the depth
being 19 to 52 feet, over a bottom consisting of
blue clay and mud.
Lowestoft North Road , between the coast and
Holm Sand, is about 1 mile in extent, with from
21 to 48 feet in it, over blue clay and mud.
Owing to alterations in the banks, Lowestoft
North Road is much exposed to easterly winds,
which cause an exceptionally short and choppy sea,
and is in some respects worse than the sea outside
the sands.
Submarine telegraph cables extend across the
road from Lowestoft High Light, in a northeasterly
and easterly direction . Vessels must be careful not
to foul them in anchoring.
Lowestoft South Road is situated off the town
inside the northern end of the pocket formed by
the Newcome Sand and the coast. It is about 1
mile in length and from 400 to 800 yards in breadth,
the depth in it being from 13 to 22 feet. Vessels
can anchor in it according to draft, but it is
doubtless subject to change.
This is a bad anchorage at all times. Owing to
the shallow water, a vessel does not properly
utilize her scope of cable. The holding ground is
moderate, but the sea is short and choppy, with
easterly winds, and there is a backwash from the
shore. There is always more or less of a swell
here.
Pakefield Road is a continuation of the above;
it is only 400 yards wide between the 3 -fathom
curves, and southerly gales have been known to
reduce the depth by 2 or 3 feet.
11-72 Tides. It is high water, full and
change, at Lowestoft at 9h. 57m . Springs rise
6 3/4 feet, neaps 5 % feet.
H.O. 35
186 CROMER TO ORFORDNESS
Tidal currents. In the offing the south -going
current begins 6 hours after, and the north-going
current at, high water at Dover. The set of the
currents across the northern entrance to Lowestoft
South Roads varies greatly and cannot be foretold.
The tidal current sets fairly but rapidly, through
Stanford Channel.
11-73 Pilots.Pilots do not cruise off the
port, but keep constant watch from North Ex
tension Pier, and board vessels in a motor boat, or
in a rowing boat having " Pilot” painted on each
bow .
Should the pilot be unable to board a vessel he
will direct her course from the pilot boat.
The signal for a pilot is the pilot jack at the
foremast head, or the International Code signal;
at night a white light should be exhibited over the
bows or a white flare flashed at short intervals.
In foggy weather the signal " G ” of the Morse
Code should be sounded on the whistle or foghorn.
Pilotage is compulsory.
11-74 Directions. — The channel from north
ward is free from dangers except when ap
proaching The Ridge . The eastern side is
well buoyed.
A vessel approaching from eastward or
southeastward should pass about 1/5 mile
eastward of East Newcombe Light Buoy , then
steer 339 ° until South Holm Light Buoy is
abeam , at which time change course to 352 °
for Lowestoft North Road , passing about la
mile eastward of N ... Newcombe Buoy , close
eastward of Inner Shoal Light Buoy , and
westward of West Holm Buoy.
11-75 Tugs. — Tugs are commonly employed,
their charge being according to a regulated scale
of prices. Vessels bound into the harbor and re
quiring a tug should hoist a flag or burgee at the
masthead by day and 2 lights where best seen by
night. There is 1 wrecking tug here.
11–76 LOWESTOFT HARBOR (52 ° 28'N . ,
1 ° 45'E.The harbor , which is entirely ar
tificial , is divided into several basins , named
Outer Harbor, South Basin , Waveney Dock ,
and Hamilton Dock . Trawl Basin and Herring
Basin are located in Waveney Dock . Inner
Harbor, which is a part of Lake Lothing, lies
adjacent to and westward of Outer Harbor and
is entered through a swing bridge with a
H.O. 35
width of 60 feet. Vessels up to 300 feet in
length with a draft of 16 feet at MHWS can
be accommodated at the berths at the lower
end of Inner Harbor. Vessels with a draft in
excess of 11 feet ground at low water. Larger
vessels can be accommodated at exception
ally high tides . The entrance to Outer Harbor,
between North and South Piers, is 150 feet
wide with a dredged depth of 13 feet.
With onshore winds there is a considerable
scend in South Basin and to a less extent in
Waveney Dock . Hamilton Dock is not affected .
Owing to the close nature of the harbor, it
is subject to the deposit of matter brought in
by the sea from the movable sands in its vi
cinity ; but a channel from the entrance of
Outer Harbor to the Inner Harbor, with a depth
of 11 feet at low water , is maintained by con
tinuous dredging during the summertime. Un
der normal conditions ves se ls up to 200 feet
in length with a draft of 16 % feet at MLWS
can enter Outer Harbor and be accommodated
at the berths . Vessels with a draft in excess
of 10 feet ground at low water .
North Pier and its extension extend in a
general southerly direction from the north
eastern extremity of the harbor. On its inside
face , 250 feet from its southern end , East
Jetty projects 250 feet westward into the har
bor . New Groyne Jetty extends about 150 feet
in a southeasterly direction from the middle
of the outer side of North Pier . Spur Groyne,
located close southwestward of the above
jetty, extends about 200 feet southward from
the same side of North Pier .
South Pier extends 1,200 feet in an easterly
direction from the southern extremity of the har
bor. About 450 feet from its inner end a spur
projects 220 feet in a northerly direction , and near
it is a pavilion with 2 spires.
Claremont Pier, situated 1,000 yards southward
of the harbor entrance, is a T -headed pier, ex
tending 770 feet in an east-southeasterly direction
from the coast. There is a depth of 16 feet at low
water at its head.
11-77 North Pier Light. - A light is exhibited
from a white tower, 30 feet in height, surmounting
a pavilion on the pierhead . It is obscured when
bearing inshore of 223°.
South Pier Light. - A light is exhibited from a
white tower, 30 feet in height, surmounting a
 LOWESTOFT
pavilion on the pierhead . A fog signal is
sounded . Traffic signals are displayed .
Lowestoft Harbor lights . - Four lights, 2 on
each side, are exhibited from pierheads at the
entrance to the Herring Basin .
Lights are shown on either side of the entrance
to Trawl Basin .
A light is shown on either side of the Inner
Harbor entrance .
Bridge lights . — Under ordinary circumstances a
green light will be exhibited from the northern
lock wall by night, and a red flag by day, when it is
closed, and a white light on the lock wall when it
is open .
When navigation is obstructed and the bridge
cannot be opened a red light is exhibited by night.
11-78 Tidal signals. - Depths between the
outer pierheads are indicated from the flagstaff
near the swing bridge as follows:
By day: A red flag indicates 10 feet or more.
A black ball indicates less than 10 feet.
By night : A red light indicates 10 feet or more.
A green light indicates less than 10
feet .
11-79 Regulations . — The maximum speed for
vessels is 4 knots, and vessels entering or leaving
the harbor must give one long warning blast when
approaching the entrance .
Two green flags will be hoisted at the North
Pierhead when British naval vessels are entering
and 1 green flag when they are leaving the harbor.
During the time these flags are hoisted no vessel
is to move into the outer harbor.
Bylaws with respect to petroleum and carbide
of calcium and with respect to explosives are in
force for all parts of the harbor within the jurisdic-
tion of the railroad company.
A vessel having quarantinable diseases
on board should remain in North Roads ,
11-80 Coast guard . — There are coast guard
stations, electrically connected at Corton, Lowes-
toft, and Beach End .
Lifesaving.There is a rocket apparatus at the
coast guard station at Corton . The Lowestoft and
Beach End stations are equipped with motor life-
boats and rocket apparatus.
Storm signals are shown from the coast guard
flagstaff at Lowestoft.
11-81 LOWESTOFT (52° 28' N. , 1 ° 45' E .).— The town
of Lowestoft, upon the summit and slopes of a steep bank,
187
( Chg 7 )
with much wood about it , shows prominently from every
point of view . On the northern side of the harbor there are
the coast guard and lifeboat stations. Also a flagstaff and
semaphore in front of the coast guard buildings. On the
southern side of the harbor is St. John'sChurch, also several
terraces facing the sea. The town of late years has in
creased in size, and houses are now continuous from some
distance northward of the lighthouse and to the southward
as far as Pakefield , a distance of 2 miles . In 1931 the
population was 41,768 .
Berths . - Inner Harbor has a total of 4,710 feet of
berthing space with depths of 1012 to 181% feet along
side . Vessels can safely ground at these berths at low
water
Outer Harbor , which includes Hamilton , Waveney ,
and Trawl Docks , has a total of 3,310 feet of berthing
space with depths of 16 to 17/2 feet alongside . Ves
sels can ground safely only at the berths in Hamilton
Dock . Ample warehouse accommodations are available
at all of the quays most of which are connected to the
railway . There are several 2- to 7-ton cranes and one
25 -ton fixed crane . Two tugs and an ample number of
lighters can be procured . One of the tugs is fitted for
salvage work .
Supplies . - Fresh provisions and ordinary supplies
can be obtained . Water is available from all quays ex
cept South Quay and can be supplied by tugs . Fuel oil
and diesel oil can be obtained at the oil berths in both
Inner and Outer Harbors or from tank cars at any berth .
Ample stocks of coal are maintained at North Quay in
Inner Harbor .
Repairs . — Minor repairs can be undertaken on large
vessels . Major repairs can be performed on vessels up
to 248 feet in length . The dimensions of the largest
drydock in the port are : maximum length , 248 feet ;
width at entrance , 48 feet ; depth on sill at MHWS , 15
feet In addition there are two marine railways for
small vessels .
Communications. There is post , telephone , tele
graph , and railway connections with the general sys
tem .
Medical. - There is a hospital in the town .
11-82 THE COAST.-From Benacre Ness
the coast runs for 1 1/2 miles in a south -south
westerly direction to Benacre Broad, and from
thence for 2 1/2 miles to Southwold . For 1 mile
northward of Benacre Broad and 400 yards south
ward of it the coast consists of low cliff; the re
mainder is shingle beach . The 3 -fathom curve is
400 yards from the coast and the soundings off
it are regular.
11-83 Southwold (52 ° 20 ' N. , 1 °41' E. , H. 0.
Chart 4476 ) is seated on a hill of moderate height
which is nearly surrounded at high water by the
River Blyth, Buss Creek, and the sea.
The church , the principal object, built in 1460,
stands on the northern side of the town . Its size
(the tower being 100 feet high) and commanding
height render it one of the most striking objects
on the coast, as also is the lighthouse. A water
tower on the common to the westward of the
town is also a plain object.
The town pier is situated 500 yards northward
of the lighthouse; it projects from the coast 100
yards in an east-southeasterly direction.
H.O. 35
188 CROMER TO ORFORDNESS
A light buoy is moored close east-southeast-
ward of the pier head .
Southwold Light ( 52 ° 20'N ., 1 °41'E .).— A light
is shown from the town of Southwald .
Landmark . - Four high masts and 4 low masts
are located about 6 1/2 miles west -southwestward
of Southwold Light.
Fog signal.During thick and foggy weather,
when steamers are expected , a bell is sounded .
11-84 Harbor (52 ° 19' N., 1 °41 ' E .).— The
Blyth, which flows by Laxfield, Halesworth , and
Blythburgh , and has its outlet 1/2 mile to the
southward of Southwold, constitutes its harbor.
It is entered between North Pier, which ex-
tends about 150 feet southeastward from the
high -water line , and South Pier, which is 840 proached. The tidal current outside depends on
feet long and parallel to North Pier . The
entrance is 115 feet wide .
Within the piers the river has an increased
breadth and depth for some distance, then it
becomes tortuous and narrow .
The bar is composed of sand, and its extent
varies according to the prevailing wind ; north-
easterly winds have the effect of shoaling the bar.
In 1953 the harbor had a width of 180 to
210 feet between the quays on the northern
side and the wall on the southern side and
depths of 1 foot to 13 feet alongside the
quays ( 1958) . A drying sandbank extends up
to 70 feet into the harbor from the western
part of the south wall. The best berth , with During thick weather vessels requiring a pilot
the deepest water , is alongside the quay
about 450 yards within the entrance . Fresh
water can be obtained from the quay .
Caution . — The plan of Southwold Harbor on H.
0. Chart 4476 should be used with caution because
of changes that have occurred since the survey.
North Pier Light. - A light is exhibited from an
iron framework tower, 10 feet high, located on
North Pier.
11-85 Storm signals. — There is a storm signal Church, which is prominent, stands about 11/4
station at Southwold .
Signals. When the harbor is inaccessible ,
a red flag is displayed by day from a flag
staff about 400 yards northward of North Pier.
At night a red light is displayed from the
head of North Pier . At other times a white
light is displayed.
Coast guard. There is a station electri-
cally connected at Southwold .
H. 0. 35
Lifeboats - Rocket station . - A motor lifeboat
and a lifesaving rocket apparatus are maintained
at Southwold.
11–86 Tides. It is high water, full and
change, at the bar at 10h. 20m .; ordinary springs
rise 6 1/2 feet and neaps 4 1/2 feet over the river
generally. The flow ceases at Bulchamp Lock at
the mouth of Halesworth Canal navigation, 6 3/4
miles from the sea, at which limit the time of high
water is 50 minutes later than at the bar. Par
ticular winds, especially those from northwest,
have the effect of raising the tides here as at the
neighboring ports. It is to be noticed that from
here the tidal wave begins again to increase in
size the nearer the estuary of the Thames is ap
the times of high and low water at Dover and not
on the time of local high water.
The flood current sets through the gap in
South Pier and through the entrance causing
an eddy. The ebb current, which may be
strong during and after heavy rains , sets out
through the entrance. Both currents attain a
rate of about 2 knots at springs .
A confused sea makes up in the entrance at
the time of the ebb with an on shore wind .
11-87 Pilots. — There is a licensed pilot, who
will board vessels making the usual signal in one
of the small local fishing boats. Vessels should
await the pilot abreast of the harbor entrance.
should sound signal “ G ” of the Morse Code in
addition to the usual signals.
Should the weather be too bad for the pilot to
board a vessel, he will direct her course during the
time that the tide will serve, by waving a flag
from the North Pier.
11-88 Dunwich Bay . - From Southwold,
shingle beach prevails for 3 miles to the south
westward , forming Dunwich Bay. Walberswick
miles southwestward of Southwold . A windmill
is conspicuous on the coast 1/2 mile southeast
ward of the church . The background is low and
partially wooded .
Dunwich Bank is the northern part of Sizewell
Bank ; it lies 1 1/2 miles offshore.
Covehithe Church in range with the northeast
ern end of Easton Cliff, bearing 006° , leads
eastward , and Reydon Church in range with South
 GALLOPER
12–6 Outer Gabbard Light Vessel.-- A light
is exhibited from a light vessel painted red ,
marked "Outer Gabbard ", moored in a depth of
15 fathoms 3/4 mile east -northeastward of the
northern end of the shoal. The vessel has one
mast with her lantern permanently fixed . The
light is shown at a height of 40 feet. A red
can watch buoy is moored about 12 mile west-
northwestward of the light vessel .
Fog signal. — A diaphone fog signal is sounded
from the light vessel.
A radiobeacon is located on the light vessel .
12–7 Buoys. - North Outer Gabbard Buoy, a
black conical buoy marking the northern part of
the shoal, is moored about 1 1/4 miles north
northeastward of the 3 -fathom patch.
South Outer Gabbard Bell Buoy, a black
conical buoy marking the southern part of the
shoal, is moored about 1 1/4 miles south -south-
eastward of the 3 -fathom patch .
A bank, with depths of from 7 to 9 fathoms over
it, extends about 3 3/4 miles northward from a
position about 3 miles west-northwestward of the
northern extremity of the Outer Gabbard Shoal,
as defined by the 10 -fathom line.
12–8 Galloper . — The northern end of this
shoal is 7 miles to the south - southwestward of the
Outer Gabbard, and, within the 10 - fathom curve,
it is nearly 6 miles in length, in a 1979 and 17°
direction, and 1/2 mile in breadth . The soundings
over the shoal vary, but the shallowest are in the
center, which consists of a very narrow ridge 3
miles long, on which they are all under 3 fathoms,
the least depth being 1 1/2 fathoms, 2 1/2 miles
from the northern end of the shoal.
There is a small patch with a depth of 3 fathoms
about 400 yards northward of this ridge, and two
patches, with least depths of just under 3 -fathoms,
located about 1,000 and 1,400 yards southward
of the ridge. These dangers are steep -to ; the
bottom in the vicinity consists of sand .
12-9 Galloper Light Vessel (51°44' N., 1 °58'
E .).— A light is shown from a light vessel south
eastward of Galloper Shoal. The hull is painted
red with "Galloper" in white on sides, and a
triangle , point down , on the mainmast. A red
can watch buoy is moored about 12 mile north-
westward of the light vessel.
193
(Chg 7)
Fog signal.-A diaphone fog signal is sounded
from Galloper Light Vessel.
12–10 Buoys . - Galloper Shoal is marked by
the following buoys:
A spherical buoy, painted red and white in
horizontal bands, marked "North Galloper " , and
surmounted by a can top mark, is moored in 13
fathoms off the northern end of the shoal.
A black conical buoy, marked " East Galloper ”,
is moored in 12 fathoms off the eastern edge of the
shoal.
A red can buoy, marked "West Galloper” , is
moored in 15 fathoms off the middle of the western
side of the shoal.
12-11 North Falls. — The northern end of this
shoal is situated 2 1/2 miles southward of the
southern end of the Galloper as limited by the
10 -fathom curves. From its northern end it ex
tends for 5 miles, 200 °, and is from 400 to 1,000
yards wide.
Caution . - Submarines exercise frequently
eastward of North Falls. A good lookout
should be kept when passing through these
waters .
Four -mile Knolls (North Falls Head ) (51°41'
N., 1 °57' E.) is the northern and shallowest part
of the above shoal, the least depth on it being
5 fathoms 1 mile within its northern end .
There are depths of from 6 to 8 fathoms over the
remaining part of the shoal, which terminates in
North Falls Tail. The shoal is steep -to all
round .
South Falls.The shoal is situated on the same
ridge as North Falls, but separated from it by a
depth of over 10 fathoms through a distance of
9 1/4 miles. From its northern end, South Falls
Head, it runs for a distance of 14 miles in a 190 °
direction to the Tail of the Falls, which is outside
the limits of this work ; the depths on it vary
from 394 fathoms to 7 fathoms, and it is gen
erally steep -to.
Drill Stone (51 ° 26 ' N. , 1 °41' E ) is a bank with
from 7 to 9 fathoms over it, marked by strong
ripples, situated 4 miles westward of South Falls.
12-12 Inner Gabbard (51 °55' N., 1 °55' E .) .
This shoal is situated 4 miles westward of the
Outer Gabbard ; it is about 8 1/4 miles long within
the 10 -fathom curve in a 200 ° direction , and is
very narrow . Within the 5 -fathom curve it is
33/4 miles long, the least depth, 2 1/2 fathoms,
H.O. 35
194 THAMES ESTUARY -- APPROACH -- ORFORDNESS TO THE NAZE
being nearer its center ; it is steep -to.
Buoys . - North Inner Gabbard Buoy , à can
buoy painted in red and white checkers with a
red cylindrical topmark, is moored about 1,000
yards southward of the northern end of the shoal.
West Inner Gabbard Buoy , a red can buoy,
is moored close westward of the 234-fathom center
of the shoal.
South Inner Gabbard Buoy, a red can buoy,
is moored about 13/4 miles northward of the
southern end of the shoal . It has a radar re
flector.
Deep. There is a deep, 12 miles long in a
northerly and southerly direction and 2 miles
wide, situated about 2 miles westward of Inner
Gabbard. The greatest depth in it is 32 fathoms.
12-13 Kentish Knock . — This shoal lies 3 miles
eastward of Long Sand, from which it is separated
by Knock Deep . As defined by the 6-fathom
curve the shoal is 742 miles long. The greater
part of its area has shallow depths , and there
are numerous drying patches .
A 5 2/3-fathom patch lies 1 1/2 miles north
ward of the northern extremity of Kentish Knock.
Kentish Knock Light Vessel (51° 39' N. , 1 °41 '
E .).- A light is exhibited from a light vessel
painted red and marked " Kentish Knock,”
moored in 12 fathoms eastward of the shoal.
The vessel has two masts with a light tower amid
ships . A red can watch buoy is moored about
42 mile we stward of the light vessel .
Fog signal. — A diaphone fog signal is sounded
from Kentish Knock Light Vessel.
Buoys . — Kentish Knock is marked by the fol
lowing buoys:
Middle Knock Buoy, a black conical buoy ,
is moored about 4 mile eastward of the
southeastern side of Kentish Knock .
South Knock Buoy, a black conical buoy sur
mounted by a black diamond top mark , is moored
close eastward of the southern edge of Kentish
Knock . It has a radar reflector.
North Knock Buoy, a black conical buoy sur
mounted by a black conical top mark, is moored
close eastward of the northern end of Kentish
Knock .
12–14 Long Sand . — This shoal, as defined by
the 3 -fathom curve, is about 18 1/2 miles long in
a 040° and 220° direction , and from 14 to 4
miles wide , and generally steep -to . It is di
H.O. 35
vided into two parts , about 14 miles from
the northern end , byFishermans Gat, in which
there is a least depth of 19 feet in the fair
way.
The northern extremity , known as Long
Sand Head , had extended in 1958 about 144
miles farther northeastward from Long Sand
Head Beacon .
Northward of the Gat on the western edge of
the shoal are 3 elongated patches, which dry sev
eral feet.
The southern portion of the Long Sand is
rectangular in shape and about 4 miles in extent;
its southwestern edge, which is very steep -to ,
forms the northern side of Edinburgh Channels.
The southeastern edge is of a shifting nature.
Beacons.-Beacons , with triangular topmarks,
are located on Long Sand as follows:
Long Sand lead Beacon, about 3á mile south
westward of the edge of Long Sand Head.
Long Sand Beacon, near the northwestern side
of the Sand, about 7 miles southwestward of the
beacon.
S.E. Long Sand Beacon , near the southern
end of the Sand , about 834 mile northward of
Margate Pier.
N.W. Long Sand Beacon , about 3 miles
northwestward of S.E. Long Sand Beacon .
Foul ground exists eastward of the south
ern extremity of Long Sand and northeastward
of the northern extremity .
Buoy . - Long Sand Head Lighted Bell
Buoy , a spherical buoy painted in black and
white horizontal bands and fitted with a
radar reflector, is moored about 2 miles north
eastward of Long Sand Head Beacon.
Mariners should not navigate between this
buoy and Long Sand Head but should give
the buoy a wide berth.
Depths of 31 to 34 feet lie within 4 mile
north westward of the 1959 charted position
of the buoy.
For the buoys marking the southern end of
the shoal see section 14--31 .
12–15 Knock Deep (51 ° 40' N., 1 °35 ' E.).
-This channel lies between Kentish Knock
and Long Sands and is about 10 miles long,
running parallel to the sands on either side ,
and 2 % miles wide at its narrowest part.
The depths in it range from , roughly, 36 to
 SHIPWASH SAND
84 feet; it is not buoyed , and therefore should
not be selected , but vessels certain of their
position could use it.
The turn of the current at the northern end of
the deep is nearly coincident with the time of high
and low water at Dover, both streams running at
a maximum velocity of 2 3/4 knots.
These data cannot be considered reliable since
the tidal currents in Knock Deep have not been
observed in recent years.
12–16 Directions, Knock Deep . — This chan-
nel, though straight and deep, should not be used,
as it is not buoyed, but in case of necessity steer
to pass through in midchannel, leaving Long Sand
Head Light and Bell Buoy about 2 1/2 miles to the
northwestward . When North Foreland Lighthouse
comes in sight steer with it ahead on a 190 ° bearing;
this will lead through the southern entrance.
12–17 Shipwash Sand. — North Ship Head, moored in 11 fathoms 600 yards from the eastern
the northern end of this shoal, is situated41/2 edge.
miles 148° from Orfordness Lighthouse. From
this position Shipwash Shoal, as defined by the
5 -fathom curve, extends 84 miles in a 198° direc-
tion to South Ship Head, the southern extremity
of the shoal; it is 1,200 yards wide at its center,
tapering somewhat toward its extremities. When
viewed, however, by the lesser curves it is a dis
connected chain of shoals with from 1 to 2 fathoms
over them. A 1 - foot patch lies near the cen
ter of the shoal . Several other patches with
depths of 1 foot to 5 feet lie within 2 miles
northward and southward of this position.
The soundings on each side are irregular ,
but as a rule they decrease rather abruptly as the
shoal is approached. In 1949, the eastern limit of
the shoal was reported to have extended further
eastward for a distance of about 300 yards.
Several detached patches of shingle , with
depths of 5 to 6 fathoms , lie within 14 miles
north - northwestward of North Ship Head .
Depths of 35 and 36 feet with 7 to 8 fathoms
around, exist about 1 1/2 and 11/4 miles, re-
spectively, south - southeastward of the southern
extremity of South Ship Head as defined by the
6 - fathom line. The depths are uneven within a
radius of about 1 mile of these shoals.
The Threshold is a small detached ridge of
broken ground, with a least depth of 4 1/2 fath-
oms over it, which lies about 1 1/2 miles west
ward of the southern end of Shipwash Sand.
195
(Chg 7)
12–18 Shipwash Light Vessel (52 °02' N. ,
1 °42' E .).- A light is exhibited from a vessel,
painted red, marked " Shipwash,” moored in 14
fathoms, 5 1/2 miles east-southeastward of Or
fordness Lighthouse. The light is shown at a
height of 40 feet from a tower amidships. A dia
phone fog signal is sounded at the light vessel.
The light vessel is equipped with a radio
telephone. Distress signals are made from
the light vessel .
12–19 Buoys.Shipwash Sand is marked by
the following buoys :
A spherical lighted bell buoy , painted in
red and white horizontal bands and marked
“ North Shipwash ” , moored about% mile north
ward of North Ship Head ; it is equipped with
a radar ref lector .
A black conical buoy, marked " E. Shipwash ,'
A black conical buoy, marked " S. E. Shipwash ,”
moored in 10 fathoms close off the southeast
edge.
A red can buoy , marked " N. W. Shipwash ,”
moored in 8 fathoms 400 yards from the western
edge and 1 1/2 miles southward of North Ship
Head .
A red can buoy, marked " S. W. Shipwash ,”
moored in 7 fathoms 300 yards from the western
edge and 13/4 miles northward of South Ship
Head .
A can buoy , painted in red and white checkers
and marked " West Shipwash,” is moored in 7 1/2
fathoms about 600 yards off the western edge of
Shipwash Sand.
A spherical buoy , painted in red and white
horizontal bands and marked " South Ship
wash " , moored about 2 miles northward of
Sunk Light Vessel; it is equipped with a
radar reflector .
Harwich Church in range with Landguard Fort
bearing 290 ° leads close southward of the South
Ship Head.
12-20 Sunk Light Vessel has been reestab
lished on station in 51 °51'N. , 1°35' E. The light
vessel has a red hull, one mast, and a light tower
amidships . A fog signal is sounded and a
radiobeacon transmits from the light vessel .
H.O. 35
196 THAMES ESTUARY — APPROACH - ORFORDNESS TO THE NAZE
12-21 Shoals. - A shoal,with 35 feet of water
over it, lies about 3 miles southwestward of South
Ship Head .
A shoal with a least depth of 5 5/6 fath-
oms lies about 4 miles south-southeastward
of South Ship Head.
A detached 35 - foot patch , small in extent
and steep - to on all sides , lies a lmost 314
miles south -southeastward of South Ship
Head .
A shoal with a least depth of 5 5/6 fath
oms is located about 14 miles south -south
eastward of South Ship Head.
12-22 Pilots for London and Harwich Harbor
cruise regularly in the vicinity of Sunk Light Ves
sel in a steam pilot vessel marked in white letters
“ Pilots . London or Harwich. " (See sec .
12-2) .
If the pilot vessel is unable to carry out
her duties there because of bad weather, she
moves into smoother water in the vicinity of
Barrow Deep Light Vessel .
Vessels will be informed of this condition
by means of radio navigational warnings
from North Foreland , Niton and Hum ber radio
stations and should proceed towards Barrow
Deep to obtain a pilot.
Pilotage for Harwich is compulsory.
12-23 Whistle signal. - In addition to the
usual pilot signals, in thick or foggy weather the
pilot steamer sounds on her whistle number 5 of
the Morse Code. A steamer requiring a pilot
should sound on her whistle signal G of the Morse
Code.
12–24 Tides and tidal currents.It is high
water, full and change, on Galloper Shoal at Oh .
Om . (approximate ); on Kentish Knock at 11h.
47m., and low water at 6h. Om.; on Long Sand at
11h. 50m . Springs rise 12 3/4 feet; neaps 8 feet.
At Outer Gabbard , from 4 hours before to high
water at Dover, the current runs 198º at maxi-
mum velocities of from 1 1/2 to 3 1/4 knots, and
from 2 to 6 hours after high water 018 ° at
maximum velocities of from 1% to 234 knots .
At 18 miles northeastward of the normal posi-
tion of Outer Gabbard Light Vessel the south-
going current commences at low water and the
north -going stream at 1 hour after high water at
H.O. 35
Dover, their maximum velocities being 1.4 and
1.6 knots, respectively.
At Galloper Shoal, from 4 hours to 1 hour before
high water at Dover, the current runs 210 ° at the
maximum velocity of 2 1/2 knots. From 1 to 6
hours after, it runs 030° at maximum velocity
of 23 knots . At hours before and at high
water it is turning from 0° to 360° , or clock
wise .
At Kentish Knock , from 5 hours to 1 hour
before high water at Dover the current sets
209 ° at a maximum velocity of 3 knots ; from
1 to 5 hours after high water it sets 029 ° at
a maximum velocity of 234 knots . The stream
is slack at high and low water.
At Long Sand, the south-going current com
mences 4 hours before and runs about 187° until
high water at Dover at a maximum velocity of 3
knots; the north -going current commences 1 hour
after and runs from 029 ° to 064° until 5 hours
after high water at a maximum velocity of 242
knots .
At Shipwash Shoal, the current runs 220 ° at a
maximum velocity of 2 3/4 knots from 5 hours
before to high water at Dover , and 040° at a
maximum velocity of 272 knots from 1 to 6
hours after high water at Dover.
At the normal position of Sunk Light Vessel
the south -going current commences 4 hours before
and ends at high water at Dover, the north -going
current runs 051° from 1 to 6 hours after high
water at Dover, the maximum velocity of both
streams being 3 knots.
12–25 OUTER PASSAGE. — This passage lies
between the Inner and Outer Gabbard , Galloper,
North and South Falls to the eastward , and Ship
wash, Long Sand, and Kentish Knock , to the
westward ; it is about 45 miles long from abreast
Orfordness to North Foreland, and 10 miles wide;
it is quite free from danger, the least depth in it
being 10 fathoms at its northern end and 7 fathoms
at its southern end.
12–26 Directions. In navigating the chan
nels across the Thames Estuary the height and
set of the tides is the most important factor to be
considered . For the movements of these the tide
 OUTER PASSAGE
tables and charts should be consulted . Near the
edge of the shoals the currents are stated to run
obliquely over them. The lead should be kept
going constantly .
Though this passage is broad, vessels bound for
the Downs usually pass through it on its western
side, which is the shortest route. For vessels from
inside Aldeburgh Napes the track leads 177° to a
position about 3 1/2 miles eastward of the Sunk
Light Vessel, passing a little over a mile eastward
of North Ship Head . From abreast the Sunk
Light Vessel the track leads 180° to a position
about 1/2 mile eastward of the Kentish Knock
Light Vessel.
Vessels from the northward passing outside
Aldeburgh Napes can proceed direct from a posi-
tion about 8 miles eastward of Britannia Pier at
Great Yarmouth to a position about 3 1/4 miles
eastward of the Shipwash Light Vessel and thence
to the Kentish Knock Light Vessel, making good
a course of 190 °.
From the Kentish Knock Light Vessel, the
course to be made good to the Elbow Light Buoy
off North Foreland, is 197º.
12–27 THE COAST (52 ° 05' N., 1 ° 34' E., H.
0. Chart 4477).- The coast from Orfordness trends
southwestward for about 5 miles to Orford
Haven . From the entrance to Orford Haven a
beach runs about 24 miles in a southerly di-
rection to Boathouse Point, and from this
point it runs southwestward for about 1 mile
to Bawdsey Cliffs . Orfordness and the coast
for some distance to the westward is steep-
to , but in Hollesley Bay and off Bawdsey
Cliffs the 3 -fathom curve extends 1,200 yards
seaward .
The objects upon this coast which will be recog-
nized are a small cluster of huts painted black and
used only for fishing boats ; Shingle Street, a
cluster of cottages at the entrance to Orford
Haven ; and 4 Martello towers between the haven
and Bawdsey Cliff : Hollesley Church is a prom-
inent object in the well -wooded background.
A large white house among wood inland to the
northward of Bawdsey Cliff, and Bawdsey Church ,
with its broad stunted tower, are all plain
197
( Chg 7)
objects.
On Boathouse Point are Tower“ W ” (a Mar
tello tower ) and East Lane coast-guard sta
tion , the latter with flagstaff and whitewashed
chimneys .
Bawdsey Cliff is of a reddish color and
bears upon its face numerous marks of land
slips . Several conspicuous masts , each about
365 feet high and marked by obstruction
lights, stand on the cliff.
Bawdsey Manor, a conspicuous brick house,
stands at the southwestern extremity of Bawdsey
Cliff, and close eastward of it is a flagstaff.
Lifesaving . — There is a lifesaving rocket ap
paratus at Shingle Street.
12–28 Hollesley Bay, the anchorage within the
Whiting, extending from Orfordness to abreast
Orford Haven, is 4 miles long and from 1 to 1 1/2
miles wide. It is devoid of shelter with the wind
between northeast and eastward , but is protected
from every other quarter.
The depths are from 4 to 7 fathoms over the
greater part of the bay, the deepest water being
near the Whiting, where the bottom is sand ; in
the middle of the bay the bottom is mud and sand
and toward the shore mud and clay.
12–29 Wrecks. Several wrecks, some of
which are marked by buoys, lie off the coast south
westward of Orfordness. For details and locations
of these wrecks see the latest, best scale charts of
the area .
12–30 Orford Haven , opening into the south
western part of Hollesley Bay, through a foreshore
composed of shingle, is not readily to be discerned
from the sea , but the position of the entrance may
be known from its being about 1,400 yards north
eastward of Shingle Street. The Haven is formed
by the outlet of the Rivers Alde and Ore.
The position of the entrance to Orford Haven
is subject to frequent change but its principal
features remain the same. The extremity of the
eastern beach is named the North Weir, or North
Ear, below which are several detached banks of
shingle, termed the Haven Knolls, and through
these the river maintains a channel and generally
a swatchway besides.
H. 0. 35
198 THAMES ESTUARY - APPROACH - ORFORDNESS TO THE NAZE
The depth over the bar changes frequently and
rapidly, but 3 feet is the average depth at low
water springs. The depths in the river are from
1 1/4 to 5 fathoms. There are quays at Slaughden,
Orford, and Boyton .
Tides . — It is high water, full and change, at
Orford Bar, at 11h. 30m ., Orford Quay at Oh. 30m .,
Slaughden at lh. , and at Snape Bridge at 3h.
Ordinary springs rise 7 1/2 feet at the bar, 7 1/2
feet at Orford Quay, 7 1/2 feet at Slaughden
Quay, and 6 feet at Snape Bridge, the limit of
navigation.
Pilots are necessary to enter the Ore in safety.
Four harbor pilots reside at Shingle Street, and
their services are to be obtained by hoisting the
usual pilot flag or dipping a burgee. In thick
weather a vessel requiring a pilot should sound
signal G of the Morse Code in addition to the
usual signals.
Vessels should await the pilot abreast of the bar
and about 1/2 mile offshore.
Should the weather be too bad for boarding, the
pilot will wave the vessel away with a flag or ask
the coast guards to signal to her by commercial
code.
Directions. — The liability to change precludes
any directions being given. The best time to
arrive off the entrance is 4 1/2 hours before high
water ; the shingle banks are all then visible, but
entering on the flood, great care is necessary to
meet the rush of tide round North Weir Point, as
it sets immediately on this shore.
12–31 Woodbridge Haven (51°59' N. , 1 ° 24 '
E. ) , at the southwestern end of Bawdsey Cliff, is
formed by the outlet of the Deben, a river which
has a course of 30 miles by Debenham, Wickham
Market , and Woodbridge ; from the last-named
town it meanders 8 1/2 miles in a south - south
easterly direction and joins the sea through de
tached and shifting banks of shingle.
Navigation for seagoing vessels ends at Wood
bridge , a distance of about 8 miles. Vessels draw
ing 11 feet can reach the town during springs and
those of 9 feet draft at neaps. The sides of the
channel are marked by poles and bushes instead
H. 0. 35
of buoys, and as the deep water ends 1 mile below
Woodbridge, vessels are often forced to discharge
a portion of their cargoes to admit of their reach
ing the Kingston Quays at that place.
The entrance, which is crossed by a ferry just
inside, is 200 yards wide. Two cables are laid
across the river just above the ferry.
A beacon is located on the western shore, just
below the ferry. On its eastern side is Bawdsey
Manor and on the westward the coast- guard sta
tion, near Tower U, Tower T, postal telegraph
office, and inn.
The bar of the Deben is constantly varying in
depth and position, and the channel also is sim
ilarly affected . Horse Sand is a shoal which dries
4 feet just within the entrance . The channel is
eastward of this shoal.
12–32 Range lights. — There are 2 range bea
cons on the western side of the entrance which
the pilots move according to circumstances. At
night, lights are shown from these beacons when
needed .
Buoys . — The approach to the bar is marked by
a black conical buoy, marked " W. E. Haven”,
and the entrance by a black conical buoy, both
of which are moved as required to conform to the
alterations in the channel .
A red and white checkered can buoy is moored
eastward of the northern extremity of the drying
part of Horse Sand .
Tides.Springs rise 11 feet, neaps 8 feet at the
bar of the Deben, 10 feet at Kingston Quay, and
7 feet at Wilford Bridge, and high water occurs at
those points, respectively, at 11h. 45m. , Oh. 35m. ,
and Oh . 55m .
12–33 Pilots. The services of a pilot are
essential for this haven . Pilots may be obtained
for local work in response to the usual signal. In
thick weather a vessel requiring a pilot should
sound signal “ G ” of the Morse Code in addition
to the usual signal .
The pilots come off in their own small sailing
boats.
Woodbridge, the principal town , with a popula
tion ( 1931 ) of 4,734, stands upon the western bank
 FELIXSTOWE
of the river; the town is not visible from the sea.
There are bonded warehouses, a customhouse, and
several quays , at which vessels lie aground at low
water .
12–34 Coast. - Woodbridge Haven , or the en-
trance to the River Deben , is immediately west
ward of Bawdsey Cliff.
The coast from the entrance trends southward
for 1/2 mile to Tower T Point, and from thence it
assumes a south -southwesterly direction, and con
sists of cliff alternating with grassy bank , for a
distance of 1.2 miles to Felixstowe Point, when
the high ground trends more westerly.
From Felixstowe Point a low shingle beach ex-
tends 2 1/2 miles to the southwestward to Land
guard Point, where it forms the eastern side of
the entrance to Harwich Harbor.
The golf pavilion, a white house 600 yards
southward of Tower T, and Felix Hotel, sur-
mounted by a clock tower and standing on the
cliff at Felixstowe, are conspicuous from seaward.
Felixstowe Point is a shingle point, bluff, and
rounded .
12-35 FELIXSTOWE .-- The town of Felixstowe stands
upon the summit of the bank ; several villas are situated
near the water's edge, and Martello Tower Q near its
southern end. The sea has made great ravages on this
shore .
The church spire is a conspicuous object .
The population in 1949 was 13,375
Felixstowe Promenade Pier. -A pier extends about
240 yards southeastward from the shore near Martello
Tower “ Q ' . A light is shown on the extremity of the
pier. Foul ground extends about 660 yards in a south
easterly direction beyond the end of the pier , over the
remains of its demolished outer part .
12-36 Landguard East Beach is a stretch of
shingle extending 1.8 miles about 210° from Felix
stowe to Landguard Point, off which are numerous
groynes.
A coast guard station with its flag staff is
located in Martello Tower “ P ' , about 34 mile
from the root of Felixstowe Pier.
12–37 Landguard Point (51° 56 ' N. , 1 °19' E. ,
H.0. Chart 4483) is the eastern point of the en
trance to Harwich Harbor; the beach from the
northward is met by a groyne on the southern
199
lang )
part of the point curving southeastward and pro
jecting 120 yards seaward from it, the groyne
end being marked by a beacon. There is also a
beacon on the point.
Beacon Cliff (Blackmans Head ), the west
ern point of the entrance to the harbor , is
bold and well defined , with rocky ledges off
it.
Storm signals are shown at Landguard Point.
The coast southwestward of Harwich consists
of cliff sloping gradually toward the opening into
Hamford Water, a distance of 4 miles. This shore
is backed by gently undulating country , with
Dovercourt Church, much obscured by wood,
upon the outline.
12–38 Naze (51° 52' N. , 1°17' E.), called Wal
ton or Harwich Naze, on the southeastern side
of Hamford Water, and 4.2 miles, 196°, from Land
guard Point, is a cliff of a similar character to that
at Bawdsey. A brick tower, 88 feet high, stands
upon the summit of the Naze a little within the
brink of the cliff. It was built by the Trinity
House as a seamark . A large square gray building
used as a convalescent home has been built at the
fall of the cliff, southwestward of the Naze Tower,
and is conspicuous from seaward.
Radio. — Naze Tower has a radiotelephone in
stallation for lifesaving purposes only .
12–39 Hamford Water (51 °53' N., 1 °15' E.) ,
the entrance to which is 2 miles southward of that to
Harwich Harbor, is a narrow creek running 2 miles
in a southwesterly direction as far as Landermere
and Beaumont. Walton Channel, just within the
entrance, runs to the southward for the same dis
tance to Walton on the Naze, nearly making the
Naze an island. Horsey or Horsea Island divides
Hamford Water from Walton Channel. The whole
of the interior is broken up by islets and creeks,
which dry at low water. There is a depth of about
3 fathoms in Hamford Water and from 3 to 1/2
fathom in Walton Channel.
Vessels discharge cargoes in Hamford Water into
barges for Oakley, Beaumont, Kirby, and Walton .
H. 0. 35
200 THAMES ESTUARY - APPROACH - ORFORDNESS TO THE NAZE
The entrance is between Walton Stone Point
and Pewit Island, 1/2 mile apart.
The channel, which is funnel-shaped, lies be-
tween the shore flat and Pye Shoal, the neck of
the funnel being about 200 yards wide, having a
depth in it of from 3 to 7 fathoms, but as vessels
have to cross Halliday Rock Flats the available
depth is reduced to 3 feet.
Buoyage . — The channel is marked by red
can buoys and beacons on the eastern and
black conical buoys and beacons on the west-
ern side . Beacons are similar to the buoys in
color , but the beacons on the western side
carry a cross top mark .
12-40 Pye Sand extends 1.6 miles northeast-
ward from Walton Stone Point in a curved direc-
tion, forming Pennyhole Bay on its eastern side ;
this sand dries 11 or 12 feet.
12–41 OFF -LYING DANGERS . - Whiting
Bank (52°03'N., 1 ° 33' E. , H. 0. Chart 4477). —
This shoal lies abreast of Hollesley Bay, and pro-
tects it to a certain extent from the southeastward .
As described by the 6 -fathom curve, its north-
ern end lies 1 1/4 miles, 205 °, from Orfordness
Lighthouse. From this position it extends in
about a 214 ° direction for almost 41 miles ,
and is 34 mile wide . The least water is found
on a narrow ridge 21 miles long near the cen-
ter of the shoal with depths of 5 to 16 feet.
Buoys . — Whiting Shoal is buoyed as follows:
A spherical buoy, marked " NE. Whiting ”,
painted in black and white horizontal bands, is
moored off the northeastern end of the shoal.
A black conical buoy, marked " E. Whiting”,
is moored in 6 fathoms on the eastern edge of the
shoal.
Hook Buoy, a red can buoy, is moored on the
western side of Whiting Bank .
A spherical buoy, painted in black and white
horizontal bands and marked " S. W. Whiting” , is
moored on the southwestern end of Whiting Bank .
Flagstone . — The Flagstone is an offshoot of
foul ground westward from the southwestern end
of the Whiting, from which it is separated by a
H.O. 35
narrow channel. There is a least depth of 4 %
fathoms on it.
12–42 Bawdsey Bank . – Bawd Head , its north
ern end , as defined by the 6 -fathom curve, lies
about 3/4 miles southward of Orfordness Light
house. From thence it runs 534 miles in a south
westerly direction. On its northern part, there is
a ridge 2 miles long, with depths of under 3 fath
oms on it, the least depth being 7 feet, on which
the sea breaks in easterly gales.
On its southern part there are several detached
heads of under 3 fathoms, 2 1/4 fathoms, situated
1 mile within its southern end, being the
least water.
Buoys. - Bawdsey Bank is buoyed as follows:
A black conical buoy, marked " N. E. Bawdsey ” ,
with black conical top mark is moored off the
northern extremity.
A black conical light buoy, marked " Mid Bawd
sey” , showing a flashing white light is moored on
the east side.
Southwest Bawdsey Buoy, a black conical buoy,
is moored on the southern edge of the shoal.
12–43 Kettlebottom (51° 59' N. , 1 ° 39' E.) is a
shoal joined at its southern end to the south
western part of Bawdsey Bank. Within the 6
fathom curve it is 134 miles long in a norther
ly and southerly direction and 400 yards
wide ; the least water is 3 fathoms a little
northward of its center .
12–44 Cutler, a rocky shoal abreast of,
and 274 miles from the entrance of Wood
bridge Haven , is about 134 miles long , in a
general 200° and 020° direction, and 400
yards wide within the 3 - fathom curve . The
least water , 34 fathom , is near the northern
end . A group of heads with depths of less
than 3 fathoms lies between the Cutler and
the coast westward .
Buoys .-— The shoal is buoyed as follows:
A black conical buoy, marked "North Cutler”,
is moored in 57 fathoms close northeast
ward of the northern end of the shoal.
A black conical buoy, marked " South Cutler”,
is moored about 14 miles south -southeast
ward of the southern end of the shoal.
 HARWICH APPROACH
Bawdsey Manor, in range with Ramsholt
Church , bearing 329 °, leads in 3 1/2 fathoms
southwestward of the Cutler.
12–45 CHANNELS. - Shipway . - This chan-
nel lies between Shipwash Sand and Bawdsey
Shoal ; it is about 10 miles long and from 1 1/2 to
2 1/2 miles wide, the depths in it being from 6 to
12 fathoms; there is, however, a shoal patch at
its northern, and the Threshold Shoal at its south
ern entrance , having 5 and 4% fathoms over
them , respectively .
Hollesley Bay Channel lies between Whiting
Bank and the coast from abreast Orfordness to
Orford Haven ; it is about 5 miles long and about
1 mile wide, but its southern end is much con
tracted by the Flagstone. The depths in it are
from 20 to 45 feet.
Sledway is the name given to the passage be
tween Kettlebottom and Bawdsey Shoals on the
eastward and Cutler Shoal on the westward ; it is
2 1/2 miles long, 1 1/2 miles wide, and has depths
of 20 to 44 feet.
12–46 Directions for the Shipway.From a
position 2.5 miles 090° from Orfordness Lighthouse
a 201° course made good will take a vessel mid
channel through the Shipway in a depth of not
less than 5 1/2 fathoms. This course passes 1.2
miles westward of North Shipwash Light Buoy,
over the western edge of Threshold Shoal,
and close eastward of the 434 - fathom wreck
on the western edge of Threshold Shoa l.
When North Shipwash Buoy bears 100 ° Orford
ness Light should not bear less than 332 ° nor
more than 342°
Directions for Inner Channel and Sledway.
From 1/2 mile eastward of Aldeburgh Ridge steer
to pass the same distance from the Ness, off which
there is a depth of 14 fathoms; round the Ness,
guarding against the overfalls of the Whiting and
201
(Chg 7)
the eddies off the coast. Then steer with
Orfordness Lighthouse astern , bearing 042 ° ,
until Hollesey Church , nearly 6 miles south
westward of the lighthouse , bears 286º .
Course is then changed to pass eastward of
Cutler. When past South Cutler Buoy change
course to the westward and head for Cork
Light Vessel. A shoal with a depth of 15
feet lies about 12 mile northward of South
Cutler Buoy and numerous wrecks lie in the
fairway . The directions for the Sledway
should be used with caution .
12-47 HARWICH APPROACH - Dangers.
Felixstowe Ledge, within the 3 -fathom curve, ex
tends about 1 1/4 miles off Felixstowe Point.
Felixstowe Spit, with a depth of 1 fathom over
it, lies about 1/4 mile southeastward of Felixstowe
Point.
Wadgate Ledge, a patch of uneven ground of
sand and stones, with a least depth of 15 feet over
it, is situated on the edge of the 3 -fathom curve
about 1 mile southeastward of the head of Felix
stowe Pier. A black conical buoy , marked " Wad
gate Ledge”, is moored off the southern edge of
the shoal.
Platters Shoal and Andrews Spit are different
parts of the same shoal as defined by the 1 -fathom
curve. Platters Shoal is a tongue extending 1 1/2
miles eastward of Landguard Point, with a depth
of 4 feet on its extremity . Andrews Spit, within
the 1 -fathom curve, extends 600 yards southeast
ward and 400 yards southward from the point. A
patch, which dries, lies 300 yards southeastward.
Two drying patches lie about 1/3 mile east
southeastward of Landguard Point,
12-48 Buoys . — A black conical light and bell
buoy, marked " Platters”, fitted with a radar re
flector and showing a white flashing light, is
H. 0. 35
202 - APPROACH-
THAMES ESTUARY- - ORFORDNESS TO THE NAZE
moored 1 1/4 miles east-southeastward of Land-
guard Point. The bell is sounded automatically
and gives one stroke every 15 seconds.
A black conical buoy, marked " Andrews”, is
moored 3/4 mile east-southeastward of the point .
Cork Spit, with 15 feet on it, lying 1 mile south
westward of Cork Light Vessel is, when measured
by the 3 -fathom curve, about 400 yards in extent.
There are several detached patches of 18 feet
400 yards southward of Cork Spit.
Cork Spit Light Buoy , a red and white
checkered can buoy fitted with a radar reflec
tor and showing a group flashing white light,
is moored close northward of the northern end
of Cork Spit.
12–49 Rough Shoals.-- As measured by the 5
fathom curve these are a collection of dangers situ
ated 3 miles southward of Bawdsey Bank. They
are scattered over an irregular area 3 miles in ex
tent, the southern limit of which is known as
Southwest Tail of Rough. The general depths
over the shoals are from 4 to 5 fathoms.
Lower Rough is the shoalest patch over this
area ; it is 400 yards long, and has a least depth of
242 fathoms over it. There are several heads
with depths of 3 fathoms and less within a 12
mile radius of this patch .
Roughs Tower, situated about 6 1/2 miles east
southeastward of Landguard Point, is a twin con
crete tower.
A spherical light buoy, painted in red, white,
and black horizontal bands and showing an inter
rupted quick flashing red light, is moored about
200 yards northwestward of Roughs Tower.
A lighted whistle buoy, painted in red ,
white, and black horizontal bands and show
ing an interrupted quick flashing white light ,
is moored about 200 yards southeastward of
Roughs Tower .
A spherical light buoy , painted black and white
in horizontal bands, and exhibiting a flashing
white light is moored about 134 miles north
northeastward of Roughs Tower .
The old low light tower, Harwich , open north
ward of Landguard Fort, bearing 281 °, leads
northward of the Rough in 4 3/4 fathoms.
12–50 Upper Rough (51° 54' N. , 1 °37' E. ) is a
H.O. 35
small shoal head with 2 3/4 fathoms upon it, lying
1,600 yards 225°, from Lower Rough.
Threshold is a small detached ridge, about
1 1/3 miles long with a least depth of 4 %
fathoms over it, lying 234 miles eastward of
Upper Rough .
Cork Knolls consists of foul ground lying 2
miles southward of Cutler Shoal. The shoal
est water is a 20 -foot patch lying almost 3
miles southeastward of Felixstowe Point.
Cork Ledge, 3 1/2 miles southwestward of the
Cutler, is a patch of rock 800 yards in length
northerly and southerly with 2 fathoms upon it.
There is a head of 3 fathoms 400 yards northwest
ward , and two heads with similar depths about
the same distance northeastward of it.
Cork Sand, the northern end of which is situated
1 mile eastward of Cork Ledge, is irregular in out
line, and 242 miles long as defined by the 1 -fathom
curve in a025 °and 205° direction ; it is very shoal
throughout, having several ridges dry at low water.
A can buoy, painted in red and white checkers,
marked “ Cork Sand ” , and surmounted by a
can topmark with red ref lectors , is moored in
about 4 fathoms off its northern end .
12-51 Wrecks. Severalwrecks lie sunk in the
approach to Harwich. Most of the wrecks are
marked by lighted or unlighted buoys. For details
and locations of these dangers see the latest, best
scale charts of the area.
12-52 Cork Light Vessel (51 ° 56'N . , 1 °
24'E . ).— A light is exhibited from a light
vessel painted red , marked “ Cork ” , moored
in 26 feet of water , nearly 2 miles south
southeastward of Felixstowe Point. The light
is shown from a tower amidships . A reed fog
horn is sounded .
Distress signals are displayed.
12-53 Tidal currents. - From 5 hours before
to high water at Harwich the current runs from
southwest to west with a maximum velocity of 2
knots, and during the remainder of the 12 hours,
from north -northeast to south -southeast, at a
maximum velocity of 2 knots.
12-54 Inshore dangers. - West Rocks are im
mediately southward of Cork Sand, with which
they are connected by the 2 -fathom curve. They
are about 1 mile in extent, with least depths of
from 2 to 5 feet over them. 1
|
 HARWICH HARBOR
Southeast Spit is the extension of this shoal
1 1/2 miles eastward to the 5 -fathom curve.
A black conical buoy, marked " West Rocks” ,
is moored in about 5 fathoms on the southeastern
side of Southeast Spit .
New Mill in range with the southern end of the
Terrace, Walton on the Naze, bearing 276 °, leads
1/2 mile southward of West Rocks.
12–55 Ridge, 2 miles westward of Cork Ledge
and about 1 mile 146° from Landguard Point, is a
rocky shoal on the southern side of the entrance to
Harwich Harbor. It is 880 yards long in a north-
erly and southerly direction, and 800 yards wide.
The least depth over it is 1 3/4 fathoms .
A can buoy marked “ Inner Ridge" and
painted red with red reflectors , is moored in
3 fathoms on the northern edge of the shoal .
A can buoy marked “ Outer Ridge ” , painted
in red and white checkers and fitted with a
radar reflector, is moored in 3 fathoms off the
southeastern end of Ridge .
A spoil ground has been established between
Ridge and Cork Ledge Shoals. The depths over
this area must necessarily be uncertain.
A conical buoy, painted yellow on top and black
below and marked " Spoil ,” is moored in the
center of this area .
Stone Banks, situated 2 miles southward of the
Ridge, and the same distance northeastward of the
Naze, with which it is connected by the 2 -fathom
curve, is 1 mile in extent and consists of a mass of
rock and loose stones. The least water on it is
1 fathom .
A red and white checkered can buoy, sur-
mounted by a staff and can and marked " Stone
Banks,” is moored off the western side of the shoal .
Halliday Rock Flats occupy all the outer por-
tion of the deep bight between Beacon Cliff and
the Naze ; they consist for the most part of rock ,
several patches of which have less than 1 fathom
over them at low water. The Patch is the protrud-
ing tongue of these flats with 1 1/2 fathoms over it,
situated 2 1/2 miles northeastward of Naze Tower.
Naze Ledge, or flat, shelves gradually out for
1 mile from the Naze, with 1 1/2 fathoms upon
the outer part of it.
203
(Chg 7)
12–56 Rough Channel. — The outer part of
this channel lies between the Cutler and Bawdsey
to the northward and the Rough and Cork Shoals
to the southward and runs in a westerly direction
toward Harwich Harbor with plenty of sea room ;
the depth, however, in it is restricted by having
to cross Cork Knolls, on which the least depth is
20 feet .
Cork Hole, with 5 to10 fathoms in it, affords a
circuitous passage to Rough Channel between
Rough and Cork Shoals .
12–57 Medusa Channel, between Stone Banks
and The Ridge on the eastern side, and Naze
Ledge and Halliday Rock Flats on the western
side, is used by small vessels approaching Har
wich from the southward . It should be used only
by those with local knowledge. It has a least
depth of 13 feet.
Obstructions, with depths from 3/4 to 13/4
fathoms exist in the vicinity of Medusa Channel.
Medusa Lighted Buoy, a black conical light
buoy, showing a flashing white light is moored
about 2 miles east- southeastward of Naze Tower.
12-58 HARWICH HARBOR (51 °56 ' N. , 1°18'
E., H.O. Chart 4483) is the only landlocked harbor
between the Humber and the Thames which af
fords complete shelter from all winds. The ap
proach is somewhat difficult of access, and vessels
of deep draft are restricted as to time of entry
by tidal considerations. Depths from 3/4 to 6
fathoms exist in the approach to Harwich . How
ever, 19 feet can be carried up to the anchorage.
The general depths in the harbor are from 18 to
36 feet .
Numerous shoals lie in the entrance and in the
harbor at Harwich . Depths in places are 6 feet
less than charted . For further information con
sult the latest, best scale chart of the area .
12–59 Aspect. From the approach to Har
wich Harbor the buildings in the town are very
prominent, the principal one being St. Nicholas
Church , built of white brick with stone buttresses.
Other conspicuous objects are the water tower to
the northward of Trimley Wood; the 2 light bea
H. O. 35
204 THAMES ESTUARY - APPROACH - ORFORDNESS TO THE NAZE
cons just northward of the flagstaff; the flag-
staff; and the Martello Tower on the eastern
beach . The sheds of the seaplane station at
Felixstowe are also outstanding.
12-60 Eastern shore.From Landguard
Point the eastern side of the harbor runs in a
northerly direction for 1 mile to Felixstowe Dock ;
the shore is embanked and fringed with
groynes. The northern part is fronted by sev-
eral piers extending into deep water, off
which there are 3 mooring buoys in from 20
to 22 feet. There is a flagstaff about 800
yards northward of the point. There are two
jetties at the entrance to Felixstowe Basin ;
the northern one is the smaller of the two .
The air station is situated about 800 yards
southward of Felixstowe Dock , and there are 2
beacons on the foreshore in connection with it.
From Felixstowe Dock the coast curves north-
westward 1 mile to Fagbury (Fagborough) Cliff, side consists for the most part of steep earth
with a shingle and marshy outline and an embank- cliffs , 40 to 50 feet high , with trees. Marsh
ment behind it. Martello Tower N (in ruins)
stands about 14 mile north - northwestward of
Felixstowe Dock ; Walton Ferry head (now
disus ed) is located close southward . A con
spicuous water tower stands about 142 miles
north -northeastward of the Martello Tower. A
mud flat, which dries several feet , extends
400 yards from this portion of the coast.
12-61 Western shore . - A narrow neck pro
jecting from the mainland in an easterly and
northerly direction forms the western shore of the
entrance and southern shore of the harbor. On the
seaward side of this neck the coast for 1/2 mile
southward of Beach Cliff Breakwater is bold and
then becomes low and embanked , the whole being
fronted by a sand flat extending 400 yards from it.
A breakwater awash at high water, with a bea
con on its extremity, extends 500 yards 115° from
Beacon Cliff Point.
Two disused light towers, built of brick , stand
on the beach about 700 yards northward of Bea
con Cliff Point. The front tower is 35 feet high
and the rear tower 80 feet high.
H. O. 35
Northward of the breakwater to the northern
point of the neck is a beach studded with groynes,
off which is a sand flat intersected by gutters. The
old light towers are situated on this section.
Lower Dovercourt stands on the bend and Har
wich on the end of the neck .
The northern side of the neck forms a bay now
embanked across between Harwich and Parkeston.
It is occupied by a mud flat, drying several feet,
through which there is a channel named Dover
court Dock.
12-62 Northern shore . — The northern side of
the harbor is limited by a projection into it of the
land dividing the rivers Orwell and Stour, the
southern termination of which is Shotley Point.
A conspicuous white square water tower
stands about 14 miles west -northwestward of
the point. The eastern side of this projection
is low and embanked , and the southwestern
land fronts the coast line generally. On its
eastern side is a water tower , and about 1/3
mile southwestward is another tower with a
flagstaff on its top. Between the two is the
naval establishment, with its mast and flag
staff. Mud flats , drying several feet , extend
from it on all sides , the termination of them
to the eastward , at the entrance to the Or
well , being known as Bloody Point. Three
beacons, painted black and white , mark a
sewer outfall at Shotley , about 325 yards west
ward of Shotley Pier.
12–63 Lights. - Landguard Front Range Light
is shown from a framework structure situated
1,300 yards northward of Landguard Point.
Northwest Beacon, a black framework structure,
22 feet in height and surmounted by a red circular
disc, stands about 20 feet southeastward of the
light structure.
A light is exhibited from a black framework
tower, 66 feet in height located about 250 yards
east-southeastward of Landguard Front Range
Light.
These lights are in range when bearing 121°.
A light is exhibited from a green post situated
 THE SHELF
at the head of the south pier of Felixstowe Dock.
Two lights, disposed vertically, are shown
from each of the two Royal Air Force Piers at
Felixstowe. Two lights , vertically disposed ,
are shown on the New Pier . A fog signal is
sounded here .
A light is exhibited from a black framework
tower, 22 feet high, on the head of the north-
eastern arm of the passenger pier at Harwich.
The northwestern arm of the passenger pier is
in ruins.
A light is shown from each of the two
dolphins located about 75 yards northward
of the Trinity House Pier .
A light is exhibited from a post, 23 feet high,
situated at the head of the Trinity House Pier.
Two lights, disposed vertically, are shown from
the western train ferry pier, and a light is shown
from the eastern train ferry pier.
A light is shown from a white wooden frame-
work structure, 8 feet high, situated on the west-
ern pierhead at Shotley.
12–64 Channel dangers — Buoys. - Rolling
Ground Shoal is approximately circular in shape
with a radius of about 650 feet and the center
located about 1/2 mile 137° from the beacon on
the outer end of Landguard Breakwater Jetty.
The depths are from 15 to 18 feet. There has been
considerable shoaling ( 1945) on Rolling Ground be-
tween Rolling Ground Shoal and Beach End Shoal.
A red can light buoy, marked "Rolling Ground”,
fitted with a radar reflector and showing a flashing
white light, is moored off the northern end
of this shoal .
12-65 Beach End Shoal, with depths of 6
to 12 feet, is situated about 800 yards south-
westward of Landguard Point and lies within the
3 -fathom curve extending westward from Andrews
Spit. Its southern end, on which the depth is 12
feet, is steep - to .
An obstruction area , about 400 yards square ,
lies close southward of Landgua rd Point be-
tween Beach End Shoal and Andrews Spit.
Ves se ls are cautioned not to pass through
this area .
A black conical lighted bell buoy, fitted with a
radar reflector and showing a quick flashing white
light, is moored about 900 yards southwestward
of Landguard Point.
A light buoy, painted black and showing a
205
(Chg 7)
flashing white light, is moored 730 yards 262°
from Landguard Breakwater Beacon and marks
the northwestern edge of Beach End Shoal.
12-66 Cliff Foot Rocks, measured by the l
fathom curve, are 400 yards in extent, and, with
4 feet least water over them on its inner edge, lie
400 yards off Beacon Cliff Breakwater end, but
shoal water less than 3 fathoms extends 800 yards
off the breakwater.
A can light buoy, painted red and white in
vertical stripes, and fitted with a red reflector
showing a flashing red light is moored in about 4
fathoms 940 yards 251° from Landguard Break
water Beacon .
12-67 The Shelf . — There is a large tract of
shallow water extending 1,400 yards from the
coast between Beacon Cliff and Harwich, which is
known as The Shelf. The Glutton and Guard or
Harwich Shelf are names applied to its northern
part. The depths on it are very irregular over a
bottom of stones, sand, and shells.
There are several 16- and 18 - foot patches
in and near the fairway eastward and south
ward of the southern part of The Shelf.
A light buoy, marked " North Shelf” , painted
in red and white checkers and showing a group
flashing white light is moored in 20 feet of water,
500 yards west -southwestward of Felixstowe pas
senger pierhead .
South Shelf Light Buoy, a red can buoy show
ing a group flashing red light, is moored off the
southeastern part of The Shelf.
12–68 The Shelf has depths of 10 to 19
feet on its northeast side in the vicinity of
The Glutton and Guard . Two detached 18 - foot
patches lie in the fairway, off this part of
The Shelf, in a position about 34 mile east
ward of the north extremity of Harwich . A de
tached patch of similar depth lies about 3/5
mile east-northeastward of the same extrem
ity .
A shoal patch with a least depth of 15 feet over
it lies about 300 yards southeastward of Guard
Light and Bell Buoy.
The Guard, or Harwich Shelf, forms the north
ern part of The Shelf, 700 yards northeastward of
Harwich ; it has 1 foot to 5 feet on it at low water.
12–69 Buoys. - A red can buoy marked
" Guard” and surmounted by a bell and lantern,
from which a flashing red light is exhibited, is
H.O. 35
206 THAMES ESTUARY-APPROACH-ORFORDNESS TO THE NAZE
moored in about 26 feet 680 yards 65° from the
northern point of Harwich .
Mooring buoys are laid in the harbor; for posi-
tions, see chart.
Horse Bank, with some patches on it which dry,
is situated on the northern side of the harbor,
800 yards from the northern point of Harwich ;
it is an extension of Shotley Spit .
A red and white horizontally striped spherical
buoy, exhibiting a flashing white light and marked
" Shotley Spit ” , is moored in about 15 feet off the
eastern end of Horse Bank and 1/2 mile eastward
of the eastern part of Shotley Point. The buoy is
fitted with a white reflector.
Walton Light Buoy, a black conical buoy show-
ing a group flashing white light is moored off the
mud flat extending southwestward from Fagbury
Cliff, about 400 yards northeastward of Shotley
Spit.
A shoal flat extends off the mud bank south-
ward of Shotley Point, within the 3-fathom curve,
to a position about 1,200 yards southward of the
point and 700 yards offshore.
12–70 Anchorages. — Pitching Ground Anchor-
age lies in the channel inside Cork Spit and to the
southward of the Platters. It is a deep from about
1/2 to 7/10 mile in extent, with from 30 to 34 feet
in it , in which anchorage may be obtained clear of
the fairway.
Rolling Ground is also in the channel between
Andrews Spit and Beach End Shoals to the north
ward and the Ridge to the southward . The general
depths in it are from 20 to 47 feet in which anchor-
age can be taken clear of the fairway.
Anchorage may be taken anywhere in the harbor
clear of the route to Parkeston, subject to the
harbor conservancy regulations .
H. 0. 35
12–71 Dangerous areas - Prohibited anchor
ages.- Several dangerous areas and prohibited
anchorages exist in the approach to Harwich and
in the Stour and Orwell Rivers.
Vessels must not pass through a dangerous
area without permission.
In both prohibited anchorages and dangerous
areas :
Anchoring, fishing, dredging, creeping , or bot
tom sweeping are prohibited.
Vessels must proceed at the minimum speed
necessary for safe navigation .
Submarine cables . - Several submarine cables
are laid across Harwich Harbor southward of
Felixstowe Dock, as indicated on the chart.
Moorings . — There are Government moorings
laid in the harbor; for positions, see chart.
Quarantine ground . — This anchorage is about
3/4 mile northwestward of Felixstowe Pier. For
limits see chart.
Bylaws.-For revised regulations consult the
Harwich Harbor Conservancy Board bylaws.
Petroleum and explosives . - Bylaws with re
spect to petroleum and carbide of calcium and
with respect to explosives are in force everywhere
within the boundaries of the harbor. Copies
may be obtained from the Harbor Master's Of
fice .
12–72 Tides. It is high water, full and
change, in Harwich Harbor at 11h. 59m.; springs
rise 12.6 feet , neaps 10 1/2 feet above chart
datum, and neaps range 7 1/2 feet.
At Harwich, the tides are greatly affected by
meteorological conditions. See Caution on
chart .
Tide pole . - A tide pole is erected on the inner
side of the inner end of the northeastern break
 HARWICH HARBOR
water, and a tide gage on a jetty northeastward of
the Lookout Station.
The tide pole is graduated in feet and shows the
actual height of the water in the harbor above or
below the soundings on the chart from + 12 feet
to – 3 feet; it has 3 crossbars on it, painted white,
the lower edges of which indicate mean high -water
springs, mean tide level, and zero to which sound-
ings are reduced .
Datum posts have been erected at the seaward
end of Landguard Point jetty and at a point
about 230 feet northward of the seaward end of
Harwich Breakwater.
12–73 Tidal currents. - Off Beach End, the in-
going current begins about 6 hours and the out-
going about 1 hour before high water at Harwich,
attaining velocities of 2 and 3 knots, respectively.
Off Felixstowe they commence at 6 hours before
and at high water at Harwich, attaining velocities
of 1 and 2 1/2 knots, respectively.
Northwestward of Harwich they commence at
5 1/2 hours before and 1/2 hour after high water
at Harwich , attaining velocities of 1 and 2 1/4
knots, respectively.
12–74 Pilots. — Pilots can be obtained from a
pilot vessel cruising in the vicinity of Sunk Light
Vessel. Pilotage is compulsory for all merchant
vessels of 50 tons gross and over except for British
coastal non - passenger vessels of less than 3,500
gross tons.
12–75 Directions. — The approach to Harwich
Harbor is through Rough Channel.
After passing Cork Light Vessel the channel runs
in a westerly direction between Wadgate, Platters,
Andrews, and Beach End Shoals to the northward
and Cork Spit and Ridge Shoals to the southward,
its length being about 3 miles and its breadth in the
narrowest part 300 yards between the 3 -fathom
curves. The least depth is 16 feet over the Rolling
Ground Shoal, though there is rather more water
to the northward and southward of this shoal.
At Beach End Shoal the channel turns sharply
northward and runs in a north -northeasterly
direction for 1 mile, having Cliff Foot and Shelf
Shoals on one side and Beach End Shoal and
207
(Chg 7)
detached patches on the other. The channel is at
its narrowest in this part, being only 200 yards
wide at the turn . The depths in it are irregular
with a least depth of 16 feet.
From North Shelf Light Buoy the channel
curves round to the northwest and westward past
The Glutton and Guard Shoals, where it is deeper
and more roomy to the anchorage off Harwich .
12–76 Light draft vessels may enter Harwich
at any time, but with vessels exceeding 15 feet
draft must consider the state of the tide, as 16
feet is the least depth in the fairway.
A vessel, whether approaching Harwich Har
bor from northeastward, eastward, or southward,
must make for Cork Light Vessel.
A vessel from Shipway should steer for and past
Rough Light Buoy until the Old Low Light
Tower at Harwich bears 281 ° and is open north
ward of the disused lookout station on Landguard
Point, when vessels should steer on that bearing
which leads northward of the Rough Shoals and
close southward of Cork Knolls in a least depth
of 27 feet.
A vessel from eastward after passing southward
of South Shipwash Buoy (sec . 12-19 ) should
steer with St. Nicholas Church bearing 291° ,
passing between Lower Rough and Upper
Rough in a least depth of 27 feet. After pass
ing between these shoals, a vessel should
alter course for Cork Light Vessel , passing
northeastward of the Cork Sand Buoy and then
bringing the Old Low Light Tower at Harwich to
bear 281 °; whence she should proceed as directed
below .
An alternative route for a vessel coming
from the eastward and having passed about %
mile northward of Sunk Light Vessel is to
make a course of 262 ° until the Old Light
Towers at Harwich come in range 306 ° .
Thence the vessel should alter course to 306 °
and maintain it until Cork Sand Buoy bears
346° . Thence she should steer to pass about
12 mile northeastward of the buoy and into
Rough Channel . Course should then be set
for Cork Light Vessel .
H. O. 35
 208 THAMES ESTUARY - APPROACH - ORFORDNESS TO THE NAZE
From Cork Light Vessel a vessel should steer to
pass northward of Cork Spit Light Buoy, and then
southward of Platters Light Buoy and Andrews
Buoy. Thence she should steer to pass northward
of Rolling Ground Light Buoy, and then south-
ward of Beach End Lighted Bell Buoy; the latter
buoy should be rounded carefully, guarding against
the effect of the tidal current. A vessel should
then steer to pass between Cliff Foot Light Buoy
and Northwest Beach Light Buoy, and thence
about 100 yards eastward of South Shelf Light
Buoy. From this position a vessel should steer to
pass about 100 yards eastward of North Shelf
Light Buoy; thence she should bring Landguard
Range Light Beacons in range 121° astern . This
range should be maintained astern , passing
close southwestward of an 18 - foot patch , and
then northeastward of Guard Lighted Bell
Buoy. Thence courses should be steered for
the upper anchorage .
12–77 Directions at night. - A vessel coming
from northeastward should be guided by bearings
of Cork Light Vessel, passing northward or north
westward of South Cutler Buoy .
Because of numerous wrecks in the vicinity of
South Cutler Buoy, and a 15 -foot shoal about 1/2
mile northward, the directions for vessels from
northeastward should be used with caution .
A vessel approaching from eastward should
steer to pass about 34 mile northward of Sunk
Light Vessel ; then alter course northwest-
ward
of , passing
Rough about 1 mile northeastw
Light Buoy; and thence she shoulard
d nected with the railway system . There are cranes
steer for Cork Light Vessel, bearing 270º. Or,
from a position about 1/4 mile southward of Sunk
Light Vessel, a vessel can make good a course of
270° until Cork Light Vessel bears about 308°.
Keeping it on this bearing, she should pass close
southwestward of Roughs Tower, which is marked
by light buoys, and thence between Upper Rough
and Lower Rough .
When Cork Spit Light Buoy bears 270° a vessel
should steer to pass northward of it, after which
she should proceed as directed by day.
H. O. 35
12–78 HARWICH (51°57' N. , 1 ° 17' E.), of great an
tiquity, stands upon the northern part of a peninsula
formed by a bend of the River Stour. It has derived its
importance from its secure harbor. With its rapidly in
creasing suburb of Lower Dovercourt, it is much fre
quented by summer visitors. In 1931 the population was
12,700.
Harwich Piers . - A small inner harbor or camber is en
closed on the eastern side by the northwest arm of the
passenger pier which extends 100 yards in a northwesterly
direction and has an arm extending 100 yards in a north
easterly direction. On the western side of the camber is the
Trinity House Pier.
The depths alongside the arm of the passenger pier
are from 9 to 11 feet. Both sides of the outer 300 feet
of Trinity House Pier , the terminus of the railroad from
London , have been dredged ( 1959 ) to a depth of 20
feet . A new train ferry pier extends from the shore
close southwestward of Trinity House Pier .
A channel has been dredged, to a depth of about 8 feet,
southwestward of the new train ferry pier. This channel is
about 50 feet wide and leads to the gas company's wharf.
A red conical buoy marks the southwestern side of the
entrance to this channel.
There is a 10 - ton crane at the head of the western
pier.
Parkeston Quay is 3,950 feet long . There are along
side depths of 2i to 29 feet at Berths 1 through 4 , and
10 to 19 feet at Berths 5 through 8. There are a number
of traveling cranes , the largest having a capacity of
30 tons. The quay is connected with the railway sys
tem . Some wreckage , marked by a beacon, lies about
300 yards eastward of the quay. Vessels lying along
side Parkeston Quay are berthed heading westward.
When leaving they must be careful to avoid the off
lying mooring buoys .
A light is shown from a black dolphin , 12 feet high , close
eastward of the eastern extremity of Parkeston Quay.
An artificial harbor is located on the northern side
of the fairway , opposite Parkeston Quay.
Felixstowe Dock .-A tidal dock is situated about a mile
northward of Landguard Point. The entrance between
two piers is about 150 feet wide . In 1959 there was a
least depth of 18. feet in the entrance channel and in
the basin except for a depth of 6 feet alongside the
northeastern bulkhead . These depths have to be main
tained by dredging. There are 700 feet of wharves .
A ferry boat runs to Harwich , and the dock is con
with capacities up to 10 tons.
Repairs . — Small repairs can be executed at the
dockyard at Harwich .
The one marine railway in the port is capable of ac
commodating a 1,000- ton vessel up to 150 feet in
length with a maximum draft aft of 20 feet.
Supplies. - Fresh provisions and supplies of all kindscan
be procured. Fresh water is laid onto the quays at Har
wich, Felixstowe Dock , and Parkeston Quay. Water can
also be obtained from a water boat.
A stock of coal is maintained at Felixstow e . Ves
sels can coal at Felixstowe Dock . Fuel oil is obtain
able at Felixstowe Dock .
 RIVER ORWELL
Communication . There is regularsteamer communica
tion with Antwerp , the Hook of Holland, Esbjerg, Flush
ing, and during the summer with Zeebrugge. There is
communication by rail with the general system .
Hospitals . — There is a general hospital and a small
hospital for infectious diseases.
12–79 RIVER ORWELL. — The banks of this
river are generally parallel to each other, well
wooded, and studded with villages, country seats,
and parks, and winding in a northwesterly direction
for a distance of 10 miles to Ipswich Dock gates.
The entrance to the Orwell is between Walton and
East Shotley Martello Towers, 1.3 miles apart, but
its navigable width is reduced to 500 yards by
mud flats extending from either side.
The general depth in the dredged channel is
19 feet ( 1957).
The navigable channel from Fagbury Point to
Ipswich is marked on the eastern side by black
conical buoys and black lighted buoys which show
flashing white lights, and on the western side by
red can buoys and red lighted buoys showing
flashing red lights.
The banks of the river between Collimer
Point and Ipswich are marked by beacons.
12-80 Lower Reach .From the entrance this
reach stretches 2 miles in a northerly direction to
Collimer Point, between earthen embankments.
The navigable width is about 400 yards and the
least depth 19 feet.
12–81 Long Reach - Buttermans Bay. — These
reaches are practically one, and run in a west
northwesterly direction from Collimer Point for
2 miles to Pinmill Hard and Potter Point. There
are several mooring buoys in this reach on
the south side of the channel with depths
which range from 12 to 19 feet.
Beacon . - The outer end of Pinmill Hard is
marked by a beacon, 12 feet high , and surmounted
by a white diamond.
Potters Reach curves around Hall Point and is
about 1 mile long.
209
( Chg 7 )
Downham and Freston Reaches are dredged to
a depth of 19 feet. The dredged channel is off
the western bank .
Cliff Reach , next northward of Freston Reach,
is just outside Ipswich Dock . Cliff Quay, with a
depth of 28 feet alongside, is in this reach , just
outside the dock gates.
Lights. — Two lights, disposed vertically, are ex
hibited from the head of a sewer outfall, which
extends from the root of the pier near the sewage
tanks on the eastern side of the river about a mile
below the town .
Two similar lights, disposed vertically, are ex
hibited from the southeastern and northwestern
corners of the power station jetty.
Anchorage is in soft mud in 19 to 22 feet of
water about 5.7 miles below Ipswich.
12–82 Submerged cables — Beacon's. - Sub
merged electric power cables cross the entrance to
the wet dock and thence across the river to the west
ern shore; beacons mark the direction of the cables.
Storm signals are displayed at Ipswich .
Tides. It is high water, full and change, at
Pinmill at Oh. 20m .; at Downham Reach at Oh.
27m.; and at Ipswich at Oh. 35m.; springs rise
at the 2 first-named places 12 feet and at Ipswich
13 1/2 feet.
12-83 Pilots for the Orwell are to be obtained
at Harwich Pier. Pilotage is compulsory for mer
chant vessels.
Vessels requiring a pilot during foggy weather
should sound signal “ G ” of the Morse Code in
addition to the usual signals.
Tugs are available.
12-84 IPSWICH , the chief town of Suffolk, with a
population in 1931 of 87,557, is on the northern bank of the
Orwell, about 15 miles from its entrance. It contains large
manufactories for agricultural and railroad implements,
flour and seed crushing mills, extensive breweries , and soap
and cement works, as well as shipbuilding yards and re
pairing shops.
H. O. 35
210 THAMES ESTUARY-APPROACHORFORDNESS TO THE NAZE
Quay : Cliff Quay , tidal but subject to silting ,
is 3,250 feet long and has a depth of 28 feet at
M.L.W.S. It is located on the east bank of the
River about 300 yards southward of the wet dock.
Vessels up to 400 feet in length with a limiting draft
of 2412 feet can be accommodated.
Wet dock . The wet dock has an area of 2694 acres ,
total berthing space of 5,800 feet, and alongside
depths of 8 to 23 feet . Length overall is 3,500 feet
with widths which range from 350 to 500 feet . The en
trance lock is 300 feet long, 50 feet wide , with a
depth of 23/2 feet over the sill at springs .
Repairs can be executed . Cranes up to 50 tons ca
pacity are available .
Supplies. - Fresh provisions and supplies of all kinds are
plentiful. Water is laid onto the quays.
Stocks of coal and fuel oil are maintained.
Communication S
. hore radio communication is avail
able.
Hospitals. — There are two hospitals in Ipswich; both
will accept seamen .
12-85 RIVER STOUR ( H. 0. Chart 4483).
This river, which enters Harwich Harbor on its
western side, provides water access to Manningtree;
a town about 8 miles, 270 ° from Harwich, which is
the general direction of the river. The banks,
which correspond generally with each other, are
from 1,400 yards to 1 mile apart, but the water
space is reduced to from 200 to 600 yards by mud
flats, which dry several feet, extending from them
in an almost continuous line, which are here and
there intersected by narrow creeks.
The depth in the entrance is about 30 feet;
from thence the soundings decrease irregularly as
the river is ascended . Above Erwarton Ness
for 12 mile the depths vary from 18 feet to 14
feet, with occasional holes of more than 3
fathoms. From this point as far as Harkstead
Point the depths are irregular, varying from 9
feet to 21 feet . From thence to Wrabness ,
where the main channel ceases , the depths
are between 12 and 15 feet . Above this , while
there are several deep holes, not more than 1
foot of water can be carried to Manningtree.
12–86 Shotley Point (51 °57' N., 1 ° 16 ' E.) is a
rounded point with a mud flat extending 200 yards
from it, on which are 2 tongues of sand or shingle.
The naval establishment occupies the whole of
the point.
There are 2 piers and a landing place between
them extending to the edge of the flat. The east
H.O. 35
ern Ganges Pier has a transverse arm at its
head. Bristol Pier, the westernmost, is al
most 600 feet long and had in 1956 a depth
of 15 feet alongside its head .
A 15 - foot shoal lies between 200 and 300
yards southeastward of Bristol Pier .
Erwarton Ness, a low rounded point, with
Farm Landing at its extremity, is 1.9 miles west
ward of Shotley Point ; the bank between arches
to the northward , forming an embanked bay,
which, however, is useless, as it is entirely occupied
by a mud flat and saltings . Shoal ing was re
ported in 1957 southward of Erwarton Ness .
Harkstead Point is 1.1 miles westward of the
Ness, the bank between being 8 to 20 feet high,
and wooded .
Several shoals with depths of 15 to 18 feet exist
in the River Stour at points eastward through
northward to westward of the station clock tower,
Parkeston Quay, varying in distance from 260
to 2,075 yards from the tower.
12–87 Cables . - A beacon on the eastern side
of Parkeston Quay and another 200 yards west
ward of Bristol Pier , mark the ends of the
cable laid across the river. Both are painted
in red and white horizontal bands . The cable
is laid close westward of Mooring Buoy
No. 2 .
Vessels are prohibited from anchoring inside the
line of mooring off Parkeston Quay or near the
track of steamers passing between that quay and
Harwich .
12–88 The river . - Between Harkstead Point
and Wrabness the channel suddenly becomes con
tracted and so continues ; but the banks of the
river open out, forming Holbrook Bay between
Harkstead Point and Sutton Ness on the north
ward , and Jacques Bay between Wrabness Point
and Nether Hall on the southward , and then con
tract again toward Manningtree.
The channel between the mud flats from abreast
Wrabness is intricate, and almost certain to be
subject to change, but it is buoyed, and with local
assistance, during springs, vessels drawing 12 feet
 CROUCH RIVER
The channel curves around between the line of
flats, and abreast of Sales Point is 800 yards wide,
gradually diminishing in size to a boat channel off
Osea Island.
A submarine cable , marked at both ends
by beacons , extends from Osea Island to the
main land northward .
Heybridge Basin on the north shore, about 1 1/2
miles below Maldon, is the entrance to the Chel-
mer Canal.
The channel leading to Maldon has a depth of
about 11 feet at high -water springs, and is practi-
cally dry at low water. Navigation ceases at Full
Bridge, which crosses the river near Maldon East
Railroad Station.
Depths. — The depths between Sales Point and
Mersea are from 30 to 40 feet, but they become
shoaler and irregular after passing Shingle Head
Point, and near Tollesbury Beacon there is
only 12 or 13 feet.
13-62 Beacons. — The edge of the north-
ern flat as far as Goldhanger Creek is mark
ed by beacons . The edge of the southern
mud flat is marked by a beacon about 1.3
miles above Pewit Island .
Wreck .-- A dangerous wreck marked by a
buoy lies on the edge of the northern flat
about 134 miles southwestward of East Mersea
Church .
Buoys.-From Goldhanger Creek to Hey-
bridge Basin the channel is marked by black
conical buoys on its northern side and by red
can or conical buoys on its southern side .
The various creeks and anchorages in the river
used by local pilots and fishermen are buoyed, as
also is the channel from Heybridge Basin to
Maldon .
13-63 Tides. It is high water, full and
change, at Sales Point at Oh. Om.; at Heybridge
Basin at Oh . 20m .; and at Maldon at Oh. 32m .
Springs rise 14 3/4 feet at Sales Point, 12 feet at
Heybridge Basin , and 10 feet at Hythe Wharf and
Fullbridge Wharves, Maldon . Neaps rise 10 feet,
8 feet, and 6 feet and range 5 1/4 feet, 4 feet, and
2 feet, respectively.
13–64 Pilots . - Having arrived above Sales
Point a vessel should anchor and wait for a pilot.
When vessels are expected pilots go out in good
time to meet them. The limit of the station is
Eastness
Vessels are brought in by pilots from Harwich
225
( Chg 7)
if the local pilots are not available at the limit of
their station . Requests for a pilot can be sent by
telephone from Clacton on Sea.
Pilotage is compulsory.
Directions.See directions for Colne River as
far as the Bar. After passing Bar or Eagle Buoy
steer to pass between Bench Head and Northwest
Knoll Buoys. When West Mersea Church bears
298 °, alter course for it on that bearing. When
St. Peters Chapel, bearing 223°, is in range with
Tillingham Church, alter course for Shingle Head
Point, bearing 273 ° , and then steer for Mill
Point when it bears 248 ° , until within 112
miles from it, after which a midchannel
course between the beacons should be
steered .
13-65 MALDON (51 °44' N. , 0 °41' E. ) a town with a
population in 1931 of 6,559, is situated about 4 miles above
Osea Island at the confluence of the Blackwater and
Chelmer .
The trade of the port is now chiefly carried on by barges.
There are 2 wharves and a small basin for barges, all of
which dry. There are 2 cranes, one of which can lift 2 tons.
13-66 CROUCH RIVER - Ray Sand Chan
nel. — This channel connects the southern part of
Swire Hole with the Crouch River. It lies between
Buxey Sand on the eastward and Dengie and Ray
Sands on the westward . Between the 2 - fathom
curves it is 2 miles long in a north and south direc
tion. The least depth in it is 2 feet. A pillar type
lighted buoy, painted in red and yellow vertical
stripes and showing a flashing red light is moored in
Ray Sand Channel, about 1/2 mile west-north
westward of Buxey Beacon.
Busey Beacon marks the western side of Buxey
Sand. (See sec . 13–43.)
The entrance to Crouch River is between Holli
well Point and Foulness, and is about 1,200
yards across .
Just outside it are 2 patches, with 12 feet over
them, and 25 feet between them and the sands on
the north side.
13-67 Directions - Ray Sand Channel. — This
channel is only fit for vessels of light draft. Tilling
ham old coast guard station bearing 237 ° will take
a vessel 200 yards north of North Buxey Buoy.
Then continue this course until the tower on
Foulness Point bears 203 ° , when steer for it
on this bearing until Ridge Buoy bears 64° ,
when steer with it astern for the river en
trance .
H.O. 35
226 THAMES ESTUARY—NAZE TO SHOEBURY NESS
The least depth is 1 foot . Passage should
be made only at mean high water springs .
Whitaker Channel is the southern approach to
Crouch River; it lies between Buxey and Sunken
Buxey Sands to the northward and Whitaker
Spit and Foulness Sand to the southward . The
channel from abreast Whitaker Beacon to abreast
Foulness is about 6 miles long, with a varying
breadth of 800 yards at its outer to barely 400
yards at its inner end .
There is a least depth of 7 feet on the rec
ommended track but in 1958 considerably
less water than charted was reported to exist
in the northeastern part of the channel . At
that time there was a least depth of 9 feet
between Whitaker Lighted Bell Buoy and S.
Buxey Buoy.
The depths are variable , but the least wa
ter is 2 feet on Sunken Buxey on the south of 15 to 29 feet in the fairway. The least
side of the recommended channel .
13-68 Buoys . — The northern side of the chan
nel is marked by 2 buoys:
A black conical buoy marked " S. Buxey , "
moored in 26 feet on the southern portion of the
shoal 24 miles east- southeastward of Buxey
Beacon .
A can buoy , marked “ W. Buxey ” painted
in red and white checkers and showing a
group flashing white light, is moored about
2 miles southward of Buxey Beacon.
For Whitaker Buoy and Beacon , see sections
13–30 and 13–31.
A can buoy marked " Ridge,” painted in red and
white checkers, surmounted by a red can top
mark, moored in about 23 feet, on the northern
edge of Foulness Sand, marks the southern side of
Whitaker Channel.
A black conical buoy , marked “ Outer
Crouch ” is moored on the northern side of
the channel almost 1% miles north northeast
ward of Foulness Point.
A spherical buoy , painted in red and white
stripes and marked " Inner Crouch ” , is
moored in the middle of the fairway about 13 through the River Roach, with Havengore and
miles westward of Foulness Point.
Crouch buoy , a red can buoy , is moored on
the southern side of the channel about 2/3
mile north -northwestward of Foulness Point.
13-69 Directions . - From abrea st West
Gunfleet Buoy steer to pass southeastward of
H.O. 35
Swin Spitway Lighted Bell Buoy , thence
steer for S. Buxey Buoy and then ce to W.
Buxey Light Buoy .
Leaving W.Buxey Light Buoy close to port,
a course of 23 3° should be steered for
Churchend Spire , located about 2 % miles
west -southwestward of Foulness Point , in
order to pass southeastward of Outer Crouch
Buoy . Deep draft vessels should keep west
ward of this line to obtain deeper water
From Outer Crouch Buoy a course of 2421%
should be steered passing close north west
ward of Crouch Buoy . Thence steer for Inner
Crouch Buoy passing close northward of it.
From this position steer a midchannel course
until reaching the entrance to Roach River ,
when keep to the northern side of the chan
nel and pass to the northward of Horse Shoal.
1
This passage is very narrow , but has depths
depth on Horse Shoal is 3 feet , gravel bottom .
13–70 The river, from its source in the south
ern part of Essex to its outlet at Foulness, is
26 miles long, its course for the last 5 miles being
between low embanked lands. The river from its
entrance runs in a westerly direction for 5 miles to
Burnham , and has a clear channel as far as the
outlet of the Roach River at Nass Point on its
southern bank.
Between this outlet and Burnham the channel
becomes partially blocked by Horse Shoal, with
3 feet over it, but with depths of 15 to 29 feet
in the channel northward of it.
Off Burnham there is a shoal with 1 1/2 fathoms
extending from it.
One mile above Burnham the course of the river
turns northwestward ; there is a rock, with a depth
of less than 6 feet over it, at the turning southward
of Cricksea, and 1 mile farther on the stream bi
furcates, forming Bridgemarsh Island . The main
channel, however, is southward of the island ;
northward of the island it dries.
There is communication from the Crouch
New England Creeks.
Tides. It is high water, full and change, at
Hullbridge at Oh. 25m.; springs rise 16 feet,
neaps 11 feet.
Anchorage . — There is anchorage abreast the
town or within 1/2 mile on either side of it, but
 THAMES ESTUARY, SOUTHERN SHORE 229
( Chg 7)
ward and northwestward and dries at low water, Isle of Thanet. There are groynes and sluices on
the bottom being sand and mud. There are depths it, and a sand bank drying 2 feet extending 800
at the pierhead of 12 feet and 10 feet at high water yards from it. The Minnies Ledge is at its eastern
springs and neaps, respectively. These depths vary end, off the junction of the cliffs with a low coast
considerably according to prevailing winds. line, commonly called Cliff End.
Outside the harbor, from the root of the harbor A small mooring buoy has been placed off West
pier, an iron promenade and landing pier, much gate Bay.
used by steamers, extends 478 yards northward to The following are conspicuous objects:
a depth of 9 feet at low water. The sea -bathing infirmary, a large brick build
14-7 Margate light (51 °23'N ., 1 °23'E . , ing with wings, and a terrace of lofty houses at
B.A. Chart 1607 ). A light is shown from an Westbrook , 1/2 mile westward of Margate.
iron column 12 feet high , on the head of the Birchington Village, 1/2 mile from the coast,
Promenade Pier. on an eminence, 1 1/2 miles westward of West
A fog signal is sounded occasionally. gate, with a large dark -looking church spire, and
Several white or red lights are displayed , Quex Spire, 1,400 yards southeastward of Birch
upon request , from flagstaffs on the head of ington.
the Promenade Pier to assist vessels in St. Nicholas Church, which has a conspicuous
berthing . tower, stands 2 1/2 miles westward of Quex.
Beacon . - A beacon marks the outer end of a Beacon . — A beacon marks a sewer outfall about
storm water outfall about 400 yards westward of 11/2 miles westward of Birchington.
the end of the breakwater. Rifle range. — There is a rifle range between
Storm signals are displayed from a flagstaff on Birchington and Reculvers, extending off to Mar
the promenade. gate Hook, as charted . The bylaws are similar to
A signal station of Lloyds is located at Margate, those for Clacton on Sea.
but communication is restricted to vessels shelter- 14-10 Reculvers is 3.1 miles westward of Cliff
ing through stress of weather. End. This is the site of an ancient Roman fortress,
Coast guard .— There is a station at Margate. which protected the mouth of the Wantsum River.
Two lifeboats are maintained here; tbere are also A tower called North Tower stands on the
belts and lines and a rocket apparatus. coast at Reculvers .
Tides .It is high water, full and change, at A sandy flat on which there are rocky ledges ex
Margate, at 11h. 45m.; springs rise 15 1/2 feet, tends 400 yards off the Reculvers.
neaps 13 feet, and neaps range 10 1/2 feet. Storm signals are displayed at Bishopstone,
14–8 Margate is chiefly noted as a watering about 1 1/2miles westward of Reculvers.
place, but it has some little trade, and a consider- 14-11 Coast. To the westward of Reculvers,
able fishery for skate, soles, etc., is carried on. the coast, for 3 miles to Herne Bay, is composed
The town is connected with London by the South- of high earth cliffs, with a sand flat, on which
eastern & Chatham Railway. Supplies of all kinds there are rocks, in front of them ; Beltinge Bay is
are abundant. About 900 tons of coal are kept in half way between the two places, though no real
stock. Population was 31,312 in 1931. bay now exists.
A hospital will receive urgent cases here. Herne Bay is a modern summer resort. The
town extends along the shore nearly 1 mile easterly
14-9 COAST. – From Margate the coast and westerly. Near the center of the town and
trends to the westward 6 1/2 miles to Reculvers; fronting the sea is a lofty clock tower, a short
the eastern half of it is irregular and composed of distance to the southwestward of which is a low
cliffs with breaks in them at St. Mildred, Westgate, white windmill. The waterworks tower, about
and Epple Bays; it is fronted by rocky ledges, 1,200 yards southeastward of the clock tower, is
drying 400 to 600 yards. Nayland Ledge about a also a conspicuous mark.
mile westward of Margate extends 1,400 yards off- Storm signals are displayed from the pier
shore. The western half, which is low , flat, and head .
straight, is the northern edge of the Wantsum 14–12 The village of Herne, 1 1/2 miles south
River Valley, which forms the western limit of the ward of the town, is surrounded by trees, and on
H.O. 35
230 THAMES ESTUARY, NORTH FORELAND TO THE NORE
the high land to the northeast of the village is
Herne Mill, black, with a white top, elevated 148
feet, which is a conspicuous object from the sea,
and visible many miles. The population in 1931
was 11,244.
Piers. - A pier, constructed on iron piles, pro-
jects 1,400 yards in a 340 ° direction from the coast
near the church .
The ruins of a small pier , marked by a bea-
con with a red can topmark , are 1,600 yards
westward of the main pier .
Light. - A light is exhibited from a mast on the
town pier end.
The coast, which runs 3 miles westward from
Herne Bay to Whitstable, has two slight recessions
named Studhill and Tankerton Bays ; on the low
point between the two there is a small stream on
which stands the village of Swalecliff. Tankerton
Castle stands at the western end of Tankerton
Bay. The sands extend about 1/2 mile from this
part of the coast, and off Tankerton Castle the
drying part of Whitstable Street, an ancient cause
way , dries out and projects in a hard narrow
ridge, 1.1 miles from it.
14–13 Whitstable Harbor. — This harbor is
situated on the eastern point of the entrance of
East Swale .
The harbor dries, but at mean high water
springs there is a depth of 13 1/2 feet in the en-
trance and 11 feet alongside the quays.
Whitstable Church, white, with a square low
tower, standing on rising ground, and 2 windmills
above the town are conspicuous marks.
Pilotage .-- A Trinity House pilot is sta-
tioned atWhitstable. Non-compulsory vessels
requiring his services, without the previous
services of a sea pilot, should communicate
in advance with the Pilot Office , Dover . The
pilot will board in the vicinity of Whitstable
Street Buoy (sec . 14-22 ).
Signals. — The following signals are shown from
a flagstaff at the entrance of the harbor, indicating
the depth in it :
Signal
1. A red flag balf -mast .
-
2. A red flag balf -mast, with ball under .
3. A red flag balf -mast, with ball over
4. A red flag at masthead . Exceeds 12 feet
H. 0. 35
When a black ball alone is hoisted, entry or
departure is prohibited. When the red light is
exhibited below the main harbor light at night, or
the black ball is displayed from the flagstaff,
by day, vessels must anchor in the bay and wait
for instructions from the harbor master.
Regulations. — The master of every petroleum
ship shall, on nearing Whitstable Harbor, and
while in the harbor, display by day a red flag and
by night a red light at the masthead.
14-14 Whitstable Light (51 °22' N. , 1 °02' E.) .
-A light is shown from a square white chimney, 50
feet high, situated at the harbor. A red light, in
dicating that entrance is prohibited , is shown 15
feet below the white light.
A beacon , with a can topmark painted yel
low above black, marks the extremity of a
sewer outfall almost 14 mile east -northeast
ward of Whitstable light structure .
Coast guard - Lifesaving.There is a station
at Whitstable where line throwing apparatus is
maintained .
14-15 Measured distance . — There is a meas
ured distance of 3,042 feet, westward of the harbor,
marked by posts on the shore.
14-16 WHITSTABLE . - The town is of some note
from the large oyster fishery connected with it.
Population was 11,201 in 1931.
Repairs .- Small repairs are executed.
Supplies . - Coal may be obtained in small quantities
about 300 tons being kept in stock, and steamers of 13 feet
draft coal alongside the wharf at high water. The coal
wharf is 200 yards long and dry at lowwater. Supplies can
be obtained at 24 hours' notice, and good water is laid on
the quays.
14-17 ISLE OF SHEPPEY (51° 23' N., 0 °50'
E. , B.A. Chart 1607).— This island is separated
from the coast of Kent by the Swale, a narrow and
tortuous channel.
Shell Ness, 3 miles westward of Whitstable, is
the southeastern point of the island, from which
to Garrison Point, its northwestern extremity, its
entire length is 8 3/4 miles in a 300 ° direction .
Its average breadth is about 4 miles.
The southeastern and northwestern parts of the
Depth
island are low, as also is the southern side, with
10 feet
11 feet
the exception of the elevation around Harty and
Elmley villages. The northern part is highest,
12 feet
reaching near its center at Kingsborough a height
of 245 feet.
 ISLE OF SHEPPEY
The cliffs on the northeastern coast are subject
to much denudation , owing principally to land-
slips caused by percolating water. The towns of
Sheerness and Queenborough are situated on the
western side of the isle .
Shell Ness, the western point of the entrance to
the East Swale, may be recognized by its low
yellow beach with a square beacon and the disused
coast-guard buildings upon it. From Shell Ness
the coast of Sheppey, which is low, trends 3 miles
to the northwestward to Warden Point, where it
rises suddenly; the shore flat, drying several feet,
extends 1 to 1 1/4 miles from it.
Leysdown village and church are conspicuous
on rising ground, 2 miles from Shell Ness.
Shoal flat. — The 1 - fathom curve extends 4 miles
northward from Shell Ness, where there is a depth
of 1 foot close within its edge, and then turns at
right angles to the westward as far as Garrison
Point.
14-18 Warden Point is a steep clay cliff 150
feet high. There is a small jetty 600 yards south-
ward of it.
Coast Guard - Lifesaving.There is a station
on Warden Point where line throwing apparatus
is maintained .
From Warden Point the coast turns to the west-
ward for 6 miles to Garrison Point. It consists of
clay cliffs from 20 to 160 feet in height, between
Warden Point and Minster, beyond which they de-
cline and disappear 1 mile eastward of Barton
Point, when the land becomes low, and from thence
it is protected by groynes and a sea wall to Garrison
Point. A mud flat extends 400 to 1,600 yardsfrom it.
An obstruction , marked by a light, extends
about 1 mile northward from Royal Oak Point,
a point about 23 miles westward of Warden
Point.
Minster, a village 3 1/2 miles to the westward of
Warden Point, and 1,000 yards from the coast,
stands upon the northwestern end of the high part
of Sheppey, and its church, with a short, square
tower, surmounted by a white turret, is the most
231
( Chg 71
prominent object on the island , being visible from
all directions seaward .
At Sheer Ness the dockyard chapel with a square
tower and flagstaff, Miletown Church and mills,
the Roman Catholic Chapel, and the masting
shears rising above all, are the most conspicuous
objects.
14–19 THE SWALE (51° 23' N. , 0°57' E. , B.
A. Chart 1607).- The Swale is a narrow and cir
cuitous strait which makes the Isle of Sheppey an
island. The entrances are called East and West
Swale.
The channel through East and West Swale is
marked by stakes driven into the mud on either
side .
In East Swale the least depth is about 8 feet, în
West Swale about 8 feet, and off Spitend Point
2 feet .
Shoal flats, which dry at low water, extend from
the shore on either side for 200 yards or more, and
off Harty Ferry there is a " horse” which forms a
pocket of deep water having 20 to 27 feet in it.
The channel , which lies midway between the flats,
is in some places only 100 yards wide.
From Shell Ness at the eastern to Queenborough
Point at the western entrance it is about 12 miles
long, its eastern part as far as Milton Creek being
about 1/2 mile and its remaining portion about
200 yards wide.
Two miles within Shell Ness there is a hill , 90
feet high, on the slopes of which is Harty village,
and 4 miles westward of it is the village of Elmley,
situated on a hill 39 feet high. Between these two
elevations is the entrance at Spitend Point to
Windmill Creek , which forms the Isle of Elmley .
Kingsferry, where there is a railroad bridge, is 1
mile northwestward of Elmley, and Long Point ,
where the channel takes an S -shaped turn , is 2
miles northwestward of the bridge. Queenborough
Point is 1,400 yards from Long Point on the south
ern side of the Swale.
H.O. 35
232 THAMES ESTUARY, NORTH FORELAND TO THE NORE
14–20 The coast from Whitstable to Faver
sham Creek , 5 miles distant, is low and nearly
straight, with higher land 1 mile inshore of it .
From thence the coast follows the convolutions
of the opposite shore to Conyer Creek for 3 miles ,
near the entrance to which is Fowley Island .
From Conyer Creek it continues low to the en
trance of Milton Creek, off which there are some
irregularly shaped , marshy islands. From here it
curves in correspondence with the northern shore
to Swale Ness at the western entrance to the strait.
Vessels should be careful to keep in the navi
gable channel as it is bounded by oyster beds.
Vessels grounding on these beds are liable to
damages.
14-21 Dangers in the approach . — Columbine
Sand is a shoal, as defined by the 1 -fathom curve,
with a T -head, extending 2/4 miles northeast
ward from Shell Ness. The center portion of it
dries 2 feet for over 1 mile.
On the southern side of East Swale the Whit
stable Flats, drying 2 feet, extend into Whitstable
Bay, 1 mile from the coast. Pollard Spit, which
dries 1 foot, projects as a tongue 3/4 mile from
the flats.
14-22 Buoys . — A black conical buoy, marked
"Sandend”, is moored in about 12 feet, 700 yards
so uthea stward of Harty Quay . A spherical
buoy , painted in red and white bands , is
moored close off the western entrance point
of Faversham Creek.
A small buoy on the northern side of Harty
Ferry marks the oyster beds. All vessels must
pass southward of this buoy.
Whitstable Street Buoy , a red and white
checkered can buoy surmounted by a can top
mark, is moored about 2 miles northward of
Whitstable Harbor Light.
Columbine Buoy, a black conical buoy, is
moored about 2.4 miles northward of Whitstable
Harbor Light.
Columbine Spit Buoy, a black conical buoy, is
moored about 2.2 miles northwestward of Whit
stable Harbor Light.
H. 0. 35
Pollard Spit Buoy, a red can buoy, is moored
2.1 miles west-northwestward of Whitstable Har
bor Light.
Ham Gat Buoy, a black conical buoy, is moored
about 2 1/2 miles west -northwestward of Whit
stable Harbor Light.
Railroad (swing) bridge . — The width between
the buttresses is 58 1/2 feet, and at high -water
springs there is a depth of 26 feet within 3 feet of
each buttress, shelving down to 30 feet in mid
channel.
Bridge lights. — When the bascule is in position
the passage through the bridge will be marked by a
red light on each side and a white light in the
center. When it is raised the passage will be
marked by a red light on each side only.
Lighted range beacons stand on the south
shore of West Swale close westward of Rid
ham Dock . These bea cons in range 14712
lead through the bridge opening.
14–23 Anchorage.-- If obliged to anchor out
side , there is a good berth in 9 to 14 feet mud
bottom near Columbine Spit Buoy, or farther out,
in 19 to 21 feet, in what is known as Fishermans
Hole , 12 mile north -northeastward of Whitstable
Street Buoy. Good shelter from north winds is to
be found within the Swale.
There are a number of mooring buoys in West
Swale.
Faversham Creek . — The entrance to this creek ,
which is about 200 yards wide, is 5 miles westward
of Whitstable. Six hundred yards within the
entrance Oare Creek branches off to the south
ward, and Faversham Creek makes a complete
curve to the eastward for 2 miles to the town of
Faversham , which had in 1931 a population of
10,091. Both creeks dry out at low water.
Wrecks . — A dangerous wreck lies sunk in
East Swale, about 1,365 yards 173° from Harty
Church .
A wreck lies in West Swale about 535 yards
187° from the conspicuous chimney on Long
Point. This wreck is awash at high water and is
marked by two green spherical buoys located close
 EDINBURGH CHANNELS
knots . The eastgoing current sets from 096°
to 123° , from 2 hours before to 6 hours after
high water at Dover , with a maximum rate of
3 knots .
Directions.-- Vessels proceeding through
the North Edinburgh Channel should , from a
position close northward of Tongue Light
Vessel , steer west- northwestward for about
2 miles to pass between the channel buoys
marking the eastern entrance, and thence
should be guided by the buoyage.
14-33 South Edinburgh Channel, which is
separated from North Edinburgh Channel by
Shingles Patch, runs parallel to the north-
eastern side of Shingles Sand . As defined
by the 6-fathom curves , it is very narrow at
its eastern entrance and very steep -to on its
southwestern side . There is a bar with a
least depth of 26 feet in the western en
trance of the channel .
Dangers forming the channel. — Shingles
Patch is described in section 14-29 .
Shingles Sand, which forms the southwest
ern side of the channel , is shaped like a
tortoise, and is 5 miles long and 24 miles
wide , as defined by the 3 -fathom curve . It
dries from 1 to 8 feet over certain areas .
These areas , which it is not necessary to
describe, are named North , South, and West
235
( Chg 7)
Shing les. West Shingles, as defined by the
3 - fathom curve , was extending southwestward
in 1956 .
Beacon . - Northwest Shingles Beacon ,
painted black and surmounted by an inverted
cone , stands on the northern part of West
Shingles .
14–34 Buoyage.-- South Edinburgh Chan
nel and its approaches are buoyed in accord
ance with the uniform system ; each numbered
buoy is marked S. Edinburgh .
The eastern approach is marked on its
northern side by Edinburgh Fairway Light
Buoy , a spherical buoy painted in red and
white bands , moored about 214 miles west
northwestward of Tongue Light Vessel . The
southern side of the approach is marked by
E. Shingles Light Buoy, a spherical buoy
painted in red and white horizontal bands ,
moored about 234 miles westward of Tongue
Light Vessel.
The western approach is marked on its
northern side by Edinburgh Channels Light
Buoy , a spherical buoy painted in red and
white horizontal bands, moored about 194
miles northeastward of N.W. Shingles Bea
con. The southern side of this approach is
marked by N.E. Shingles Light Buoy , which
is moored about 1 mile north eastward of N.W.
Shing les Beacon .
14-35 This section has been deleted .
H.O. 35
236 THAMES ESTUARY, NORTH FORELAND TO THE NORE
14-36 Tidal currents. - At about a mile south
westward of Tongue Light Vessel, the tidal cur-
rents are rotary with the hands of the clock , be-
coming slack at about high and low water at
Sheerness. The maximum strength of the current
is about 2 1/2 knots at about 2 hours before and
3 hours after high water.
14–37 Directions . - On approaching from
southeastward steer for a position close
southward of Outer Tongue Lighted Bell and
Whistle Buoy, passing about 134 miles east-
ward of N.E. Spit Light Buoy, and thence
steer to pass northward of Tongue Light Ves-
sel . From the Tongue Light Vessel steer
westward to pass between Edinburgh Fair-
way Light Buoy and E. Shingle Light Buoy ,
and thence be guided by the buoys in the
the channel.
BLACK DEEP CHANNEL, KNOB
14–38 BLACK
CHANNEL , AND OAZE DEEP ( B. A. Chart
1607).— That part of Black Deep which washes
the northwestern side of Shingles Sand, and which
is used as a fairway by vessels after leaving Edin-
burgh Channel, may for the sake of distinction be
called Black Deep Channel. It is quite straight
and is 5 miles long in about a 064 ° and 244 °
direction, % mile wide , and free from danger .
It lies between the Shingles and a detached
shoal area , lying about a mile northwestward
of the shingles.
The depths in it range roughly from 70 feet at
its eastern to 50 feet at its southwestern end.
The Knob Channel leads into Oaze Deep from
the southwestern end of Black Deep Channel and
from the western ends of Alexandra Channel and
of the channel southward of the Girdler, passing
between Knob Lighted Bell Buoy and Shiver
ing Sand Light Buoy. It has a least width of
almost 1 mile between the 6- fathom curves ,
but two shoal 35 - foot patches exist close to
H. O. 35
the northern and southern sides of the chan -
nel at its narrowest part. In 1958 there was a
least depth of 36 feet in the fairway between
these two patches.
Oaze Deep, which is an extension south
westward of Barrow Deep, lies between the
Oaze Sand (sec . 13-9 ) , northwestward and
the Red Sand and Cant southeastward . It has
a least width , at its western end , of about
1/2 mile between the 6 - fathom lines, and is free
from dangers; there are general depths of from
8 to 12 fathoms in the fairway.
14-39 Towers .-Red Sand Tower (51 °
29' N., 1 ° 00' E.), a group of seven towers ,
is located on the southern side of Oaze Deep
about 14 mile southward of the 6-fathom
curve .
Lighted bell buoys are located close north
we stward and close southeastward of Red
Sand Tower .
14-40 Dangers forming these channels.
-A detached shoal area , which, as defined
by the 3 -fathom curve , is irregular in shape
and about 194 miles in extent, lies on the
northwestern side of the southern part of
Black Deep Channel ; it has a least depth of
7 feet. Within the 5 -fathom curve it is joined
to Long Sand , about 294 miles east-northeast
ward of it, and to Knock John Sand (sec.
13–6 ), of which it is considered a part , about
1 mile westward of it .
Knob Shoal is a narrow ridge extending
about 4 %, miles west-southwestward from the
detached shoal described above ; it has
general depths of 19 to 34 feet, excepting a
detached patch about 3% mile long at its
northeastern end which has a least depth of
15 feet . Knob Shoal lies on the northern side
of Knob Channel .
Mouse Sand and Oaze Sand are described
in section 13-9 .
 BLACK DEEP CHANNEL , KNOB CHANNEL, OAZE DEEP
Black Deep Channel, is described in section 14-33. Sand, previously noted; its southwestern end
Shoaling is reported to be taking place along the tapers to a point, and on it lies the Spile Shoal,
northwestern edge of Shingles Bank between N.
Shingles Buoy and N. W. Shingles Beacon .
The Girdler Shoal, forming the southeastern
side of Knob Channel, is shaped like a cocked hat,
with its crown to the northward and its rim 1 mile The soundings on it are more regular than those
below it to the southward, the latter being 2 3/4
miles long, within the 3 -fathom curve. It dries
from 1 to 3 feet in two patches near the crown ;
it is situated about 1/2 mile southwestward of
Shingles Sand.
Red Sand , southward of Oaze Deep, is ,
as defined by the 3 - fathom curve , a narrow
tongue thrusting into the southern part of
Black Deep parallel to the northwestern edge
of the Kentish Flats and about 12 mile from
it. Within the 5 -fathom curve it forms the
southern side of Oaze Deep. There is a dry
ing area at its center .
Shivering Sand , with general depths of 3 to
5 fathoms, is the extension northeastward of
Red Sand . It is about 2 mi les long . Its north-
eastern end forms the southern side of Knob
Channel.
14-41 Three concrete towers , known as Shiv
ering Sand Fort, stand near the southern side of
Knob Channel and mark Shivering Sand .
Lighted bell buoys are located close north
ward and close southward of Shivering Sand
Fort .
Middle and Spile Shoals, lying close southwest
ward of Red Sand, are extensions northward of
The Spaniards. The eastern part consists of a
shoal finger with I foot over it, running in a
northeasterly direction for 1 1/2 miles. The center
is also a finger which dries, running in the same
direction, its extension being the Gilman .
The western part, which dries in patches, and
which is extending northward , is of much greater
extent, its prolongation northeastward being Red
237
( Chg 7 )
which dries as a narrow ridge, 1,600 yards long.
14-42 The Cant is an extensive shoal lying off
the coast between Warden and Garrison Points,
its 3 -fathom curve being 3 miles from the shore.
on the Kentish Flats and the edge steep - to. On
the eastern part of The Cant the 2 - fathom curve
forms 2 projections; the southern projection,
which has no name, has 4 feet on it, but the north
ern one is known as " East Cant” and has a depth
of 4 feet on it just within the northern edge of
the shoal. There are numerous pieces of wreckage
drying at low water on The Cant.
14-43 Beacons . -N.W . Shingles Beacon
is described in section 14-33 .
South Girdler Beacon , with a triangular
topmark , is located about 24 miles south
southeastward of Shivering Sand South
Tower .
Middle Sand Beacon is described in sec .
tion 14-65 .
A light beacon is located on the Cant
about 234 miles west -southwestward of Red
Sand Tower .
14–44 . Buoyage . — The uniform system of
buoyage is used in Black Deep Channel ,
Knob Channel, and Oaze Deep; it marks the
main channel leading from the Edinburgh
Channels to Sea Reach No. 1 Light Buoy at
the entrance to Yantlet Dredged Channel
(sec . 15–32 ) . The buoys are not numbered
but , instead , are marked with names de .
scriptive of the dangers previously described
in section 14–40 .
Black Deep Channel on its northwestern
side is marked by the following buoys :
E. Knock John Light Buoy, moored about
114 miles northward of N.W.Shingles Beacon .
Knock John Light Buoy , moored about 134
miles westward of N.W. Shingles Beacon .
H. 0. 35
238 THAMES ESTUARY , NORTH FORELAND TO THE NORE
The southwestern side is marked by the
following buoys :
N. Shingles Light Buoy, moored about 1/3
mile northward of N.W. Shingles Beacon .
Mid -Shing les Buoy, moored about 34 mile
westward of N.W. Shingles Beacon.
N.W. Shingles Light Buoy , moored about
24 miles southwestward of N.W. Shingles
Beacon .
Knob Channel on its northern side is mark-
ed by :
S.E. Knob Light Buoy, moored about 1 1/3 maximum rate of 242
miles northeastward of Shivering Sand North
Tower .
Knob Light Buoy , moored about 34 mile
northward of Shivering Sand North Tower .
No. 17 Barrow Light Buoy (sec . 13-15 ) .
Oaze Deep is marked on its northern side
by :
South Oaze Light Buoy , moored about 1
mile northward of Red Sand Tower .
S.W. Oaze Light Buoy , moored about 13
miles west-northwestward of Red Sand
Tower .
West Oaze Light Buoy , moored about 24
miles west- northwestward of Red Sand
Tower .
The southern side of Oaze Deep is marked
by :
Shivering Sand Tower (sec . 14–41 ) .
Red Sand Tower ( sec . 14-39 ) .
East Spile Light Buoy with a radar re-
flector, moored nearly 2 miles westward of
Red Sand Tower .
H.O. 35
East Cant Light Buoy , moored about 314
miles westward of Red Sand Tower .
14-45 Buoy.-E. Red Sand Light Buoy ,
a red buoy showing a group flashing red
light, is moored on the southeastern side
of Red Sand about 34 mile southwestward of
Shivering Sand Tower.
14-46 Tidal currents .-In the northeast
ern part of Black Deep Channel the west
going current sets from 242 ° to 287° from
4 hours before to high water at Dover at a
2 % knots . The eastgoing
current sets from 062 ° to 073 ° from 2 hours
after to 6 hours after high water at Dover ,
with a maximum rate of 242 knots .
14-47 Directions . - After leaving either
of the Edinburgh Channels , vessels should
steer west- southwestward to pass in mid
channel through Black Deep Channel to the
eastern end of Knob Channel . Thence steer
through Knob Channel and Oaze Deep, pass
ing southward of West Oaze Light Buoy .
From the latter position steer a west-north
westerly course to the entrance of Yantlet
Dredged Channel (sec . 15-32) .
14-48 PRINCES AND ALEXANDRA CHAN
NELS (51° 50' N. , 1 ° 20' E., B.A . Chart 1607).
The seaward entrance to Princes Channel is situ
ated 1 1/2 miles southward of Edinburgh Channel,
and it runs for about 8 miles between Shingles and
Girdler Sands to the northward, and the Tongue
and Ridge Shoals and Kentish Flats to the south
ward ; its sides are generally steep -to, the widths
varying from 1 mile at the eastern to 800 yards at
the western end. The depths over the eastern
 PRINCES AND ALEXANDRA CHANNELS
part of the entrance are from 36 feet to over 70
feet, shoaling gradually to its western end, where
there is a kind of bar with a least depth of 18 feet
over it between the Girdler and Kentish Flats.
Alexandra Channel, which branches off to the
northwestward from the middle part of Princes
Channel, lies between West Shingles and Girdler
Sand s. In 1957 it had a least depth of 17 feet
in the fairway. A wreck , with a swept depth
of 2 feet, lies in the south western half of the
channel at its northern end in a position
about 274 miles northward of Pan Sand Bea
con .
14-49 Dangers.—The northern side of Princes
Channel is formed by Shingles and Girdler Sands
which are described in sections 14-33 and 14-38 .
The southern side of the channel is formed by:
The Tongue, Ridge, Pan Sand , and the northern
edge of Kentish Flats. The latter is described in
section 14-55.
The Tongue and Ridge are two parts of the same
shoal which , as defined by the 3 -fathom curve,
extend from a point 2 miles north -northwestward
of Margate Beacon to Pan Sand. The Ridge,
which dries 5 feet about 142 miles from its
western end , extends eastward from the north
eastern edge of Kentish Flats. The Tongue, as
defined by the 3 -fathom curve, extends about 3
miles eastward of the Ridge, and as defined by
the 6 - fathom curve it extends about 4 miles
further in an east-northeasterly direction.
Pan Sand , which dries near its center ,
lies on the northeastern edge of Kentish
Flats , and is a narrow ridge about 2 miles
long. It is nearly joined with the western
end of the Ridge .
Beacon . - Pan Sand Beacon , with a trun-
cated cone topmark , stands near the center
of Pan Sand .
14--50 Tongue Sand Tower is a twin con-
crete tower standing in the approach to Prin-
ces Channel almost 6 miles northward of
Margate Pier .
A spherical light buoy , painted in black,
red , and white horizontal bands and showing
a quick flashing red light, is moored about
200 yards northeastward of Tongue Sand
Tower ; a lighted bell and whistle buoy with a
similar color and which shows a quick flash
ing white light is moored about 200 yards dra Channel, but have a tendency to rotate clock
southwestward .
239
( Chg 7 )
14--51 Buoyage in Princes Channel is
marked in accordance with the uniform system
of buoyage ; buoys are marked with names
descriptive of their locality.
The northern side is marked from seaward
by :
E. Shingles Light Buoy (sec . 14—34 ) .
S.E. Shingles Buoy , moored about 234 miles
west- northwestward of Tongue Sand Tower .
S. Shingles Lighted Whistle Buoy, moored
nearly 4 miles westward of Tongue Sand
Tower .
S.E. Girdler Lighted Bell Buoy, moored
about 1 % miles north - northeastward of Pan
Sand Beacon .
West Girdler Lighted Bell Buoy , a spheri
cal buoy painted in black and white hori
zontal bands , moored at the entrance to
Black Deep about 144 miles east-southeast
ward of Shivering Sand South Tower .
The southern side is marked from seaward
by:
East Tongue Light Buoy, moored about 2
miles west - southwestward of Tongue Sand
Tower .
N.E. Tongue Buoy , moored about 342 miles
west- southwestward of Tongue Sand Tower .
North Tongue Light Buoy , moored about
2 miles northeastward of Pan Sand Beacon.
North Pan Sand Buoy , moored about 1 mile
north - northwestward of Pan Sand Beacon.
Girdler Light Buoy, moored about 1 mile
southeastward of Shivering Sand South
tower .
Alexandra Channel is not buoyed.
Anchorage. — The best anchorage is southward
of the fairway opposite the Girdler Sand, in about
21 to 30 feet, 1 mile northward of Pan Sand Bea
con . There are depths of from 21 to 23 feet close
southward of this anchorage. The sands afford
protection especially at low water.
14-52 Tidal currents . In the eastern part of
Princes Channel close southwestward of South
Shingles Light Buoy, there appears to be no slack
water. The west-going current begins suddenly
5 hours before, and the east- going one hour after,
high water at Sheerness; they attain rates of
1/2 to 2 1/4 knots.
The currents do not set fairly through Alexan
wise. The west -going current is inclined to set
H.O. 35
 240 THAMES ESTUARY, NORTH FORELAND TO THE NORE
toward the Girdler and the east-going current 4 miles northwestward of Margate Pier, it
toward the Shingles. The buoys form a good guide dries 1 to 4 feet over a large area of irregu
as to how the current is setting, and when strong it lar width for about 274 miles . Eastward of
causes them to wobble.
14-53 Directions . - From the eastward ,
vessels should, after passing Tongue Light
Vessel, steer to pass between South Shin-
gles Lighted Whistle Buoy and N.E. Tongue
Buoy. Thence steer , guided by the buoyage ,
to pass about 300 yards southward of West
Girdler Lighted Bell Buoy . From this posi-
tion vessels may pass either northward into
Knob Channel or westward between East
Red Sand Light Buoy and Shivering Sand
Tower into Oaze Deep.
A least depth of 21 feet will be encountered
in this channel .
14–54 Queens Channel (51°27' N., 1º25' E.,
B.A. Chart1 607 ), which is separated from Princes
Channel by Tongue and Ridge Shoals and limited
by Margate Sand, the Wedge and the Woolpack
to the southward, is for all but small craft more in
the nature of a bight in a series of shoals than a
channel, as its western end, as far as deeper draft
vessels are concerned , is blocked almost
completely by the Kentish Flats, through
which there is no well -defined channel. A
narrow unmarked channel , with a depth of 20
feet, gives access to the western end of
Princes Channel between Ridge and Pan
Sand . The eastern entrance is 192 miles wide ,
and the depths , though irregu lar , decrease
genera lly for a distance of 872 miles to Pan
Sand Hole at the edge of the flat .
Though there is no actual channel the passage
connecting Pan Sand Hole with Four Fathoms
Channel appears to be to the southward of West
Pan Sand Buoy and from thence to East Spaniard
Buoy, 2 1/2 miles distant, over which a deptb of
11 feet should be carried to the entrance of the
channel.
14-55 Dangers forming the channel.-
The Tongue , Ridge , and Pan Sand forming
the northern side of the channel are describ
ed in section 14-49 .
Margate Sand is the northern and eastern
portion of a series of shoals extending about
9 miles east-northeastward from the southern
part of the Kentish Flats northward of the
Reculvers . Westward of its center, about
H. 0. 35
this drying area Margate Sand is in the form
of a tongue 3 miles long and 1% miles wide .
Two large detached drying areas lie on the
northern side of this portion. Within the 3
fathom curve this tongue extends about 2
miles farther eastward . The southern side of
these shoals are described in section 14-60 .
There are numerous wrecks and foul areas
on the edge of the 5 -fathom curve eastward
of Margate Sand .
The Wedge is a ridge (as defined by the 5
fathom curve) 1,200 yards northward of and simi
lar in form to Margate Sand, but with from 21 to
32 feet of water on it ; it extends 4 miles from the
eastern side of the Kentish Flats. At the outer end
is a depth of 28 or 29 feet, but near the flat there is
13 feet.
The Woolpack , with a least depth of 1 foot on it,
lies on the western end of Margate Sand, about
2 1/2 miles northward of Reculvers.
Kentish Flats, as bounded by the 3 -fathom
curve, extend as much as 7 miles from the coast
between the Reculvers and Warden Point. There
are many shoal patches on them , those with
names being Pudding Pan , with 9 feet over it,
2 3/4 miles northward of Herne Bay Pier End ;
Studhill, with 5 feet over it, 1 1/4 miles north
westward ; and Clite Hole Bank, with several
6 -foot patches on it, about 2 miles westward of the
pierhead ; and Black Rocks, which dry only at
low -water springs, 1,200 yards northward of the
Reculvers. The southern part of these flats is
known as Herne Bay Flats.
There are some 8 -foot patches on the southern
side of Pan Sand Hole about 1 1/4 miles south
southeastward of Pan Sand Beacon .
14-56 Beacons.- Pan Sand Beacon is
described in section 14-49 .
Margate Sand Beacon, surmounted by an
hourglass topmark 35 feet above high water,
stands on the northern edge of Margate Sand .
14-57 Buoyage . - The uniform system of
buoyage is used to mark Queens Channel;
buoys are marked with names descriptive of
their locality.
The northern side is marked by :
East Tongue Light Buoy (sec . 14-51 );
this buoy also marks the southern side of
 SOUTH CHANNEL
Princes Channel and corresponds to that
system of buoyage.
South Tongue Buoy, moored about 4 miles
west- southwestward of Tongue Sand Tower .
The southern entrance is marked by N.E.
Spit Light Buoy, moored about 4% miles
| north - northeastward of North Foreland Light
on the eastern end of Margate Sand (as de-
fined by the 5 - fathom curve); a wreck, with
a depth of 32 feet over it, lies abo ut 34 mile
northwestward of the light buoy.
The southern side of the channel is mark-
ed by :
Queens Light Buoy, moored about 34 miles
east-northeastward of Margate Sand Beacon.
North Spit Buoy, moored about 14 miles
northeastward of Margate Sand Beacon .
Westward of Queens Channel on the Ken-
tish Flats , West Pan Sand Buoy, moored
about 1 mile southwestward of Pan Sand
Beacon , lies on the northern side of the
channel.
14-58 Anchorage.-- Anchorage and pro
tection in southerly winds is found off the
northwestern edge of Margate Sand south
ward of the Wedge . There is also good an
chorage in 20 to 30 feet in Pan Sand Hole ,
% mile southeastward of Pan Sand Beacon.
14-59 Directions. - Vessels approaching
from the southeastward should keep North
Foreland Light bearing more than 192° until
N.E. Spit Light Buoy bears less than 270º .
Thence a vessel, after passing eastward of
Margate Sand , should proceed in the fairway
of the buoyed channel so as to pass close
southward of West Pan Sand Buoy; thence
pass close westward of the West Girdler
Buoy, allowing for the tidal currents . Queens
Channel, as an entrance to the Thames , is
available only to small vessels , for the pas.
age over Kentish Flats has a least depth of
11 feet and is not well defined .
Four Fathoms Channel is the name given
to a channel with a least depth of 10 feet
leading from the Kentish Flats to the Cant
(sec. 14–42) . Shoaling has occurred in the
channel ; depths 1 to 2 fathoms less than
those charted have been obtained ( 1958) . The
eastern entrance is located about 39 miles
westward of Pan Sand Beacon . The channel
241
( Chg 71
extends westward between the Middle and the
Spile to the northward and The Spaniards to
the southward . There is a least depth of 9
feet across the Cant to the Nore .
14-60 SOUTH CHANNEL AND INSHORE
PASSAGES (B.A. Chart 1607).- South Channel,
which includes Margate Road, is a cul-de-sac simi
lar to Queens Channel, and therefore of little use
except for light-draft vessels. It is situated be
tween Margate Sand to the northward and the
shoals bordering the coast of Kent to the south
ward and is about 6 miles long. The breadth of the
eastern end in Margate Road between the 5 -fathom
curves is 2 miles, narrowing to 200 yards off Nay
land Ledge. The depths are all over 30 feet until
Cliff End Banks are reached, where there is a
tendency to form a bar.
Gore Channel is a continuation to the westward
of South Channel. It has a pocket of over 30 feet
in it just southward of Margate Hook , but it is
not of much value, as further progress is barred by
a shoal neck joining the Last with the mainland
with depths of only 13 and 14 feet.
Horse Channel, lying between the Hook and the
Last and Reculver Sand, is narrow and intricate,
with a depth of 6 feet in it between the buoys.
Copperas Channel is just to the southward of
Horse Channel, but it is too small to need de
scription.
Overland Passage extends from Horse Channel
to the Nore; it is bounded on the north by The
Spaniards, the Middle and the Spile, and on the
south by Columbine Sand and the flats fronting
the Isle of Sheppey ; there is as little as 6 feet of
water in it in places. Westward of The Spaniards
it joins the Four Fathoms Channel.
The eastern entrance to Four Fathoms Channel
is on the Kentish Flats, 3 miles westward of Pan
Sand Hole. It extends westward between Middle
Sand and East Spaniard Shoal . It is about 1/2
mile wide between the 2 -fathom curves. From
thence it runs southwestward for 2 miles and then
turns westward for 5 miles, having Middle and
Spile Shoals to the northward and Spaniard Shoal
and the shore flats to the southward . The least
depth mid-channel is about 10 feet at low water
southward of Middle Sand.
Caution . — Mariners are warned that s hoa l
ing has occurred in Four Fathoms Channel .
Depths of 1 fathom to 2 fathoms less than
those charted were obtained in 1958. Depths
H.O. 35
242 THAMES ESTUARY , NORTH FORELAND TO THE NORE
in Gore and South Channels were found to be
1 foot to 2 feet less than charted in 1959 and
up to 5 feet less on isolated patches.
14-61 Dangers . - Margate Sand and the
series of shoals described in section 14-55
form the northern side of South Channel, Gore
Channel, and Horse Channel .
Cliffend Banks are several detached
patches of 14 and 18 -foot depths in the chan-
nel about 342 miles westward of Margate
Pier .
Margate Hook is the shoal forming the
northern side of Gore and Horse Channels .
It extends east and west, paralleling the
coast for a distance of 244 miles , and dries
2 to 3 feet .
Last is the name given the middle shoal
between Margate Sand and Margate Hook .
This shoal extends eastward about 4 miles
from Horse Sand and dries 2 to 3 feet on its
eastern part. It is separated from the Wool
pack by narrow deeps with 14 to 21 feet in
them .
Horse Sand, with a depth of 6 feet on it, is not a
distinct shoal, but a narrow connecting link be-
tween Last Shoal and Herne Bay or Kentish
Flats, running in a northeasterly and south-
westerly direction.
Nayland Ledge, on the southern side of South
Channel, is a slight projection northward into the
channel situated 1 mile westward of Margate
Pier.
From Nayland Ledge to the westward the 1-,
2-, and 3 -fathom curves are all fairly close together,
the depths shelving regularly until abreast the
outlet of the River Wantsum , where the depths
decrease, the soundings becoming at the same time
irregular. This is known as Reculver Sand . Black
Rock, which dries 3 feet, is situated on
this sand .
From the northern extremity of the Kentish
Flats, 6 miles northward of Herne Bay Pier End,
the flats turn abruptly to the southwestward , and
on this edge lies Gilman Shoal, 1,400 yards long
and very narrow , with a least depth of 11 feet
over it.
H. 0. 35
Spaniard Shoals, as defined by the 1 -fathom
curve consist of 2 shoals lying on the Kentish
Flats, 8 miles northwestward of the Reculvers,
named East Spaniard and Spaniard.
East Spaniard is a narrow strip of shoal water
projecting 7 miles in a northeasterly direction
from the northeastern coast of Sheppey ; it has a
dry patch on its southern part.
Spaniard , about 12 mile long with 3 feet
on it, is about 14 miles westward of East
Spaniard .
Middle and Spile Shoals are described in
section 14-41 .
14-62 Obstructions . - Obstructions with
depths of 32 and 30 feet lie on the northern
side of Margate Road 14 mile apart about 342
miles north -northwestward of North Foreland
Light .
A wreck awash , marked on its north side
by a green can buoy , lies about 144 miles
east - southeastward of Middle Sand Beacon
in Four Fathoms Channel.
14-63 Beacons . - Margate Hook Beacon,
surmounted by an inverted cone , is situated
on the southern edge of Margate Hook about
2 miles northeastward of the Reculvers (sec .
14-10 ) .
14-64 Buoyage . — Margate Road is mark
ed on its northern side by East Margate Buoy,
a spherical buoy painted in red and white
horizontal bands and with a red can topmark ,
moored about 342 miles northward of North
Foreland Light; its southern side is marked
by Longnose Buoy described in section 14-3 .
The uniform system of buoyage is used to
mark South Channel, Gore Channel , Horse
Chamel, and Four Fathom Channel, The
passage between Horse Channel and the
eastern entrance to Four Fathom Channel
about 4 % miles northwestward is without
buoyage .
The following buoys in order from seaward
mark the northern side of South , Gore, and
Horse Channels :
S.E. Margate Buoy, moored about 134 miles
west-northwestward of Margate Pier.
 WOOLWICH
with the Royal Arsenal at its eastern and the Old
Dock Yard at its western end. There is a large
pontoon pier northward of the town hall con-
nected by a ferry with the pontoon pier of North
Woolwich, opposite. Woolwich is also connected
with North Woolwich by a subway . There are
several T -head piers off the arsenal, besides
smaller piers to the westward .
Tides. It is high water, full and change, at
1h. 40m .; springs rise 20 1/2 feet, neaps 17 1/4
feet. The average duration of flood is 5h. 40m.,
and the ebb 6h . 45m ., the whole tide being 12h .
25m .
Bylaws. — No vessel shall pass or anchor within
a distance of 360 feet of His Majesty's arsenal at
Woolwich .
15-64 Directions - Gravesend to Woolwich.
Vessels should steer midchannel between the
banks; to enable a vessel to do so the bearings
given below may be found useful. After passing
between Tilbury Ness and Northfleet, steer with
the 160 -foot chimney at Grays Thurrock ahead,
bearing 326 °, until the light on Gray's Cooperative
Society Wharf pierhead is abeam , when change
course for St. Clements Reach . Care should be
taken to keep to the southward of the line of bea-
cons southward of St. Clement's Church, West
Thurrock .
After passing midway between Broadness and
Black Shelf, steer a midchannel course for John-
son's Chimney, 335 feet high, ahead bearing 226 °,
passing about 350 yards off Stone Ness.
After passing Greenhithe steer with Ingress
Abbey astern, bearing 123 ° until the middle pair
of measured mile beacons are in range, after which
steer with the outer of the southern pair astern ,
bearing 133 ° until abreast Purfleet, when steer
with Beacon Hill astern, bearing 100 °, and Cold-
harbour Point ahead until abreast the hulk Birch-
rock . Then steer to pass about 350 yards south-
ward of Coldharbour Point, rounding it, and steer
up Erith Reach to pass about 550 yards off Jen-
ningtree Point, when steer to pass about 200 yards
off Ford's Jetty, and when on a line joining
Leather Bottle Point and the western end of
261
(Chg 7)
Horseshoe Corner, change course for Barking
Reach , steering to pass 200 yards off False Point ,
and then follow the channel until 200 yards off
Beckton Pier No. 1 .
From Margaret Ness to London Bridge no direc
tions are given, it being only necessary to keep in
midchannel.
15-65 WOOLWICH . - This town extends for 2 miles
along thesouthern bank and gradually rises up the brow
of the hill for 1/2 mile to a spacious level of 250 acres,
named Woolwich Common . Just above to the southeast,
Shooters' Hill attains a height of 446 feet. In the upper
part of the town are barracks and an infirmary well placed
on the slopeof the hill.
The Royal Arsenal adjoins the town of Woolwich on the
eastward . It occupies an area of 274 acres.
In 1931 the population of Woolwich numbered 146,944.
Docks. - Royal Albert Dock is entered on the western
side of Gallions Reach by 2 locks and a basin . The locks
are each 550 feet long and 80 feet wide, withdepths of 30
and 36 feet on the sills of the south and north locks, respec
tively . The basin has an area of about 14 acres and 4,146
feetof quays, with a depth of 34 1/2 feet.
Manor Way Passage, which leads from the basin to the
dock is 80 feet wide with a depth of 29 3/4 feet. The dock
itself has an area of 73 acres and 11,837 feet of quays with
a depth of 29 1/2 feet.
There is a passage to the Victoria Dock 80 feet wide with
a depth of 31 feet .
King George V Dock is on the southern side of Royal
Albert Dock ,with an area of 64 acres, with 17,829 feetof
quays, and a depth of 38 feet. There is a lock from the
river 800 feet long, 100 feet wide, with a depth of 45 1/2
feet, and an entrance from Royal Albert Dock 100 feet
wide, with a depth of 34 feet.
All of these docks are equipped with modern facilities for
handling cargo. The docks are connected by rail with the
general system .
Repairs of any kind can be executed .
Drydock.The approximate dimensions of the largest
drydock are : maximum length , 750 1/4 feet; breadth of
entrance at MHWS, 100 feet; depth over sill at MHWS,
33 1/2 feet.
Supplies of all kinds are available. Water is laid onto the
quays. Coal and fuel oil are available.
Hospitals.-— There are several in Woolwich .
15–66 WOOLWICH TO LONDON BRIDGE
-Bugsby Reach (51° 30' N., 0 °01' E., B. A.
Chart 2484 ).— Bugsby Reach is that small section
of the river lying between Hook Ness and Black
wall Point, or Lea Ness, which is low and rounded,
and has a mud flat extending over 100 yards from
it. The Reach is 1,600 yards long in a northwest
erly direction and 1/4 mile wide between the
banks. The channel, indicated by dashed lines
on the chart, has a least depth of 20 feet, except
H.O. 35
262 RIVER THAMES —THE NORE TO LONDON BRIDGE
for shoaling to a least depth of 13 feet on the
western side of the channel, opposite the Royal
Victoria Dock .
The eastern bank consists of wharves belonging
to various companies, and at 800 yards from Hook
Ness is the entrance to the Royal Victoria Dock,
on the northwestern side of which is the London
and North Eastern Railway Co.'s wharf.
River Lea divides Middlesex from Essex and
falls into the Thames opposite Lea Ness or Black
wall Point. At the western side of the entrance,
commonly called Bow Creek , is the buoy wharf of
the corporation of the Trinity House.
The Thames Ironworks are on the eastern side
of the entrance to Bow Creek, and the East
Indian Docks and Blackwall Station in the bend
of the reach on the western side.
The western bank, off which a mud flat extends
about 200 yards, is almost entirely occupied by
the South Metropolitan Gasworks, with a wharf
projecting from them 200 feet into the reach .
15-67 Docks. - Royal Victoria Dock is entered on the
eastern side of Bugsby Reach by a lock and tidal basin .
Whenever a vessel may dock or undock a blue flag is shown
by day and a blue light by night. It is also entered from
the Royal Albert Dock by the Connaught Road Passage.
The entrance lock is 325 feet long and 80 feet wide with
depths of 20 feeton the outer and inner sills at mean high
water springs. This entrance can be used only by barges
and small unmasted vessels, since it is crossed by a fixed
bridge with only 14 feet clearance. The tidal basin has an
area of nearly 1 1/2 acres and a depth of 28 feet and 4,419
feet of quays. The main dock is entered from the basin by
a passage 80 feet wide with a depth of 25 1/2 feet. The
dock has an area of over 67 acres with a depth of 28 feet
and 15,900 feet of quays.
On the southern side of the main dock there is a so
called Pontoon Dock , with an area of over 10 acres
and a depth of 1712 feet and 6,300 feet of quays .
The East India Docks are entered from the river
through a basin which is itself entered by a lock . When
a vessel may dock or undock , a blue flag is shown by
day and a blue light by night. The lock is 100 feet
long and 641/2 feet wide with a depth of 31 feet on the
sili. The basin has an area of 6% acres with a depth
of 32 feet and 2,310 feet of quays.
The Export Dock , with an area of nearly 8 acres and a
depth of 28 feet and2,985 feet of quays, isentered from the
basin by a passage 60 feet wide with a depth of 30 feet.
The Import Dock , with an area of over 17 acres and a
depth of 28 feet and 3,831 feet of quays, is entered from
the basin by a lock 300 feet long and 80 feet wide with a
depth of 31 feet.
All of these docks are equipped with modern facilities for
H. O. 35
handling cargo. Water is laid onto the quays and they are
connected with the general system by rail.
15–68 Blackwall Reach (51°30' N., 0 °00', B.
A. Chart 2484 ).— From Blackwall Point the river
takes a sharp curve to the southward for 1 mile
and becomes known as Blackwall Reach , its
breadth being 300 yards between the banks. Both
banks are artificial, with a narrow border of mud,
off which are numerous mooring buoys. Behind
the eastern bank are Bugsby and Greenwich
Marshes, and the western bank is the eastern side
of the Isle of Dogs. Moorings for the cable ship
Dominia are off the eastern bank in the southern
part of the reach . Blackwall, Poplar, and the
eastern entrances to West India Docks are on the
western side of the lower part of the reach .
Blackwall is connected with East Greenwich by
a subaqueous tunnel 400 yards southwestward of
Blackwall Point.
A fog signal is sounded from the southern end
of the jetty at Ordnance wharf, East Greenwich ,
close northward of the site of the southeastern
end of Blackwall tunnel.
There is a least depth of 17 feet in the channel,
which is indicated by dashed lines on the chart.
15-69 Greenwich Reach.Past Blackwell
Reach on the eastward there is a complete semi
circular bend in the river to Limehouse Reach on
the westward. This bend is Greenwich Reach , the
diameter across the Isle of Dogs being about 1
mile and the circumference through the Reach
about 1.6 miles. Both banks are walled, corre
sponding to each other, and are 300 yards apart,
but there is a slight fringe of mud off each .
There is a least depth of 13 feet in the channel,
which is indicated on the chart.
The northern bank is occupied by commercial
buildings under the names of Millwall and Cubitt
Town. There are docks between some of the
buildings, and 1 or 2 piers and several mooring
buoys off the towns.
The southern bank is taken up by the towns of
Greenwich and Deptford, with numerous piers
projecting a short distance in front of them , as
well as mooring buoys. It is, however, broken by
 GREENWICH
the Ravensbourne River or Deptford Creek, which
divides these two towns.
Between Greenwich Pier and North Greenwich
Station, opposite, there is a foot-passenger tunnel
under the river, which is marked by a cupola at
each end .
Bylaws. The dockyard port of Deptford ex-
tends to a distance of 400 feet from the wharves
of His Majesty's victualling yard at Deptford.
Except at moorings laid with the permission of the
Admiralty for mercantile craft, no merchant or
other private vessel may be anchored or moored
within the limits of the dockyard port without
permission from the superintendent of His Maj
esty's victualling yard at Deptford .
15-70 GREENWICH O
. n the southern side of the
reach is the town of Greenwich , with its hospital, park , and
observatory. The palace of Charles II, now used as a royal
naval college, consists of 4 detached piles of buildings form-
inga square open toward the river.
The Royal Observatory stands on the most elevated land
in Greenwich Park, which rises gradually in the rear of the
college to a height of 145 feet.
In 1931 the population of Greenwich was 100,879.
15-71 DEPTFORD TOWN is on the southwestern
bank of the reach . The foreign cattle market is located
here, and there is a jetty in front of it with 11 feet alongside,
for vessels unloading. The adjacent victualling yard has a
river frontage of about 600 yards, having several hydraulic
cranes along the wharves, and all the requisites for the
rapid supply of a large quantity of provisions.
In 1931 there was a population of 106,886 at Deptford.
Docks . - Blackwall Basin with an area of 7 1/4 acres and
2,478 feet of quays and a depth of 26 feet is entered by a
lock 480 feet long and 60 feet wide with a depth of 30 feet.
Poplar Docks are entered by a passage leading from
Blackwall Basin .
Junction Dock with an area of 1 1/4 acres and 1,170 feet
of quays and a depth of 25 feet is entered from Blackwell
Basin by apassage 45 feet wide with a depth of 25 feet.
WestIndia Docks. - The Import Docks with an area of
26 3/4 acres and6,942 feet of quays and a depth of 26 feet,
is entered from Blackwall Basin by a passage 59 1/4 feet
wide and 30 feet deep.
The Export Dock , with an area of 23 1/2 acres and 6,051
feet of quays and a depth of 26 feet, is entered from Black
wall Basinbya passage similar to that for the Import Dock .
South Dock, with an area of 27 acres and 7,881 feet of
quays and a depth of 29 feet, is connected with Export
Dock by a cut 350 feet wide. It is entered from Black wall
Reach through a lock 584 feet long, 80 feet wide, with a
depth of 35 feet over the sill at M. H. W. S. It is connected
with Millwall Docks by a passage 80 feet wide, with depths
of 29 feet .
When the entrance to South Dock is available for in
coming vessels, a blue flag is displayed by day and a blue
light by night. When a vessel is undocking or is about to
263
( Ang 7 )
undock , a red flag is displayed by day and a red light by
night.
Repairs of all kinds can be executed .
Drydock . — The approximate dimensions of the largest
drydock are : maximum length , 497 feet; breadth of en
trance at MHWS, 65 feet; depth over sill at MHWS, 23
feet.
Supplies of all kinds are plentiful. Water is laid onto the
piers.
About 50,000 tons of various kinds of coal are usually
kept in stock .
Fuel oil is available.
Time ball (51° 28'38" N., 0 °00'00 '').- A black ball is
dropped from the mast on the observatory at 13h . 00m .
00s. G. C. T. The ball is hoisted halfway up at 5 minutes
before the signal and close up 2 1/2 minutes before the
signal. Should the signal fail it will be made in the same
manner at 14h ., G. Č . T. The signal is not made during
very strong winds.
15–72 Limehouse Reach (51° 28 ' N. , 0°02'
W.,B.A.Chart 2484).– From Deptford Victualling
Yard the course of the river trends northward for
1,600 yards, and then curves around to the west
ward of Horseferry Stairs into Lower Pool, its
breadth being about 360 yards. From the banks,
which are walled, mud flats extend for a short
distance, off which mooring buoys are placed .
Both banks are completely built over with com
mercial establishments.
There is a least depth of 20 feet, in the dredged
channel, as far as the entrance to Greenland Dock,
above which there is a least depth of 16 feet.
On the eastern bank, nearly opposite the vic
tualling yard , is Deptford entrance to Millwall
Wet Dock.
On the western bank , just above the victualling
yard, is Deptford Wharf, connected with the
railroad system , and above it are the entrances to
Surrey Commercial Docks, above which are
Trinity and several other wharves, with some
drydocks between them .
Behind them is the district of Rotherhithe,
which is completely occupied by the Surrey
Commercial Docks.
15–73 Lower Pool.This reach extends from
about Horseferry Stairs and Regent's Dock op
posite on the eastward, to Cherry Garden Stairs
and Wapping New Stairs opposite on the west
ward and is, in a curving westerly and south
westerly direction, about 1,800 yards long and
H.O. 35
264 RIVER THAMES — THE NORE TO LONDON BRIDGE
nearly 400 yards wide ; both banks, with mud
flats in front of them , are lined with wharves and
jetties, off which are several mooring buoys.
There is a least depth of 16 feet in the channel
as far as Thames Tunnel, above which there is a
least depth of 14 feet.
On the northern bank is the entrance to Regent's
Canal Dock, and 800 yards farther up are the
Shadwell entrances to the London Docks.
On the southern and southeastern banks are
several drydocks, and 600 yards southwestward
of Oldstairs Pier is the western entrance to Surrey
Commercial Docks.
15–74 Upper Pool. — This reach extends from
Wapping Ness and Cherry Garden Stairs to Lon
don Bridge; it is 1 1/4 miles long in a west-north
westerly direction by 200 yards wide. There is a
continuous mud flat on both sides of the pool,
where there is a dense mass of buildings and
wharves, bordered by coasting vessels moored in
tiers under the direction of the harbor masters.
There is a least depth of 8 feet in the channel,
which is indicated by dashed lines on the chart.
On the northern side there are the Wapping
entrance to the London Docks, the entrance to
St. Katherine Docks a little higher up, and the
Tower of London and customhouse between the
Tower and London Bridges. On the southern
side is a line of wharves and jetties with 1 dock.
The Tower Bridge crosses the river just below
the Tower, and London Bridge 1,000 yards above
it. The Tower Subway crosses the river at the
western side of the Tower inclosure.
15–75 Tower Bridge (51° 30' N., 0 °05 ' W.),
opened in 1894, is a steel structure, 970 feet in
length , having 4 towers, which for appearances'
sake are incased in masonry .
The higher towers stand on piers in the river
and are connected at a height of 135 feet above
high water by 2 cantilever foot bridges. Lower, at
a height of 28 1/2 feet above high water, are 2
bascules carrying the roadway, which can be
raised into a vertical position , leaving a waterway
200 feet in breadth, thus enabling vessels to pass
under the high -level footbridges.
H.O..35
15–76 Signals. - According to the Port of Lon
don Authority Bylaws, 1955 , the following signals
are to be made by vessels requiring the bridge to
be opened :
( a) The master of every vessel intending to pass
through the Tower Bridge and requiring the bas
cules to be raised shall, in addition to the ordinary
lights to be carried by such vessel when under
way, exhibit the following signals :
(I) By day 1 black ball not less than 2 feet in
diameter, placed in such a position on such vessel
where it can best be seen at a height above the
hull of not less than 20 feet.
(II) By night 2 red lights in globular lanterns
of not less than 8 inches each in diameter, placed
vertically 6 feet apart at a height of not less than
20 feet above the hull, and in such a position that
they can best be seen, and so constructed as to
show a clear, uniform , and unbroken light visible
all around the horizon at a distance of at least 1
mile on a dark night with a clear atmosphere.
(b) The master of every steam vessel intending
to pass through the said bridge, and requiring the
bascules to be raised , shall , in both clear
and foggy weather , in addition to the signals
prescribed by subclause (a) of this bylaw ,
give a signal of 1 prolonged blast of the
steam whistle of not less than 5 seconds du
ration , followed by 3 short b la sts in rapid
succession , and in foggy weather shall con
tinue to give said signal at moderate inter
vals until the vessel is in sight of the said
bridge.
Storm signals are shown from a flagstaff on
Cherry Garden Pier.
15–77 London Bridge (51 ° 30 ' N. , 0 °05 ' W.)
is a structure of 5 arches with a headway of 27
feet at M. H. W. S., and is 970 feet in length from
bank to bank .
Tides . It is high water, full and change, at
London Bridge at lh.53m.; springs rise 221/4 feet;
springs range 21 feet, neaps rise 18 1/2 feet.
Datum of chart is about 3 inches below mean low
water springs.
15–78 Tunnels.-- The Rotherhithe Road Tun
nel, the ends of which are marked by cupolas,
 COCKHAM REACH
A red and white checkered can light buoy,
showing a group flashing red light, is moored
about 300 yards northeastward of the eastern
entrance to Royal Dock Yard .
For information concerning lights and buoys in
the River Medway above Short Reach consult the
latest, best scale charts of the area .
16-46 Cockham Reach is a bend in the river
extending 1/2 mile westward from Short Reach,
and nearly 400 yards wide between the Hoo Bank
on the northward and the walled northern side of
St. Marys Island ; both banks are fringed with
mud flats. On the northern bank there is a boat
house, with Hoo Lodge standing on higher ground
in rear of it. The southern bank is entirely oc
cupied by the naval establishment.
The 2 -fathom curve extends about 100 yards
from the banks on both sides. At the eastern end
the least depth is 11 feet. At the western end the
soundings are irregular.
16-47 Upnor Reach. — After leaving Cockham belonging to the royal dockyards and gun wharves .
Reach the river turns southward, and for a dis
tance of 3/4 mile is known as Upnor Reach , which
is 400 yards wide between the banks.
The eastern bank, which has a slight fringe of
mud off its northern part, is walled, and forms
part of Chatham Dockyard .
The western bank is partially walled, and
has many piers extending from it. Opposite
Upnor Castle, a berth 600 feet long has been
dredged to a depth of 13 feet alongside the
dockyard wall . A mud flat extends about 100
yards from the bank . The training ship Are
thusa is moored off Upnor Pier. Behind it the
land is elevated, Beacon Hill , 205 feet high,
being at the northern , and Tower Hill , 103
feet high, at the southern end of it.
The least depth midchannel is about 12 feet
abreast Upnor, but the depths northward and
southward of this are greater.
Anchorage is prohibited in Upnor Reach in
an area extending about 250 yards northward
and 400 yards southward of Upnor Castle .
Beacons Lights. — Three beacons with dia
mond -shaped top marks on the western bank , and
277
( Chg 7)
4 similar beacons opposite on the eastern bank,
indicate telegraph cables.
Three lights are shown from the port quarter
of the T. S. Arethusa .
Two lights are exhibited from the pier at Upnor
Castle .
Two lights, vertically disposed, are shown
from the northern end , and from a dolphin
close off the southern end of the outer arm
of Upnor New Pier .
Moorings. - There are several sets of moorings
off Upnor and off the dockyard.
16-48 Chatham Reach . - Chatham Reach is
a continuation of Upnor Reach in a southerly
direction for 1 mile to the town of Chatham . It is
about 400 yards wide.
The natural features of the eastern bank, off
which there is a slight fringe of drying mud flats,
have been completely transformed by artificial
works, such as piers, wharves, and building slips
The western bank consists of marshland, broken
at its northern end by Whitewall Creek. There
is a sloping face of masonry in its center, and it
terminates to the southward in Chatham Ness, a
low rounded point with a pole beacon on it. A
drying mud flat extends across Whitewall Creek
entrance, but there is a narrow channel through
it.
A measured distance of 3,040 feet is marked by
2 pairs of white beacons surmounted by triangular
topmarks between the creek and the Ness. The
course for running the distance is 3° or 183º.
The 2 -fathom curves generally extend 100 yards
into the channel from either bank , the depths be
tween them being from 13 to 15 feet, but there
are places, especially in the southern part of the
Reach,where the depths exceed 20 feet.
16–49 Light s .-A light is shown from
Chatham Ness .
Lights are shown from the four corners of
the pier at Chatham .
Moorings.There is a line of mooring buoys
along the dockyard wall in Chatham Reach , close
southwestward of No. 1 Basin, about 150 feet
H.O. 35
278 RIVER MEDWAY FROM THE NORE TO CHATHAM
from the wall, another line farther southwestward,
about 240 feet from the wall, and a third line south
westward of Thunderbolt Pier, about 200 feet
from the wall.
A prohibited anchorage area , indicated on the
chart, extends about 300 yards southwestward of
Rochester Bridge, and anchorage between White
wall Creek and Rochester Bridge without permis
sion of the harbor master is forbidden .
16–50 Docking signals . — When a vessel is
about to enter or leave the basin, the pilot jack
will be hoisted at the lock.
When a vessel is about to enter or leave one of
the river docks, a red burgee will be hoisted at
No. 3 building shed .
Mariners are warned to exercise great care and
proceed with the utmost caution when these sig
nals are shown, as considerable risk occurs if
vessels pass when long ships are being docked or
undocked .
Tides. It is high water, full and change, at the
Queens Stairs, Chatham Dockyard, at Oh. 43m .;
springs rise 18 feet 3 inches, neaps rise 14 feet 6
inches. At the North Lock springs rise 17 feet
11 inches, neaps 14 feet.
16–51 Directions. — Vessels proceeding through
Sheerness Harbor and Saltpan Reach should keep
in midchannel, taking care to avoid the numerous
mooring buoys. Garrison Point astern, bearing
45° leads through the deepest water in Sheerness
Harbor until Queenborough Spit Beacon Light is
in range with Sheerness Sewage Works chimney
bearing 87°, which, kept astern on this bearing,
will lead westward until abreast Port Victoria,
when steer to pass northward of Sharp Ness Light
Buoy, No. 12, into Kethole Reach .
After passing Sharp Ness Buoy follow the bend
of the river to the southward and bring the small
black beacons on the western point of the entrance
to Colemouth Creek in range with Stoke Shoal
Light Buoy No. 13, bearing 32°, and steer with
them astern , which leads through Kethole Reach,
guided by the buoys.
The line of the tidal current is always so plainly
defined that it is only necessary for vessels to keep
H. O. 35
in the stream of it. The lead should be carefully
checked .
Having arrived near Light Buoy No. 16, steer
with West Range Beacons Nos. 1 and 2 in range
ahead, bearing 269°, and East Range Beacons
Nos. 7 and 8 in range astern , through Long Reach .
When Darnett Ness Light Beacon is in range
with No. 3 Range Beacon, bearing 212°, or No. 24
Light Buoy, bearing 210°, leave the range line
through Long Reach and steer with Range Bea
cons Nos. 3 and 4 in range ahead bearing 207 °,
through Pinup Reach, until St. Marys Church
Tower, Gillingham , bears 237° ; steer for it on
that bearing ahead into Gillingham Reach, until
the southeastern side of the gasometer at Gilling
ham is in range with the Tide Pole Beacon bearing
253°, then steer for it on that bearing until Beacon
No. 3 is in range astern with Beacon No. 5 bearing
096° , or the flagstaff at Bull's Nose and the
elevated water tower at Chatham Dockyard
are in range 277° . These marks in range will
lead to the lock entrances of Chatham Dockyard.
Care must be taken not to get northward of the
last range line, because a 3 -fathom patch lies
close northward of it .
At night, vessels should steer in midchannel be
tween the light buoys, leaving white lights to the
northward and red lights to the southward, until
the range lights in Chatham Dockyard are seen
in line, bearing 277°, leading up Gillingham Reach
to the dockyard locks.
16-52 CHATHAM (51°24 ' N. , 0 ° 33' E .) .- The town
stands on the right bank at the bend of the river above the
dockyard. It includes that of Brompton and adjoins Roch
ester so closely as to form one town. There is a good
hospital, St. Bartholomew's , situated near the junction of
Chatham and Rochester. The population ofChatham in
1931 was 42,996, and that of Rochester 31,196 .
16–53 GÍLLINGHAM .— The town of Gillingham , form
erly called New Brompton , lies eastward of Chatham , sepa
rated from it and Brompton by an open , elevated space
known as the Lines, the property of the War Department.
The population in 1931 was 60,983.
Adjoining Gillingham, on the southern part of the Lines,
and overlooking the town of Chatham , is the Chatham
Royal Naval Hospital, consisting of several blocks of brick
buildings, including 2 conspicuous towers, the whole
covering much ground .
16-54 CHATHAM DOCKYARD .—Her Majesty's
Dockyard at Chatham , including St. Mary's Island, com
prises an area of 500 acres. The southern and older portion
 CHATHAM
of the dockyard is chiefly occupied by storehouses, rigging
and sail lofts, smithies, sawmills, boathouses , timber yard,
etc. The river frontage of this part has on the southward
the anchor wharf, at the northern end of which are the
Queens Stairs, a wooden pier with pontoon landing stage
and automatic tide gage . Farther northward is an iron
pier projecting about 140 feet, alongside which is moored
the Thunderbolt floating battery, 2 building slips , 3 dry
docks, and a boat slip.
The northern partof the dockyard, including St. Marys
Island, contains 3 basins, 5 drydocks, 2 locks, machinery
shops, foundry, smithy, boiler shop, torpedo store, etc.
Coal is stored southward of the locks. Between the new
slip and the Upnor entrance to No. 1 basin, now perma
nently closed , there is a boat landing. There are several
steam cranes, fixed and traveling, on the western river
front of the dockyard .
Basins. — Three large basins are connected with each
other. In 1953 the comparative general depths in Nos. 1 , 2
and 3 basins were 31 172 feet, 33 feet and 32 1/2 feet, re
spectively . The basins are furnished with shears, numerous
powerful cranes , and hydraulic capstans. During neap
tides, owing to the frequent use of the locks and to leakage,
the water in the basins sometimes falls considerably below
the high-water level. At such times the level may be
raised bypumping from the river through the South Lock .
No. 3 Basin, the easternmost and largest, has an area
of 28 acres . On the northern side is a large hydraulic crane
capable of lifting 160 tons, and a traveling crane capable of
lifting 130 tons. Thebasin communicates with Gillingham
Reach by means of 2 locks lying parallel to each otherin an
easterly and westerly direction.
No. 2 Basin , situated between Nos. 3 and 1, has an area
of 20 acres. The entrances leading into Nos. 3 and 1
Basins are closed by ship caissons and are each 82 3/4 feet
wide, with 33 1/2 feet on the sills.
No. 1 Basin , with an area of 21 acres , is the west
ernmost of the three. On the northern side is a 120 - ton
fixed crane . Five drydocks open out of this basin .
Locks. — As mentioned above, 2 locks connect No. 3
Basin with Gillingham Reach.
The South Lock is 479 1/2 feet long and 82 3/4 feet wide
with a depth of 33 1/3 feet on the sill at mean high water
springs.
The North Lock is 477 1/2 feet long and 92 3/4 feet wide
with a depth of 34 3/4 feet on the sill at mean high water
springs .
The lengths of the North and South Locks can be in
creased 35 and 30 feet, respectively, by placing the caissons
in the outer stops .
Both ends of the locks are closed by sliding caissons.
Neither can be used as a drydock .
Vessels of deep draft coming up the river are generally
received at the locks half an hour before high water, and
when proceeding down the river are dispatched 1 1/2 hours
before high water, to enable them to pick up a buoy if
desired at Sheerness without the necessity of turning
around .
Ships of greater length than the locks are received
and dispatched 134 hours to 1 hour before high water
and only on days when there is a 16 -foot tide or over .
Vessels entering at this time will experience less tidal
effect ; they should, after passing between Buoys Nos. 28
and 29, get on the line of the locks and approach with good
headway .
Collier Dock , used by colliers when discharging their
279
( Chg 7)
cargoes, is situated eastward of the South Lock , about mid
way between it and the dockyard boundary wall. It ex
tends 300 feet southward , and is 40 feet wide, with a depth
of 20 feet on the sill.
Drydock . — The approximate dimensions of the largest
drydock are : maximum length , 656 1/2 feet; breadth of
entrance at MHWS, 82 3/4 feet; depth over sill at MHWS.
33/2 feet. The drydock can be lengthened 17 1/3 feet
by placing the caissons in the outer stops.
16–55 MEDWAY RIVER ABOVE CHAT
HAM . - Limehouse Reach (51 ° 23' N. , 0 ° 31 '
E . ).— This reach lies between Chatham Ness
and the point, 1,200 yards 320° from it, on
which Rochester gas works stand . It is about
1,200 yards long, curving in a north -north
westerly direction, and 400 yards wide be
tween the banks at its southern end , dimin
ishing to 200 yards at its northern end.
The southern part of the eastern bank is marsh
land, fronted by a drying flat 100 yards wide ; the
part walled , with
the most from
northe part is for projec
severalrnsmall jetties ting it.
The western bank is partly marshland, the line
being broken by Blue Boar Creek , southward of
which is a pontoon landing stage.
The depths in the reach vary from 12 to 23 feet.
The 2 - fathom curves are close to the mud flat,
except off Chatham Ness, where it extends 100
yards into the channel.
Moorings are laid down for the convenience of
merchant vessels.
There is a dredged berth in this reach to accom
modate vessels up to 300 feet in length and of 22
feet draft, where they can lie afloat at low-water
springs.
16–56 Bridge Reach , which is the turn of the
river to the southwestward as far as Rochester
Bridge after leaving Limehouse Reach , is about
500 yard long
walled, and The
s at the. head nort
hern bank is partly
of the bight which it forms
is the entrance to the railroad company's basin ,
adapted to vessels of moderate draft . Behind it is
the town and railroad station of Strood , besides
several extensive cement works. The southern
bank is walled near the bridge . Mud flats line
each bank . They extend 100 yards from the north
ern bank, but less elsewhere.
H. O. 35
280 RIVER MEDWAY FROM THE NORE TO CHATHAM
The depths are very irregular, varying from 6
to 26 feet. There are 2 holes, one on each side of
the reach, with over 18 feet.
The Medway is crossed by 2 iron railroad
bridges and by Rochester Bridge for ordinary
traffic.
16-57 Mooring buoys . — Large vessels lie
moored head and stern to buoys and discharge
into, or load from , lighters.
There are also swinging berths for barges.
There is a berth for a vessel 500 feet in length
and drawing 26 feet in the reach.
H. O. 35
Dock . - On the northern bank, near the rail
road terminus, and connected with it, is a basin
belonging to the railroad company .
It is 1 1/4 acres in area with a depth of 17 7/12
feet; and is entered by a lock 108 feet long,
30 1/12 feet wide, which dries at low water.
Prohibited anchorage. - Anchorage is prohib
ited in an area on the southwestern side of the
river in Limehouse Reach. Boundaries of the pro
hibited area are indicated by the dashed lines on
the chart.
 APPENDIX I
List of principal ports, showing particulars of depths, etc.

Depth below chart datum level Rise of tide

Port Remarks
In channel of approach In anchorage Springs Neaps

Firth of Forth: Feet Feet

Largo Bay Deep 6 to 7 fathoms 18.0 13.5
Aberlady Bay 10 fathoms 6 fathoms 18.0 14.3
Leith Roads 542 to 7 fathoms 3 to 6 fathoms 18.0 14.3
River Forth:
iiiii

Queensferry and off Rosyth 7 fathoms 442 to 17 fathoms 17.5 13.9

!!!
Berwick Bay Deep 4 12 to 9 fathoms. 15.0 11.5

II
Blyth 24 feet 18 to 30 feet 15 11 17-30 feet at wharves.
Tyne River 21-43 feet 12 to 42 feet 14.25 11 To NorthumberlandDock ,
!!!!!

‫ייייי‬

Sunderland 18 to 20 feet 18-25 feet 14.50 12 642-30 feet in docks.

Hartlepool 16 feet 18-24 feet 16 12.3 21 to 29 feet in docks.
Middlesbrough 14 to 24 feet 17.3 12.9 12 to 37 feet at berths.
Humber River :
Hawke Roads 19-78 feet 20 to66 feet 20.5 15.8
Grimsby Road 23-66 feet 7 to 30 feet 20.2 15.8
White Booth Road 16 feet 21 to 53 feet 20.2 15.8
Hull Road 19-44 feet 20 to 30 feet 21.75 17
Boston, Lower Road 11 feet 30 feet - 21.50 15.50
Yarmouth ;
Roads 22-37 feet 34 to 82 feet 6.8 4.5
Haven 13 feet 7 to 14 feet 7.1 6.2
(Quays )
-
-

Harwich 19-38 feet 18 to 36 feet 12.50 10.50 | About 20 feet alongside Trinity
House Pier. About 19 to 29 feet
alongside Parkeston Quay .
Thames River:
By Barrow Deep 20-78 feet 13 10.7
By South Edinburgh Channel. 37 feet 11.8 9.5
Gravesend .. 30 feet 6 to 54 feet 19.9 16.2
Medway River:
Sheerness 21 feet 48 to 78 feet 17.1 14
Chatham
-

12-20 feet Various See Tide Tables. 10-16 feet to locks.

281

( Chg 7)

H. O. 35
1

1
 INDEX 303
( Chg 7)
Section No.
13-37

-
-
Frinton Cliffs
Gap 10-34

IIIII1111
Galley Hill 11-59

-
Gallions Point 11-7

1
- Reach 11-42

-
2-62

-
-
Galloper

-
1
2-62

-
-

-
-
-
-

-
— buoys
– Light vessel 4-36

-
Galloways Pier 4-36
1-2

-
Gare Breakwaters, North and South
Garrison Head 15-26
- Point 16-7
Garry Point 16-7
Gat Channel 15-26
- Sand 2-19
Gateshead 3-59
Gedney Marsh 3-63
Geeton Creek 2-101
Gellet Rock 2-103
Gibraltar Point 2-100
Gillingham 2-97
15-47
-
-

- Creek
-

-
--

-
1

Marsh 15-40
- Reach 16-41 15-44
Channel 15-41
Light Buoys 15-41
Range Beacons 16-42 15–46
- Range Lights 16-43
-

15-46
E

Pontoon 16-44 15-42

-
-

– Township 16-41 15-45

Gilman Shoal 14-61 15-43
Gin Head 2-54 15-43
-
-

Girdler Shoal 14-41 15-44

buoys 14-51 15-44
Glasgow 3-64 15-49
-
-

10-118 15-64
-

Glaven
Glororum Shad 4-53 15-49
--
-
-

Glutton and Guard, The 12-67 16-13

Goldhanger Creek 13-61 5-3
Goldmer Gat 13-49 5-2
-

Goldstone 4-40 13-37

Channel 4-58 16-10
Goodwin Sands 12-3 13-6
Goole 9-83 13–72
Gore Channel 14-60 11-58
- Middle 10-68 11-47
Point 10-36
-
-

11-46
11-57
11-52
H.O.

H. O. 35
304 INDEX

Section No. Section No.

Great Yarmouth Haven Lights 11-49 Grimsby Docks lifeboat 9-25

-
1
piers 11-46 ----- storm signals 9-25
11-56 tidal signals 9-27

-
pilots

111
regulations 11-53 Grimstone 4-61
signal station 11-52 --- Garth 7-150
storm signals 11-52 Rock 4-58
tidal currents Guard, The 12-68

1
11-55
- signals 11-50 Guardy 4-6
tides 11-55 Guile Point 4-43

!!!
traffic signals 11-51 Gullane Point 2-58
Green Bank 16-6 Gun Head 2-54
Green Island 4-51 Reef 4-51

Greenheugh 4-11 -- Rocks 4-51

Greenhithe 15-53 Gunfleet Sand 13-8
Greenland Dock 15-80 - Old Lighthouse 13-9
Greenwich 15-70 Gunnet Ledge 2-79
Marsh 15-68 Gunsgreen House 4-23
Reach 15-69 Gunsgreen Point 4-19

Grimsby 9-45 Guzzard 4-40

iiiiiiiiii
--- Docks 9-24
I

docking signals 9-26

Hammond knoll buoys 11-13

111
lladdock Bank 8-13 Happisburg 11-4
15-18 16-3
-

r
Hadleigh
--

Hardway
Hadstone Skere 5-24 Harkness rocks 4-47 1
1

1 35 Harkstead Point 12-85

Ilaggerston Castle
Haile Sand 9-15 Hartlepool 7-54
Flat 9-11 -- anchorage 7-50
Fort 9-16 buoyage 7-46
Haisborough 11-4 bylaws 7-48
Gat 11-9 caution 7-40
-

.. The Would and 11--9 docks 7-44

directions 11-21 directions 7-53
dangers in 11-10 - landmarks 7-10
- tidal currents 11-20 -- lifeboat - rocket stations 7-49
Sand 11-10 Old Harbor 7-45

- buoys 11-12 Peninsula 7441

Tail 11-13 bell buoy 7-43

Haisbro' Light vessel ( caution ) 11-11 dangers 7-43

Halesworth 1184 Old Pier 7-41
11

Half Acre Creek 16-30 petroleum and explosives 7-48

Halfway Reach 15-59 pilots 7-52

Halidon Hill 7-49
1

1--26 storm signals

Halliday Rock Flats 12-55 tides 7-51
III

Halton Flat -- 9-58 traffic signals 7-47

II

Marsh 9-46 West Harbor 7-44

Middle 9-58 wrecks. 7-39
Ham Green Saltins 16 33 Iarty 14-19
Hamford Water 12 39 Ferry 14-19
Hamilton Hill 7-140 Harwich 12-78
Hammond Knoll 11-13

1
H. O. 35

|
 INDEX
INDEX 313
( Chg 7 )

Mal
Section No. Sectiou No
7-57 12-17

-
7-57 7-134
7--135

-
9-63 5-30

1
13-25 5-13

1
9-46 +60

1
9-53 4-61

1
13-6 462
13-15 4-37
8-11 6-1
13-27 4-51
8-19 12-30
8-19 15-63
8-19 13-25

-
8-11 5-24

-
11-47 15-49

1
15-50

1
6-20

-
10-124

-
1
7-37

-
-

1
1

1
1

1
1

16-30 12-31
-
-
1

1
1

12-39 12-81
1

14-23 12-81
14-38 12-81
14-43 12-80
14-44 12-81
14-40 12-83
14-47 12-82
14-46 12-82
13-6 13-61
10-73
3-54
4-42
10-78 7-155
10-79 16-7
7-104 5-44
10-40 9-6
7-109 4-3
11-101 4-8
12-30 10-42
12-30 10-43
12-30 8-19
12-30 8-33
12-30 8-33
11-96 8-18
12-79 8-19
12-81 8-18
12-81 8-19
-
-
1

1
1

10-72
-

1
1

H. O. 35
314 INDEX

Section No. Section No.

Outer Gabbard 12-5

-
-

-
-

-
-
-
Overland Passage

--
14-60

1
buoy 12-7
Overstrand 11-2
- Light Vessel 12-6 Ower Bank 8-10
- Knock Shoal 10-42
buoys, North , South, and Northeast 8-11
· Passage 12-25 8-14
tidal currents
- Silver Pit 8-32 Owlets 5-5
Tongue Lighted Bell and Whistle Buoy 14-30 2-69
Ox Craig
- Tours 4-37 - Rock 2-17
8-4

-
- Well Bank Oxcar 4-53
- Westmark Knock Sands 10-40 3-6
Oxcars
Wingate 4-40
Ovens Flats . 15-39
- Light Buoy 15-38

P
Pakefield 11-81 Peter Black Sand
- Road 11-71 Pettycur --
Pallas Rock 2-78 Pewit Island
11-5
Pilots, general

-
-
-
11-5
Pincushion Rocks
7-22

1
Pinmill Hard
14-3
5-13 Pinup Reach
Pit, The
5-13
5-17 Pitching Ground Anchorage
Pitsea Church
5-17
Pittenweem
14-49
-Harbor
14-51
Platters Shoal
5-46
10-73
Plough
- Rock

--
10-73
1

1
1

1
-Seat
4-37
Plumstead Marshes
12-87
Podler Ware Spit
10-45
Podlie Craig
10-53
Pollard Shoal
4-42
7-41 - Spit
Polar chart
12-55
7-155
Polyconic charts
-

Pool, The
6-26
Port Clarence
9-64
Dundas
-
-

948
- Edgar
-

9-63
Mulgrave
4-11
Wreckhills
4-29
Port Seton
-
-

2-61
Victoria Pier
-

4-3
Portobello
12-40
Potato Garth
2-95
Potter Point
6-3
-

- Reach
Perilous Rocks 7-110
-
-

H. O. 35
 INDEX 317
( Chg 7 )
Section No. Section No.
Salcott Channel 13-61 Scroby Shoals, North, Middle, and South 11-31
Sales Point 13-40 -- buoys 11-32
Salisbury Craig 2-95 -- caution 11-31
Salt End 9-65 Scullridge Shoal 10-48
-Scars 7-78 Sea Head buoys, Upper M and Lower L 10-49
- Light and Bell Buoy 7–78 - Reach 15-13
Saltburn 7-80 --northern bank 15-14
— by the Sea 7-80 Seacliff - 4-1

1
- lifesaving 7-80 - mansion 4-2

-
1

1
1
Salterfen Rocks 7-24 Village 4-2

-
-
1
1

1
Saltfleet 10-3 Seafield Outer West Vow 2-45
- Overfalls 10-10 -- Tower 2-45
Salthouse 10-121 Vows 2-45
- Church 10-119 Seaham 7-36
Saltings 15-39 Dene 7-25
Saltpan Reach 16-24 Harbor 7-25
buoys 16-27 Harbor, dangers 7-29

-
Saltwick Nab 7-92 - directions 7-35
i

Sand End buoy 14-22 entrance depths 7-27

Lighted Bell Float 9-59 life saving 7-32
5-13 Old North Pier 7-26
-Spit buoy - South Pier 7-26
- le Mere 7-150
Sandsend 7-90 outer anchorage 7-30
7-34
1

- Bay 7-90 pilots

1

7-90 storm signals 7-32

-

- Ness
-

7-33
1

4-30 tidal currents

Sandstell Point
signals 8-31

-
Satan Bush 4-2
7-108 tides 7-33
Scalby Ness 7-28
Scald Head 10-99 - lights
Old Harbor 7-26
--- tidal current 10-100
10-49 Seal Carr ( Firth of Forth ) 2-78
Scalp, The 4-27
7-118 Carr ( Berwick )
Scarborough Sand 10-75

--
-
7-109

1
- Bay - Sands 7-62

-
-- Harbor 7-112

1
7-116 Spit 4-42
carbide of calcium
-

Seamer 7-107

--
-depths 7-113
7-112 Seaton Burn 5–42
East Harbor
.- Pier 7-112 Carew 7-55
Old Harbor 7-112 Iron Works 7-40
!!!

-
-

Channel 7-61
-

7-112
-
-

Pier
1
1

1
!

1
1

7-115 Lights 7-62

storm signals
1
!

7-117 Delaval 5-42

-

tides
-

Vincent Pier 7-112 - Point 5-10

1
!

7-112 - Road 5-44

-

West Pier
7-109 - Sands
-
-

- Rock
1
1

ឱ
-ន៖
4-53 Shad
--

Scarcars
-

Scarecrows 4-53 - Sluice

1

Scars Elbow 15-19 - Snook

10-99 Point
Scolt Head -
Scores 4-35 Seaview Iron Works
Scotch Head Pier 7-91 Selwicks Bay
Scotswood 6-34 Sewerby
Scoughall Road 4-3
!

Scremerston Steam Mills 4-35

-

1.0.35

H. 0. 35
 bilib
INDEX
318 &

Section No. Section No.

6-20
Sewerby Hall 7-133

1
15-80 6-18
Shadwell Basin

-
6-19
Shaftham Pike 5-24

-
-
6-20

kalli
Sharfleet Creek 16-29

-
16-37 13-61
Marsh
16-24 12-27
Sharp Ness
4-27 12-27
Sharper Head
5-50 14-29
IIIIIII

16-26 14-33
16-11 14-44 , 14-51
-

ahuirdii
16-6 12-17

-
16-10 1-5
16-7 12-18

-
III

16-8 12-17
!!

16-8 12-19
16-7 12-17
E

16-9 12-45
1

16-7 12-46

1
16-10 14-38
16-6 13-25
16-6 15-13
16-13 13-27
16-13 15-17
III

16-12 15-13
1

15-65

-
-

-
16-17
-
-
-

16-14 4-59
16-13 4-59
16-15 15-40
16-16 15-40
16-15 15-39
16-14 16-45

1
16-14 12-62
16-7 12-86
16-18 4-3
12-67 4-13
13–72 11-2
15-24 1-19
15-24 7-107
-
14-17
- Shoal Flat 14-17
15-24
Shelley Bay
4-35
-

Shepherdskirk Hill
Sheppey Court Marshes 16-11
- Isle of 14-17
14-17
-

-- Shoal Flat
Sheringham Shoal 8-30
buoys, east and west 8-31
- Upper and Lower -10–122, 10-123
Shield Rock - 2-15

H. 0. 35
 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIi1
INDEX 323
(Ghg 7 )
V
Section No. Section No.
Vaultness 4-6 Victoria Dock ( Leith ) 2-89
tidal signals 2-88

1
Vernal's Wood 11-95 .

Vickers Armstrong Naval Yard Jetty Lights 6-22 Harbor 4-4

Victoria Bridge 2-91 Vows 2-19
- Dock (Hartlepool) 7-44 --beacon 2-19
(Hull) --- 9-77 - East 2-19
- Lights 9-71 West 2-19

W. Hook buoy 13-31 Warsett Hill 7-81

10-30

1
Wadgate Ledge 12-47 Wash , The
Wainfleet Harbor 10-34 - anchorage 10-24
- Road , directions 10-53 - channels into Boston Deep 10-45
- Sand 10-34 the -- 10-19
- Swatchway 10-19 - caution 10-19
Village 10-34 eastern channel 10-25
Wakelaw Point 2-58 – , eastern channel, directions - 10-26
Walberswick Church 11-88 10-27, 10-28

IIIIIIII
main channel, directions
Wallace Head Rock 4-3 tidal currents -- 10-23
Wallet 13-49 - dangers on eastern side 10-66

1
- anchorage 13-50 -- , buoys 10-67
iiiiiiiii
iii1

dangers, western side 10–42

1
- buoys 13-42

!!!!i!!i
- directions 13-51 - eastern shore 10-35
111

- Spitway buoy 13-42 - main channel 10-21

Wallsend 6-27 --northern channel 10-20
Walton 12-39 - southern shore 10-40
- Channel 12-39 -- western shore 10-31
- Ferry 12-60 Waveney River 11-48
- Naze 12-38 Waw Burn 5-10
-le- Soken -- 13-36 Waxham Church 11-5
- on the Naze 13-36 Wear River 7-22
-- coast guard 13-36 Wearmouth Bridge 7-23
-- Stone Point 12-39 Weather, general 1-38
Wamses North 4-51 Wedge, The 14-55
- South Well Bank 8-8
1

4-51
Wansbeck River 5-28 Heugh Point 5-17
Wantsum River Valley 14-9 Welland River 10-64
Wapping Basin 10-65
i1

15-80 pilots
- Ness 15–74 Wellington Pier 11-46
- New Stairs 15-73 Wells - 10-101
Warden Law 7-24 Harbor 10-106
- Point 14-18 - buoyage 10-107
Wareham Marsh 10-112 directions 10-110
Wardie Bush -- 2-96 pilots 10-109
Warkworth Harbor 5-17 tides 10-108
Warnham Bar 4 46 tug 10-109
iiii

Warp, The 13-27 - Marsh 16-24

Warren Farm 11-61 Wemyss Castle 2-35
i

- Water 4-46 East 2-35

Warrenby 7-76 West 2-36
West Barrow Sand 13-9

H.O. 35
324 INDEX

Section No. Section No.

2-96 7-7
9-59 7-102
13-11 7-91
7-54 7-91
7-54 7-93
7-44 7-93
15–71 7-92
16-25 7-101
4-35 7-91

1
2-6 7-96
-
1

16-11 7-100
13-15 7-97
3-26 7-95
2-89 7-99
2-86 7-99
2-60 7-91
1

12-54 7-103
-
!

1
1

10-106 7-94
8-31 7-90
16-11 7-92
13-11 7-92
14-19 9-68
13-26 16-6
13-27 7-110
13-29 7-11
13-29 16-6
15-49 3-21
។ទៅ
15-51 12-41
2-36 10-83
14-9 beacon 10-83
3-59 -- tide gage 10-83
2-83 Whitley 5-46
14-9 - Lodge 5-46
14-66 - Park 5-46
10-40 Whitstable 14-16
7-1 Bay 14-21
10–121 Church 14-13
-

-
1

10–119 - Flats 14-21

3-37 Harbor 14-13
4-24 Light 14-14
4-42 Whittingham Car 5-3
4-50 Wickham Market 12-31
0-41 Wide Open Gap 4-46
0-41 Islets 4-53
13-30 Wildfire Rocks 4-3
13-67 William Wright Dock 9-77
-
1

13-68 Wilsthorpe Building 7-143

-

13-69 Winds, general 1-38

-

13-30 Windmill Creek 14-19

13-31 Windylaw Cove 4-13
4-3 Wingate Gap 4-35
7-10 - Reef 4-37
ကို

7-7 - Rocks 4-40

H. O. 35
 <
U.S. NAVY HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE SAILING DIRECTIONS
Areas covered by these publications are shown on index chart at back of book
Pub . No.
New Old Title
14 73 Newfoundland. The Island of Newfoundland, the Strait of Belle Isle, and the Islands of St.
Pierre and Miquelon .
17 75 East Greenland and Iceland. Greenland from Prince Christian Sound to Cape Morris Jesup,
Iceland, and the island of Jan Mayen.
16 76 Baffin Bay and Davis Strait. Comprising The West Coast of Greenland from the Eastern
Entrance of Prince Christian Sound to Cape Morris Jesup and The East Coasts of Baffin,
Bylot, Deron, and Ellesmere Islands from Resolution Island to Cape Joseph Henry .
15 77 Northern Canada. The coast of Labrador Northward of St. Lewis Sound, the Northern Coast
of the Canadian Mainland, and the Canadian Archipelago .
90 78 Philippine Islands, Vol. I. Luzon, Mindoro, Masbate, Panay, The West Side of Negros, and
The North Coast of Samar .
91 79 Philippine Islands, Vol. II. Cebu , Bohol, Leyte, East Coast of Negros, East, South, and West
Coasts of Samar, North and Northeast Coasts of Mindanao.
92 80 Philippine Islands, Vol. III. Palawan and Islands and Dangers, Northeastward , Palawan
Passage, Islands and Dangers in Sulu Sea, Sulu Archipelago, and East and South Coasts of
Mindanao.
26 84 West Coasts of Mexico and Central America . The United States to Colombia, including the
Gulfs of California and Panama.
12 99 Nova Scotia . The Bay of Fundy and Cape Breton Island.
13 100 The Gulf and River St. Lawrence .
50 105 Southwest Coast of Africa . Cape Palmas to Cape of Good Hope.
98 122A East Coast of Siberia. Mys Otto Shmidta to Sakhalinskiy Zaliv ( Sakhalin Gulf ) .
97 122B Southeast Coast of Siberia and Korea . Sakhalinskiy Zaliv ( Sakhalin Gulf ) to the Yalu
River ,Including Sakhalin .
96 1234 Japan, Vol. I (Northern Part). The coasts of Honshu, except the Inland Sea Area, The
Island of Hokkaido ; The Chishima Retto ( Kuril Islands) ; and the Islands of Nanpo
Shoto, consisting of the Izu, Ogasawara ( Bonin ) , and Kazan ( Volcano ) Groups.
95 123B Japan, Vol. II (Southern Part). The Naikai and Its Entrances, Namely , Kii Suido, Bungo
Suido, and Shimonoseki Kaikyo ; Shikoyu ; Kyushu and Its Off-lying Islands ; the Nansei
Shoto : and Tsushima.
94 124 Coast of China. Fattau Point (Approach to Hong Kong ) to and Including the Yalu Chiang
Taiwan ( Formosa ) and P'eng-hu Lieh-tao ( the Pescadores Islands) —the Ch'ang Chiang
( Yangtze River ) .
93 125 Western Shores of the South China Sea . From Singapore Strait to and including Hong Kong.
71 126 Soenda Strait and the Western and Northeast Coasts of Borneo and Off -lying Islands.
21 128 The West Indies, Vol. I. Bermuda, The Bahaina Islands, and The Greater Antilles.
22 129 The West Indies, Vol. II. The Lesser Antilles and the coast of Venezuela .
20 130 East Coasts of Central America and Mexico . Including North Coast of Colombia .
37 132 North Coast of France . The Northwestern extremity of France to the Belgian Frontier .
38 133 Bay of Biscay. West Coast of France and North Coast of Spain from Ile d'Ouessant to Cabo
Toriñana.
51 134 West Coasts of Spain, Portugal, and Northwest Africa and Off -lying Islands. The Coasts of
Spain and Portugal from Cabo Toriñana to Cabo Trafalgar, the Madeira Group, the Azores,
Canary Islands, Cape Verde and the West Coast of Africa from Cabo Espurtel to Cape
Palmas.
36 135 Eastern Shores of the North Sea . Dunkerque to the Skagen.
46 136 Northwest and North Coasts of Norway. Fedjeosen to U.S.S.R. Frontier and thence to
Wyemyetski Point Including Svalbard Archipelago.
47 137A Northern U.S.S.R., Vol. I. Mys Nemetskiy to MysKanin Xos.
48 137B Northern U.S.S.R., Vol. II. Mys Kanin Nos to Ostrov Dikson .
49 1370 Northern U.S.S.R., Vol. III. Ostror Dikson to Mys Shmidta .
27 138 Antarctica . Including the Off-lying Islands South of Latitude 60 ° .
45 139 Southwest Coast of Norway. Lindesnes to Fedje.
40 140 Northern and Eastern Shores of the Skagerrak. Lindesnes to Marstrandsfjorden .
41 141A Kattegat and The Sound . Skagen to Falsterbo including Kakse Bugt.
* Sailing Directions have been renumbered in accordance with a new policy of area identification .
Old numbers will be carried in parenthesis indefinitely .

H.O. 85 329
los 7 )
330 U.S. NAVY HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE SAILING DIRECTIONS

Pub . No. *
New Old Title
42 141B The Baltic, Vol. I. Store Baelt, Lille Baelt, and the German coast from the Danish frontier
to Kap Arkona.
43 142 The Baltic, Vol. II. The Baltic Sea From Falsterbo Udde and Cape Arkona to the Entrances
of the Gulfs of Finland and Bothnia.
44 143 The Baltic, Vol. III. The Gulfof Finland, the Åland Islands, and the Gulf of Bothnia .
31 144 South Coast of England. The Scilly Isles to North Foreland.
32 145 West Coasts of England and Wales. Lands End to the Mull of Galloway Including the Isle
of Man.
30 146 Ireland .
33 147 WestCoast of Scotland. Mull of Galloway to Cape Wrath, includingThe Hebrides.
34 149 North and East Coasts of Scotland. Cape Wrath to Fife Ness and Including the Orkney,,
Shetland, and Faeroe Islands .
35 150 East Coast of England. Fife Ness to North Foreland, Including the Firth of Forth and the
Thames .
52 151 The Mediterranean, Vol. I. Strait of Gibraltar, south and southeast coast of Spain, the
Balearic Islands, and the north coast of Africa from Cabo Espartel to Ras Agedir.
53 152 The Mediterranean, Vol. II. The South Coast of France, the West Coast of Italy, and the
Islands of Corsica, Sardinia , and Sicily, Including the Neighboring islands.
54 153 The Mediterranean , Vol. III. The Southeast Coast of Italy, The Shores of the Adriatic, and
the Western Coast of Greece to Akra Taínaron .
55 154A The Mediterranean, Vol. IV. Libya, Egypt, Turkey ( Southern Coast ), Syria , Lebanon, Israel,
and the Islands of Crete, Scarpento , Rhodes, and Cyprus.
56 154B The Mediterranean, Vol. V. Aegean Sea .
60 156 Southeast Coast of Africa. Cape of Good Hope to Ras Hafun.
61 157 Red Sea and the Gulf of Aden . Including The Suez Canal, the Gulf of Suez, the Gulf of
Akaba, the southeastern coast of Arabia as far as Ras al Hadd, the coast of Africa from
Ras Asir to Ras Hafun, and the islands eastward of Ras Asir.
62 158 The Persian Gulf. Including the Gulf of Oman , and the Northern Shore of the Arabian Sea
as Far Eastward as Ras Muari.
63 159 West Coast of India. Including Ceylon , and the Maldive and Laccadive Islands.
64 180 Bay of Bengal. The Coasts of India, Pakistan, Burma, and Thailand from Calimere Point to
Salang Island-the Andaman Islands, Nicobar Islands, and the Mergui Archipelago .
65 161 South Indian Ocean. Madagascar and the islands west of longitude 90 ° east.
70 162 Malacca Strait and Sumatra. Malacca Strait and West Coast of Sumatra with Adjacent
Islands.
72 163 Celebes, Southeast Borneo, Java and Islands East of Java. Except the western coast of Java
from Java Head to Djakarta.
73 164 New Guinea . Including the islands eastward of Celebes and Timor .
82 165A The Pacific Islands, Vol. I. Western groups, including the Solomon Islands.
81 165B The Pacific Islands, Vol. II. The Santa Cruz Group), the New Hebrides, New Caledonia , and
adjacent islands.
80 166 The Pacific Islands, Vol. III. Eastern Groups.
77 167 South Coast of Australia. Cape Leeuwin to Cape Worthumberland .
76 168 Southeast Coast of Australia. Cape Northumberland to and including Port Jackson, Bass
Strait , and Tasmania .
75 169 The East Coast of Australia Sydney Harbor to Cape York, including the islands of the Cora)
Sea , Torres Strait and the Inner Route.
74 170 North and West Coasts of Australia. From the western approach to Torres Strait to Cape
Leeuwin .
78 171 New Zealand. Kermadec Islands, Chatham Islands, and the off- lying islands southeastward
and southward of New Zealand.
23 172 South America, Vol. I. Fast coast from the Orinoco River to and including Rio de la Plata .
24 173 South America, Vol. II. Southern part from the Rio de la Plata to Cabo Tres Montes, includ
ing the islands north of latitude 60 ° south.
25 174 South America, Vol. III. West coast from Gulf of Panama to Cabo Tres Montes, including
off- lying islands.
10 175 British Columbia ,Vol. I. The Coast of British Columbia from Strait of Juan de Fuca to Cape
Caution , Including Vancouver Island and the inner passages.
11 176 British Columbia, Vol. II. The coast of British Columbia from Cape Caution to Portland
Inlet, including the Queen Charlotte Islands and Dixon Entrance.
* Sailing Directions have been renumbered in accordance with a new policy of area identification .
Old numbers will be carried in parenthesis indefinitely.

UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN

H.O. 86
3 9015 08188 5843